Tekla Structures 2017i

Advanced options reference

September 2017

©2017 Trimble Solutions Corporation

Contents

1 Advanced options reference...................................................... 19

2 Categories in the Advanced Options dialog box ..................... 20

3 Alphabetical list of advanced options ......................................22

3.1 A........................................................................................................................ 22
XS_AD_CURVED_BEAM_SPLIT_ACCURACY_MM ................................................................. 22
XS_AD_ELEMENT_ANGLE_CHECK_ANGLE_DIFF_LIMIT ......................................................23
XS_AD_ENVIRONMENT.......................................................................................................... 23
XS_AD_GET_MOMENT_CONNECTION_STATUS................................................................... 23
XS_AD_GET_RESULTS_DESIGN_VALUES...............................................................................24
XS_AD_GET_RESULTS_FORCES............................................................................................. 24
XS_AD_MEMBER_NUMBER_VISUALIZATION ...................................................................... 25
XS_AD_MEMBER_RESULT_DISP_DIVISION_COUNT............................................................ 25
XS_AD_MEMBER_RESULT_DIVISION_COUNT...................................................................... 25
XS_AD_MEMBER_RESULT_GRID_SIZE...................................................................................26
XS_AD_MEMBER_RESULT_MIN_DISTANCE.......................................................................... 26
XS_AD_MEMBER_TYPE_VISUALIZATION ..............................................................................27
XS_AD_NEAR_NODES_WARNING_LIMIT.............................................................................. 27
XS_AD_NODE_NUMBER_BY_Z...............................................................................................28
XS_AD_NODE_NUMBER_VISUALIZATION............................................................................ 28
XS_AD_OPTIMISATION_DISABLED .......................................................................................28
XS_AD_OPTIMISATION_NO_WEIGHT_SORT........................................................................ 29
XS_AD_OPTIMISATION_RECURSE_CATALOG ...................................................................... 29
XS_AD_RESULT_DATABASE_ENABLED..................................................................................29
XS_AD_RIGID_DIAPHRAGM_VISUALIZATION....................................................................... 30
XS_AD_SHORT_MEMBER_WARNING_LIMIT.........................................................................30
XS_AD_SHORT_RIGIDLINK_WARNING_LIMIT...................................................................... 31
XS_AD_SOLID_AXIAL_EXPAND_MM...................................................................................... 31
XS_AD_SUPPORT_VISUALIZATION .......................................................................................31
XS_AD_USE_HIGH_ACCURACY.............................................................................................. 31
XS_ADAPTIVE_OBJECTS..........................................................................................................32
XS_ADJUST_GRID_LABELS .................................................................................................... 32
XS_AISC_WELD_MARK ...........................................................................................................32
XS_ALLOW_DRAWING_TO_MANY_MULTI_DRAWINGS ...................................................... 33
XS_ALLOW_INCH_MARK_IN_DIMENSIONS ......................................................................... 34
XS_ALLOW_INCH_MARK_IN_WELD_SYMBOLS ................................................................... 34
XS_ALLOW_REBARS_ON_TOP_OF_EACH_OTHER................................................................34
XS_ALLOW_REINFORCING_LOCKED_PARTS........................................................................ 35
XS_ALLOW_SHEAR_PLATE_CLASH_FLANGE ........................................................................35
XS_ALWAYS_CONFIRM_SAVE_WHEN_CLOSING_DRAWING .............................................. 35
XS_ALWAYS_CONFIRM_SAVE_WHEN_EXIT........................................................................... 35
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_ADDITIONAL_PARTS_FILTER ................................................... 36
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BASEPLATE_FILTER ...................................................................37
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BOLT_FILTER..............................................................................38

2
 XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_COLUMN_FILTER ...................................................................... 38
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_DRAWING_TOLERANCE ........................................................... 38
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_USE_VIEW_COORDSYS_FOR_BOLT_DIMENSIONS ................ 39
XS_ANGLE_DEGREE_SIGN..................................................................................................... 39
XS_ANGLE_DIMENSION_SYMBOL_SIZE_FACTOR ...............................................................39
XS_ANGLE_TEXT_IN_UNFOLDING_BENDING_LINE_DIMENSIONING .............................. 40
APPL_ERROR_LOG..................................................................................................................40
XS_APPLICATIONS ................................................................................................................. 41
XS_ARC_WIDTH_OF_CLOUD ................................................................................................. 41
XS_ASCII_IMPORT_CREATES_CONSTRUCTION_LINES ....................................................... 42
XS_ASSEMBLY_DRAWING_VIEW_TITLE ................................................................................42
XS_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING ...................................... 43
XS_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING ...........................................................45
XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_CODE_3D ................................................................................... 46
XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_CODE_TOLERANCE ................................................................... 46
XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_NEW_FORMAT............................................................................46
XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING .....................................................47
XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SIZE .....................................................................48
XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SYMBOL ............................................................. 48
XS_ATTRIBUTE_FILE_EXCLUDE_LIST .................................................................................... 49
XS_AUTOCONNECTION_TOLERANCE ..................................................................................49
XS_AUTOCONNECTION_USE_UDL .......................................................................................50
XS_AUTODEFAULT_UDL_PERCENT ...................................................................................... 50
XS_AUTOMATIC_NEW_MODEL_NAME................................................................................. 50
XS_AUTOMATIC_USER_FEEDBACK_SAVING_INTERVAL...................................................... 51
XS_AUTOMATIC_USER_FEEDBACK_SENDING_INTERVAL................................................... 51
XS_AUTOSAVE_DIRECTORY .................................................................................................. 51
3.2 B.........................................................................................................................52
XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR1..................................................................................................52
XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR2..................................................................................................52
XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR3..................................................................................................53
XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR4..................................................................................................53
XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH .......................................................................................................... 53
XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH_AFFECTS_SCREEN .......................................................................... 54
XS_BASICVIEW_HEIGHT ........................................................................................................ 54
XS_BASICVIEW_POSITION_X .................................................................................................55
XS_BASICVIEW_POSITION_Y .................................................................................................55
XS_BASICVIEW_WIDTH...........................................................................................................55
XS_BEVEL_DIMENSIONS_FOR_PROFILES_ONLY................................................................. 56
XSBIN ...................................................................................................................................... 56
XS_BLACK_DRAWING_BACKGROUND .................................................................................56
XS_BOLT_LENGTH_EPSILON ................................................................................................ 57
XS_BOLT_MARK_DIAMETER_PREFIX ....................................................................................57
XS_BOLT_MARK_IS_ALWAYS_VISIBLE................................................................................... 58
XS_BOLT_MARK_IS_ALWAYS_VISIBLE_IN_GA ......................................................................58
XS_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE .................................................................................... 59
XS_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA ........................................................................ 60
XS_BOLT_POSITION_TO_MIN_AND_MAX_POINT ...............................................................61
XS_BOLT_REPRESENTATION_SYMBOL_AXIS_POSITION_AS_EXACT_SOLID......................61
XS_BOLT_REPRESENTATION_USE_POSITIVE_CUT_LENGTH...............................................62
XS_BOLTS_PERPENDICULAR_TO_PART_PLANE_IN_NC ..................................................... 63
3.3 C.........................................................................................................................63
XS_CALCULATE_POLYBEAM_LENGTH_ALONG_REFERENCE_LINE ................................... 63
XS_CAST_UNIT_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING ..................................... 64
XS_CAST_UNIT_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING ..........................................................66

3
XS_CAST_UNIT_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING ....................................................68
XS_CENTER_LINE_TYPE.......................................................................................................... 69
XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_ONE_PART_STRING ........................................... 69
XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_TWO_PARTS_STRING .........................................70
XS_CHAMFER_ACCURACY_FACTOR ..................................................................................... 71
XS_CHAMFER_DISPLAY_LENGTH_FACTOR ..........................................................................72
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_DIMENSIONS_TO_FIXED ............................................................. 72
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_MARKS_TO_FIXED ........................................................................72
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_NOTES_TO_FIXED ........................................................................ 73
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_TEXTS_TO_FIXED ..........................................................................73
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_VIEWS_TO_FIXED ......................................................................... 73
XS_CHANGE_MARK_ASTERISK_TO .......................................................................................73
XS_CHANGE_WORKAREA_WHEN_MODIFYING_VIEW_DEPTH .......................................... 74
XS_CHECK_BOLT_EDGE_DISTANCE_ALWAYS.......................................................................74
XS_CHECK_FLAT_LENGTH_ALSO ..........................................................................................74
XS_CHECK_TRIANGLE_TEXT_SIZE ........................................................................................ 75
XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_FOR_SMALL_TUBE_SEGMENTS................................................. 76
XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_FOR_TUBE_SEGMENTS...............................................................76
XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_SMALL_TUBE_SIZE_LIMIT........................................................... 77
XS_CIS_DEP1_DATABASE_NAME .......................................................................................... 78
XS_CIS_DEP1_DATABASE_PASSW .........................................................................................78
XS_CIS_DEP1_DATABASE_PATH ............................................................................................78
XS_CIS_DEP1_EXPRESS_FILE .................................................................................................78
XS_CLASH_CHECK_BETWEEN_PARTS................................................................................... 79
XS_CLASH_CHECK_BETWEEN_REFERENCES........................................................................79
XS_CLASH_CHECK_BETWEEN_REINFORCING_BARS...........................................................80
XS_CLASH_CHECK_INSIDE_REFERENCE_MODELS.............................................................. 80
XS_CLEAR_MODEL_HISTORY ................................................................................................80
XS_CLONING_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY .................................................................................81
XS_CLOUD_SHARING_PROXY................................................................................................81
XS_CNC_CUT_PLANE_HEIGHT ..............................................................................................82
XS_CNC_HOLE_DIAMETER_ROUNDING ..............................................................................82
XS_COLLECT_MODEL_HISTORY............................................................................................ 83
XS_COMBINED_BOLT_DIM_CHARACTER ............................................................................ 83
XS_COMPANY_SETTINGS_DIRECTORY................................................................................. 84
XS_COMPLEX_PART_MEMBERS_DO_NOT_HAVE_TO_BE_MAIN_PARTS ........................... 84
XS_COMPONENT_CATALOG_ALLOW_SYSTEM_EDIT...........................................................84
XS_COMPONENT_CATALOG_DO_REPORT_LEGACY_FILE_ISSUES..................................... 84
XS_COMPONENT_CATALOG_COMPACT_THUMBNAIL_SIZE.............................................. 85
XS_COMPONENT_CATALOG_THUMBNAIL_SIZE..................................................................85
XS_CONCRETE_PART_NUMBERING_PREFIX ....................................................................... 85
XS_CONCRETE_PART_NUMBERING_START_NUMBER ....................................................... 86
XS_CONNECTING_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL ............................................................................ 86
XS_CONNECT_CONNECTION_PARTS_IN_AUTOCONNECTION.......................................... 87
XS_CONNECT_PLATE_PROFILES_IN_AUTOCONNECTION ................................................. 87
XS_CONSIDER_NEIGHBOUR_PARTS_IN_HIDDEN ...............................................................87
XS_CONSIDER_REBAR_NAME_IN_NUMBERING ................................................................. 88
XS_CONTOUR_PLATE_POINT_ON_SAME_LINE_LIMIT.........................................................89
XS_CONTOUR_PLATE_POINT_ON_SAME_LINE_LIMIT_FOR_CLOSE_POINTS....................89
XS_CONVERT_OLD_FORCE_UNITS_TO_SI_FROM ............................................................... 89
XS_CONVERT_OLD_MOMENT_UNITS_TO_SI_FROM .......................................................... 90
XS_COPY_REVISIONS_IN_AUTOMATIC_CLONING............................................................... 90
XS_COUNT_ALL_PARTS_IN_NSFS_REPEATED_PART_MARK ...............................................90
XS_COUNT_BOTH_PARTS_IN_NSFS_PART_MARK .............................................................. 91
XS_CREATE_ALSO_BIG_HTML_REPORT_PICTURES............................................................. 92

4
 XS_CREATE_DRAWING_PREVIEW_AUTOMATICALLY........................................................... 92
XS_CREATE_MISSING_MARKS_IN_INTELLIGENT_CLONING............................................... 92
XS_CREATE_ROUND_HOLE_DIMENSIONS .......................................................................... 92
XS_CREATE_CONNECTION_WHEN_COPYING_DRAWING_VIEWS ..................................... 93
XS_DRAWING_CREATE_SNAPSHOT_ON_DRAWING_CREATION....................................... 94
XS_CREATE_VIEW_FROM_MODEL_OLD_WAY ..................................................................... 94
XS_CS_CHAMFER_DIVIDE_ANGLE ........................................................................................ 94
XS_CURVED_AXIS_PLACE ...................................................................................................... 95
XS_CUSTOM_COMPONENT_DECIMALS............................................................................... 96
XS_CUT_SYMBOL_FONT ....................................................................................................... 96
XS_CYCLIC_SOLVER_MAX_LOOPS ........................................................................................96
3.4 D........................................................................................................................ 96
DAK_BMPPATH ...................................................................................................................... 97
XSDATADIR.............................................................................................................................. 97
XS_DEFAULT_BREP_PATH...................................................................................................... 98
XS_DEFAULT_ENVIRONMENT............................................................................................... 98
XS_DEFAULT_FONT ............................................................................................................... 99
XS_DEFAULT_FONT_SIZE ...................................................................................................... 99
XS_DEFAULT_FONT_SIZE_GRID...........................................................................................100
XS_DEFAULT_HEIGHT_FOR_CALCULATED_DRAWING_SIZE............................................. 100
XS_DEFAULT_LICENSE......................................................................................................... 100
XS_DEFAULT_MODEL_TEMPLATE....................................................................................... 101
XS_DEFAULT_ROLE...............................................................................................................102
XS_DEFAULT_WIDTH_FOR_CALCULATED_DRAWING_SIZE...............................................102
XS_DELETE_UNNECESSARY_DG_FILES...............................................................................102
XS_DELETE_UNNECESSARY_DG_FILES_SAFETY_PERIOD................................................. 103
XS_DELETE_UNNECESSARY_INT_ARRAYS.......................................................................... 103
XS_DELETE_UNNECESSARY_REFMODEL_FILES_SAFETY_PERIOD .................................. 104
XS_DETAIL_BOUNDARY_RADIUS ....................................................................................... 104
XS_DETAIL_MARK_REFERENCE_SYMBOL...........................................................................104
XS_DETAIL_SYMBOL_REFERENCE ...................................................................................... 105
XS_DETAIL_VIEW_REFERENCE ............................................................................................ 106
XS_DGN_EXPORT_PART_AS ................................................................................................ 107
XS_DGN_EXPORT_USE_LOCAL_ID ..................................................................................... 107
XS_DIALOG_ENABLE_STATE................................................................................................ 108
XS_DIMENSION_ALL_BOLT_GROUPS_SEPARATELY..........................................................108
XS_DIMENSION_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR ............................................................................109
XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_CHARACTER ............................................................ 110
XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_COUNT .................................................................... 110
XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_AWAY_FACTOR ......................................................... 111
XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_ORIGIN_OFFSET .......................................................111
XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_TOWARD_FACTOR ................................................... 111
XS_DIMENSION_FONT ........................................................................................................ 112
XS_DIMENSION_GROUPING_COUNT_SEPARATOR...........................................................112
XS_DIMENSION_LINE_TEXT_EPS ........................................................................................113
XS_DIMENSION_MARK_CONNECTOR................................................................................ 113
XS_DIMENSION_MARK_MULTIPLIER..................................................................................113
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_ASSEMBLY ................................................ 114
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_SINGLE ...................................................... 115
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_STRICT_POSITION.......................................... 115
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_CENTER ................................................. 116
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_LEFT ....................................................... 116
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_RIGHT .................................................... 116
XS_DIMENSION_SKEWED_BOLTS_IN_PART_PLANE_IN_SINGLE_DRAWINGS ............... 117
XS_DIR .................................................................................................................................. 117

5
XS_DISABLE_ADVANCED_OPTIONS ...................................................................................117
XS_DISABLE_ANALYSIS_AND_DESIGN............................................................................... 118
XS_DISABLE_CANCEL_DIALOG_FOR_SAVE_NUMBERING_SAVE...................................... 118
XS_DISABLE_CIS2................................................................................................................. 119
XS_DISABLE_CLASSIFIER_FOR_MODIFIED_PARTS ............................................................119
XS_DISABLE_DRAWING_PLOT_DATE ................................................................................. 119
XS_DISABLE_PARTIAL_REFRESH ........................................................................................ 120
XS_DISABLE_REBAR_MODELING........................................................................................ 120
XS_DISABLE_TEMPLATE_DOUBLE_CLICK...........................................................................120
XS_DISABLE_VIEW_CENTERING_ASSEMBLY ..................................................................... 121
XS_DISABLE_VIEW_CENTERING_GA .................................................................................. 121
XS_DISABLE_VIEW_CENTERING_MULTI ............................................................................ 121
XS_DISABLE_VIEW_CENTERING_SINGLE ...........................................................................122
XS_DISPLAY_DIMENSIONS_WHEN_CREATING_OBJECTS..................................................122
XS_DISPLAY_DIMENSIONS_WHEN_SELECTING_OBJECTS................................................122
XS_DISPLAY_FILLET_EDGES................................................................................................. 123
XS_DISPLAY_ZERO_INCHES ................................................................................................ 124
XS_DISTANT_OBJECT_FINDER_TOLERANCE...................................................................... 124
XS_DO_NOT_CREATE_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS_FOR_CONCRETE_PARTS ....................... 124
XS_DO_NOT_CREATE_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS_FOR_LOOSE_PARTS............................... 125
XS_DO_NOT_CREATE_BOLT_MARKS_IN_ALL_INCLUDED_SINGLE_VIEWS......................125
XS_DO_NOT_CREATE_PART_MARKS_IN_ALL_INCLUDED_SINGLE_VIEWS...................... 125
XS_DO_NOT_CREATE_PROFILE_DIMENSIONS_FOR_CONCRETE .................................... 126
XS_DO_NOT_DISPLAY_CHAMFERS .................................................................................... 126
XS_DO_NOT_DRAW_COLUMN_MARKS_AT_45_DEGREES_IN_GA_DRAWING ................126
XS_DO_NOT_EXTEND_DIMENSION_LINES_THROUGH_ALL_HOLES ..............................128
XS_DO_NOT_PLOT_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLES ........................................................... 128
XS_DO_NOT_OVERWRITE_PLUGIN_INP_FILE.................................................................... 128
XS_DO_NOT_REMOVE_END_ABSOLUTE_DIMENSIONS .................................................. 129
XS_DO_NOT_USE_FOLDED_GUSSET_PLATE ..................................................................... 130
XS_DO_NOT_USE_GLOBAL_PLATE_SIDE ........................................................................... 130
XS_DONT_SHOW_POLYBEAM_MID_EDGES ......................................................................131
XS_DRAW_ALL_SECTION_EDGES_IN_DRAWINGS............................................................. 132
XS_DRAW_ANGLE_AND_RADIUS_INFO_IN_UNFOLDING ................................................ 132
XS_DRAW_BENDING_LINE_DIMENSIONS_IN_UNFOLDING ............................................ 133
XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES ....................................................................................... 133
XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS ........................................ 135
XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_GA_DRAWINGS ......................................................135
XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_SINGLE_DRAWINGS .............................................. 136
XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES ............................................................................ 136
XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS ............................. 137
XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_GA_DRAWINGS ...........................................137
XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_SINGLE_DRAWINGS ................................... 138
XS_DRAW_BOLTS_PERPENDICULAR_TO_PART_IN_SINGLE_DRAWINGS ....................... 139
XS_DRAW_BOLTS_THROUGH_NEIGHBOUR_PARTS ........................................................ 139
XS_DRAW_CAST_PHASE_INTERNAL_LINES ....................................................................... 141
XS_DRAW_CAST_UNIT_INTERNAL_LINES ..........................................................................142
XS_DRAW_CHAMFERS_HANDLES ...................................................................................... 142
XS_DRAW_CROSS_AXIS .......................................................................................................143
XS_DRAW_CUT_FACES_WITH_RED_COLOR....................................................................... 144
XS_DRAW_HIDDEN_FACES ................................................................................................. 144
XS_DRAW_HORIZONTAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS............................ 145
XS_DRAW_INSIDE_ANGLE_IN_UNFOLDING ..................................................................... 145
XS_DRAW_LONG_HOLE_DIMENSIONS ............................................................................. 146
XS_DRAW_MESH_OUTLINE_SYMBOL_FROM_BOTTOM_LEFT_TO_TOP_RIGHT............. 146

6
XS_DRAW_ROOT_OPENING_EVEN_WHEN_ZERO............................................................. 146
XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_PART_MARKS ......................................................147
XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_PART_MARKS_MINIMUM_LENGTH................... 147
XS_DRAW_SKEWED_ELEVATIONS ...................................................................................... 148
XS_DRAW_VERTICAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS...................................148
XS_DRAWING_ALLOW_NEW_SECTIONS_IN_REDIMENSIONING..................................... 149
XS_DRAWING_ALLOW_SNAPPING_TO_DISTANT_POINTS............................................... 150
XS_DRAWING_ASSEMBLY_HATCH_SCHEMA .................................................................... 150
XS_DRAWING_CAST_UNIT_HATCH_SCHEMA ....................................................................150
XS_DRAWING_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_COLOR .................................................................. 151
XS_DRAWING_CLONING_IGNORE_CHECK........................................................................ 152
XS_DRAWING_COMBINE_ADDED_DIMENSIONS.............................................................. 152
XS_DRAWING_CUT_VIEW_COMPARISON_CRITERIA ........................................................ 153
XS_DRAWING_FILTER_UDAS_WITHOUT_TYPE_CHECK.....................................................153
XS_DRAWING_GA_HATCH_SCHEMA ..................................................................................154
XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_FIXED_WIDTH..........................................................154
XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_LINE_WIDTH_FACTOR ........................................... 155
XS_DRAWING_HISTORY_LOG_TYPE ...................................................................................156
XS_DRAWING_IGNORE_ZERO_LEVELS_IN_PART_MARKS ................................................156
XS_DRAWING_PART_REFERENCE_LINE_TYPE ...................................................................157
XS_DRAWING_PART_SYMBOL_REPRESENTATION_TYPE.................................................. 158
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_DIRECTORY .............................................................................. 158
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME ....................................................................................... 158
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_A ................................................................................... 159
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_W .................................................................................. 160
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_G ...................................................................................160
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_M .................................................................................. 161
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_C ................................................................................... 161
XS_DRAWING_POINT_SCALE ..............................................................................................162
XS_DRAWING_SCALE_SEPARATOR_CHAR ......................................................................... 162
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_HEIGHT ........................................................................................... 163
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_X ................................................................................... 163
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_Y ....................................................................................163
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_WIDTH .............................................................................................164
XS_DRAWING_SINGLE_PART_HATCH_SCHEMA ................................................................164
XS_DRAWING_SNAPSHOT_CREATION................................................................................165
XS_DRAWING_SOLID_MERGE_TOLERANCE.......................................................................165
XS_DRAWING_STUD_REPRESENTATION............................................................................ 167
XS_DRAWING_TEMPLATES_LIBRARY ................................................................................. 168
XS_DRAWING_UDAS_MODIFY_ALL_DRAWING_TYPES .................................................... 169
XS_DRAWING_UPDATE_VIEW_PLACING ............................................................................169
XS_DRAWING_USE_WORKSHOP_FORM
_FOR_DOUBLE_PARTS_IN_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS......................................................170
XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_FRONT ............................................. 171
XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_TOP ..................................................172
XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BACK ................................................172
XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BOTTOM ......................................... 173
XS_DRAWING_VIEW_REFERENCE_SYMBOL ...................................................................... 173
XS_DRIVER ............................................................................................................................174
XS_DSTV_CREATE_AK_BLOCK_FOR_ALL_PLATES.............................................................. 174
XS_DSTV_CREATE_AK_BLOCK_FOR_ALL_PROFILES.......................................................... 174
XS_DSTV_CREATE_NOTCH_ONLY_ON_BEAM_CORNERS..................................................175
XS_DSTV_DO_NOT_UNFOLD_POLYBEAM_PLATES........................................................... 177
XS_DSTV_LIST_NET_WEIGHT...............................................................................................178
XS_DSTV_LIST_SEPARATOR ................................................................................................ 178

7
 XS_DSTV_NET_LENGTH ...................................................................................................... 178
XS_DSTV_NO_SAWING_ANGLES_FOR_PLATES_NEEDED..................................................179
XS_DSTV_NUMBER_OF_PARTS_BY_SELECTION................................................................ 180
XS_DSTV_PLATE_PROFILE_WITH_WIDTH........................................................................... 180
XS_DSTV_PRINT_NET_AND_GROSS_LENGTH ...................................................................180
XS_DSTV_REAL_WIDTH_INTO_HEADER_PROFILE_FOR_PLATES...................................... 181
XS_DSTV_USE_COUNTERSUNK_HOLES............................................................................. 182
XS_DSTV_USE_EQUAL_ACCURACY_FOR_PLATE_PROFILE_AND_WIDTH.........................182
XS_DSTV_USE_ONE_VERTEX_SHARP_INNER_CORNER ....................................................182
XS_DSTV_USE_REAL_DIMENSIONS_IN_HEADER............................................................... 183
XS_DSTV_WRITE_BEHIND_FACE_FOR_PLATE ....................................................................183
XS_DUPLICATE_CHECK_LIMIT_FOR_COPY_AND_MOVE................................................... 183
XS_DWG_EXPORT_UPDATE_TS_LINEWORK_OPTION ...................................................... 184
XS_DWG_IMPORT_IGNORE_UNITS ....................................................................................184
XS_DXF_FONT_CONVERSION_FILE..................................................................................... 185
XS_DXF_FONT_NAME ..........................................................................................................186
XS_DXF_TEXT_HEIGHT_FACTOR .........................................................................................186
XS_DXF_TEXT_WIDTH_FACTOR .......................................................................................... 186
DXK_FONTPATH ...................................................................................................................187
DXK_SYMBOLPATH ..............................................................................................................187
3.5 E....................................................................................................................... 188
XS_ENABLE_FAST_CUSTOM_ PROPERTY_LOADING........................................................ 188
XS_ENABLE_INNER_CONTOURS_IN_CUT_PARTS ............................................................. 189
XS_ENABLE_MIDDLE_BUTTON_DOUBLE_CLICK_ZOOM_ORIGINAL............................... 190
XS_ENABLE_POUR_MANAGEMENT....................................................................................190
XS_ENABLE_PUBLISH_TO_TEKLA_BIMSIGHT ................................................................... 190
XS_ENABLE_PULLOUT_PLACEHOLDERS ...........................................................................191
XS_ENABLE_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POINT_OPTIMIZATION...................... 192
XS_EQUAL_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS_TO_BOTH_ENDS_LIMIT ............................................. 192
XS_ERASE_UDA_VALUE_WITH_ATTRIBUTE_IMPORT_NULL_AND_BLANK...................... 193
XS_EXCLUDED_PARTS_IN_ORIENTATIONAL_NUMBERING.............................................. 193
XS_EXPORT_CODEPAGE.......................................................................................................194
XS_EXPORT_DGN_COORDINATE_SCALE ........................................................................... 195
XS_EXPORT_DGN_FILENAME ............................................................................................. 196
XS_EXPORT_DGN_INCLUDE_CUTS .................................................................................... 196
XS_EXPORT_DGN_INCLUDE_INNER_CONTOUR ...............................................................196
XS_EXPORT_DGN_ROUND_SEGMENTS ............................................................................ 197
XS_EXPORT_DGN_USE_CLASS_AS_COLOR ....................................................................... 197
XS_EXPORT_DGN_USE_VOLUMETRIC ............................................................................... 197
XS_EXPORT_DRAWING_TRY_TO_KEEP_LOCATION........................................................... 198
XS_EXPORT_FILLMODE........................................................................................................198
XS_EXPORT_LINE_TYPE_DEFINITION_FILE.........................................................................199
XS_EXPORT_STEEL2000_PRIMARY_IDS ............................................................................. 199
XS_EXTENSION_DIRECTORY................................................................................................200
XS_EXTERNAL_EXCEL_DESIGN_PATH ................................................................................ 200
3.6 F....................................................................................................................... 200
XS_FILTER_SEPARATOR_CHAR ........................................................................................... 200
XS_FIRM ................................................................................................................................201
XS_FIX_FRAME_OF_FIXED_MODELVIEW.............................................................................201
XS_FLAT_PREFIX ...................................................................................................................202
XS_FLAT_THICKNESS_TOLERANCE .................................................................................... 202
XS_FLAT_TOLERANCE ..........................................................................................................202
FLEXLM_TIMEOUT................................................................................................................203
XS_FRACTION_HEIGHT_FACTOR ........................................................................................ 203
XS_FS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK ....................................................................203

8
3.7 G...................................................................................................................... 204
XS_GA_CONNECTING_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL.................................................................... 204
XS_GA_DRAWING_VIEW_TITLE ...........................................................................................204
XS_GAGE_OF_OUTSTANDING_LEG_STRING .....................................................................204
XS_GA_HIDDEN_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL ........................................................................ 205
XS_GA_NORTH_MARK_SCALE ............................................................................................ 205
XS_GA_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL ........................................................................................ 206
XS_GA_OMITTED_DIAMETER_TYPE ................................................................................... 206
XS_GET_ASSEMBLY_LEVELS_FROM_ASSEMBLY_MAIN_PART.......................................... 206
XS_GET_CAST_UNIT_LEVELS_FROM_CAST_UNIT_MAIN_PART........................................ 207
XS_GOL_SYMMETRY_DISTANCE......................................................................................... 207
XS_GRID_DIMENSION_OVERALL_LENGTH ....................................................................... 207
XS_GRID_COLOR ................................................................................................................. 207
XS_GRID_COLOR_FOR_WORK_PLANE ...............................................................................208
XS_GRID_PLANES_VISIBLE_WITH_USERPLANES............................................................... 209
XS_GRID_TEXT_FONT .......................................................................................................... 209
3.8 H...................................................................................................................... 209
XS_HANDLE_SCALE ............................................................................................................. 209
XS_HATCH_SCALE_LIMIT......................................................................................................210
XS_HATCH_SEGMENT_BUFFER_SIZE ................................................................................. 210
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_ACI........................................................................................ 210
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R .......................................................................................... 211
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_G .......................................................................................... 211
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_B .......................................................................................... 211
XS_HELP_PATH......................................................................................................................212
XS_HIDDEN_LINES_CHECK_TOLERANCE .......................................................................... 212
XS_HIDDEN_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL ............................................................................... 212
XS_HIDDEN_REMOVE_DOUBLE_LINES ............................................................................. 213
XS_HIDDEN_USE_BOLT_PLANES ....................................................................................... 213
XS_HIDE_OTHER_PARTS_IN_ASSEMBLY_AND_CAST_UNIT_VIEWS..................................213
XS_HIDE_WORKAREA........................................................................................................... 214
XS_HIGHLIGHT_ASSOCIATIVE_DIMENSION_CHANGES ...................................................215
XS_HIGHLIGHT_MARK_CONTENT_CHANGES ...................................................................215
XS_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE .................................................................................. 216
XS_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA ......................................................................217
3.9 I........................................................................................................................217
XS_IGNORE_SUBASSEMBLY_HIERARCHY_IN_DIMENSIONING....................................... 218
XS_IMPERIAL ........................................................................................................................ 218
XS_IMPERIAL_DATE ............................................................................................................. 218
XS_IMPERIAL_INPUT ........................................................................................................... 219
XS_IMPERIAL_TIME ..............................................................................................................219
XS_IMPERIAL_TRIANGLES ...................................................................................................219
XS_IMPORT_DWG_TEXT_AS_POLYGON ............................................................................ 219
XS_IMPORT_MODEL_LOG .................................................................................................. 220
XS_INCH_SIGN_ALWAYS ..................................................................................................... 220
XS_INCLUDE_DWG_ATTRIBUTES_IN_REPORTS_AND_INQUIRE.......................................220
XS_INHERIT_CONCRETE_PART_NUMBERING_SETTINGS_FROM_CAST_UNIT................221
XS_INP .................................................................................................................................. 221
XS_INTELLIGENCE_DO_NOT_REMOVE_OBSOLETE_VIEWS ............................................. 221
XS_INTELLIGENCE_DO_NOT_REMOVE_OBSOLETE_VIEWS_IN_GA .................................222
XS_INTELLIGENCE_MAX_PART_COUNT............................................................................. 222
XS_INTELLIGENCE_MAX_PLANE_COUNT...........................................................................222
XS_INTELLIGENCE_MAX_RULE_COUNT............................................................................. 223
XS_INTELLIGENT_CLONING_ADD_DIMENSIONS.............................................................. 223

9
 XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED ........................................................................... 223
XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED_IN_GA ............................................................... 224
XS_INTELLIGENT_MESSAGES_ALLOWED .......................................................................... 224
XS_INTELLIGENT_UPDATE_ADD_DIMENSIONS.................................................................225
XS_INVALID_POUR_BREAK_COLOR.................................................................................... 225
XS_I_PROFILE_CENTER ........................................................................................................225
3.10 J........................................................................................................................226
XS_JOINT_NUMBER_FORMAT .............................................................................................226
XS_JOINTS_USE_NOTCH1 ................................................................................................... 226
3.11 K.......................................................................................................................226
XS_KEEP_AUTOSAVE_FILES_ON_EXIT_WHEN_NOT_SAVING ........................................... 227
XS_KEYIN_ABSOLUTE_PREFIX ............................................................................................ 227
XS_KEYIN_DEFAULT_MODE.................................................................................................227
XS_KEYIN_GLOBAL_PREFIX .................................................................................................228
XS_KEYIN_RELATIVE_PREFIX ............................................................................................... 228
XS_KNOCK_OFF_DIMENSION_PRECISION.........................................................................229
3.12 L....................................................................................................................... 229
XS_LANGUAGE......................................................................................................................229
XS_LEADER_LINE_TO_DRAGGED_DIMENSION_TEXT....................................................... 229
XS_LINE_WIDTH ...................................................................................................................230
XS_LICENSE_SERVER_HOST.................................................................................................230
XS_LOAD_MODELING_CODE.............................................................................................. 231
XS_LOG_FILE_NAME ............................................................................................................231
XS_LOGPATH ........................................................................................................................231
XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE ....................................................................... 232
XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA ........................................................... 233
3.13 M......................................................................................................................233
XS_MACRO_DIRECTORY ..................................................................................................... 234
XS_MACRO_ENABLE_TIMESTAMP ..................................................................................... 234
XS_MACRO_LOG ..................................................................................................................235
XS_MACRO_REFERENCES ................................................................................................... 235
XS_MAGNETIC_PLANE_OFFSET...........................................................................................235
XS_MARK_ALL_BOLT_GROUPS_SEPARATELY ................................................................... 236
XS_MARK_ELEMENT_SPACE_FACTOR ................................................................................237
XS_MARK_FONT .................................................................................................................. 237
XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_ARROW_HEIGHT .......................................................................238
XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_ARROW_LENGTH ...................................................................... 238
XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_EXTENSION_LENGTH ............................................................... 238
XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_FOR_NO_FRAME .......................................... 239
XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_FOR_RECTANGULAR_FRAME ......................241
XS_MARK_LINE_SPACE_FACTOR ........................................................................................ 242
XS_MARK_TEXT_FRAME_BOX_HEIGHT_FACTOR .............................................................. 243
XS_MATERIAL_SYMBOL_REPRESENTATION_FILE ............................................................. 244
XS_MAX_ANGLE_BETWEEN_SKEWED_END_PLATE_AND_BEAM_END ........................... 244
XS_MAX_ANGLE_TOLERANCE_BETWEEN_COMPLEX_MAIN_PARTS ...............................244
XS_MAX_AUTOMATIC_RADIUS_DIMENSION .................................................................... 245
XS_MAX_DECIMALS_IN_PROFILE_NAME ...........................................................................245
XS_MAX_DEVIATION_FOR_CURVED_PART_EDGES............................................................245
XS_MAX_FRACTIONS_IN_MODEL_DIMENSION ................................................................246
XS_MAXIMUM_NUMBER_OF_PLANES_TO_NAME.............................................................246
XS_MAX_MERGE_DISTANCE_IN_HORIZONTAL .................................................................247
XS_MAX_MERGE_DISTANCE_IN_VERTICAL ....................................................................... 247
XS_MAX_SPACE_BETWEEN_COMPLEX_ASSEMBLY_PARALLEL_PARTS ...........................247
XS_MDIBASICVIEWPARENT ................................................................................................ 248

10
 XS_MDIVIEWPARENT ...........................................................................................................248
XS_MDIZOOMPARENT ........................................................................................................ 249
XS_MESSAGES ......................................................................................................................249
XS_MIN_DISTANCE_FOR_CONNECTING_SIDE_MARK.......................................................249
XS_MIN_MERGE_PART_COUNT ..........................................................................................250
XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_CHARACTERS ............................................... 251
XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_PART_MULTI_CHARACTERS ......................................................... 251
XS_MIN_WELD_LINE_LENGTH............................................................................................ 251
XS_MIS_FILE_DIRECTORY ....................................................................................................252
XS_MIS_SEQUENCE.............................................................................................................. 252
XS_MODEL_BACKUP_DIRECTORY.......................................................................................253
XS_MODEL_IMPORT_LOCK_OBJECTS.................................................................................253
XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR ........................................ 253
XS_MODEL_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY................................................................................... 254
XS_MULTIDRAWING_KEEP_OBSOLETE_DRAWINGS......................................................... 254
XS_MULTIDRAWING_REMOVE_VIEW_LABEL_GAP ........................................................... 254
XS_MULTI_DRAWING_VIEW_PLACING_TRIAL_NUMBER.................................................. 255
XS_MULTI_DRAWING_VIEW_TITLE......................................................................................255
XS_MULTI_NUMBERING_INCLUDE_ASSEMBLY_PARTS.................................................... 255
XS_MULTIPLIER_SEPARATOR_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK ............................................. 256
3.14 N...................................................................................................................... 256
XS_NEIGHBOUR_PART_SKEW_LIMIT ................................................................................. 256
XS_NO_AUTO_DISPLAY_VIEWS .......................................................................................... 256
XS_NO_BOLT_ANGLE_DIMENSIONS ................................................................................. 257
XS_NO_CHAMFERS_IN_EXACT_MODE .............................................................................. 257
XS_NO_END_VIEWS_TO_INCLUDED_SINGLE_DRAWINGS .............................................. 257
XS_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS ........................................................................... 258
XS_NO_UNFOLDING_LINES_TO_DRAWINGS.....................................................................258
XS_NO_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS_FOR ............................................................................258
XS_NORTH_MARK_SCALE ...................................................................................................259
XS_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL ...............................................................................................259
XS_NSFS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK ...............................................................259
XS_NSFS_TEXT_POSITION_IN_PART_MARK ...................................................................... 260
XS_NS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK ...................................................................261
XS_NUMBERING_RESULTS_DIALOG_DISPLAY_TIME........................................................ 261
3.15 O...................................................................................................................... 262
XS_OBJECT_SELECTION_CONFIRMATION.......................................................................... 262
XS_OBJECTLOCK_DEFAULT..................................................................................................262
XS_OMIT_MARKS_OF_HIDDEN_PARTS_IN_GA_DRAWINGS ............................................ 262
XS_OMIT_MARKS_OF_PARTS_OUT_OF_VIEW_PLANE_LIMIT_ANGLE ............................. 263
XS_OMITTED_BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE ...............................................................................263
XS_OMITTED_BOLT_TYPE ...................................................................................................264
XS_OMITTED_DIAMETER_TYPE .......................................................................................... 264
XS_OMITTED_PART_NAME_IN_AUTOCONNECTION ....................................................... 264
XS_OMITTED_WELD_TYPE ..................................................................................................265
XS_OPEN_DRAWINGS_MAXIMIZED.................................................................................... 265
XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_DIRECTION ............................................................................... 266
XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_BEAMS ....................................................... 266
XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_BEAMS_IN_GA ........................................... 266
XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_COLUMNS ..................................................267
XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_COLUMNS_IN_GA ..................................... 267
3.16 P.......................................................................................................................268
XS_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATOR ............................................................................268
XS_PART_DIMENSION_PLANES_TABLE ............................................................................. 268

11
 XS_PART_MERGE_MAX_DISTANCE .....................................................................................269
XS_PART_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING .................................................................. 269
XS_PART_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING ............................................................ 270
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_NEIGHBOUR ........................................... 271
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE ......................................................................... 272
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE_IN_COLUMNS_ALSO .....................................273
XS_PIXEL_TOLERANCE......................................................................................................... 273
XS_PLATE_ROUNDING_DECIMALS .................................................................................... 274
XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_X .................................................................................................274
XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_Y .................................................................................................274
XS_PLOT_VIEW_FRAMES...................................................................................................... 275
PML_ASSEMBLY_MARKS_IN_USE ...................................................................................... 275
PML_CARDINAL_POINT_NOT_IN_USE ...............................................................................275
XS_PML_EXPORT_INCLUDE_GLOBAL_ID .......................................................................... 276
XS_PML_EXPORT_USE_ADDITIONAL_CUT_DIST .............................................................. 276
XS_POLYBEAM_CHORD_TOLERANCE................................................................................ 276
XS_POLYBEAM_MAX_ANGLE_BETWEEN_CS......................................................................277
XS_POLYBEAM_CURVATURE_TOLERANCE.........................................................................277
XS_POLYGON_CUT_EXTRA_THICKNESS ............................................................................ 278
XS_POLYGON_PERPENDICULAR_EDGE_PREFERENCE_FACTOR .....................................278
XS_POLYGON_SQUARE_CORNER_PREFERENCE_FACTOR ...............................................280
XS_POP_MARK_COLOR........................................................................................................282
XS_POP_MARK_HEIGHT.......................................................................................................282
XS_POP_MARK_SYMBOL..................................................................................................... 283
XS_POSITION_DIMENSIONS_FOR_HOLES_IN_SINGLE_SECONDARY_PARTS_IN_
ASSEMBLY_DRAWING..........................................................................................................283
XS_POUR_BREAK_COLOR.................................................................................................... 283
XS_POUR_BREAK_SYMBOL................................................................................................. 284
XS_POUR_OBJECT_COLOR.................................................................................................. 284
XS_PRIMARY_PART_FIRST....................................................................................................285
XS_PRINT_MULTISHEET_BORDER ..................................................................................... 285
XS_PRINT_REPORT_FONT ...................................................................................................285
XS_PRINT_REPORT_LINE_WIDTH_LANDSCAPE ................................................................ 286
XS_PRINT_REPORT_LINE_WIDTH_PORTRAIT ....................................................................286
XS_PRINT_REPORT_PAGE_HEIGHT_LANDSCAPE ............................................................. 287
XS_PRINT_REPORT_PAGE_HEIGHT_PORTRAIT ................................................................. 287
XS_PRODUCT_IDENTIFIER................................................................................................... 287
XS_PROFDB ..........................................................................................................................288
XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_CHECK_ALL .................................................................................. 289
XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_VALUE_DIFF_LIMIT ...................................................................... 289
XS_PROFILE_DISPLAY_INCH_MARK_AFTER_FRACTIONS_IN_REPORTS ..........................290
XS_PROJECT ......................................................................................................................... 290
XS_PROTECT_SYMBOLS ......................................................................................................291
3.17 R.......................................................................................................................291
XS_RADIUS_TEXT_IN_UNFOLDING_BENDING_LINE_DIMENSIONING ...........................291
XSR_BOLT_LENGTH_USE_ONLY_INCHES ..........................................................................291
XS_REBAR_BEND_MARK_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE .................................................................. 292
XS_REBAR_DIMENSION_LINE_SYMBOL............................................................................. 293
XS_REBAR_DIMENSION_MARK_MANUAL_CLOSE_TO_GEOMETRY ................................293
XS_REBAR_END_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE ................................................................................. 294
XS_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POINT_SEARCH_STEP_LENGTH .......................295
XS_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POINT_SEARCH_TOLERANCE .......................... 295
XS_REBAR_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING.......................................................... 295
XS_REBAR_PULLOUT_ANGLE_TEXT_FRAME ..................................................................... 297
XS_REBAR_PULLOUT_ANGLE_TEXT_UNDERLINE..............................................................297

12
 XS_REBAR_RECOGNITION_HOOKS_CONSIDERATION..................................................... 297
XS_REBAR_REVERSE_END_SYMBOLS ................................................................................ 298
XS_REBARSET_COLOR_BARGROUPS..................................................................................299
XS_REBAR_USE_ALWAYS_METHOD_A_FOR_90_DEGREE_HOOK_DIMENSIONS ........... 300
XS_RECREATE_MARKS_IN_INTELLIGENT_CLONING......................................................... 300
XS_RECREATE_UNMODIFIED_DRAWINGS .........................................................................300
XS_REFERENCE_CACHE........................................................................................................301
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_KEEP_VERSIONS_COUNT.......................................................... 301
XS_REFERENCE_USE_RENDERED_CLIPPING .....................................................................302
XS_REFRESH_ALSO_LOCKED_REFERENCE_MODELS........................................................ 302
XS_REMEMBER_LAST_PLOT_DIALOG_VALUES.................................................................. 303
XS_REMOVE_VOID_FROM_BOLT_MATERIAL_THICKNESS................................................ 303
XS_RENDERED_CURSOR_LINE_WIDTH ............................................................................. 303
XS_RENDERED_FIELD_OF_VIEW..........................................................................................304
XS_RENDERED_GL_FOG_END_VALUE................................................................................ 305
XS_RENDERED_GL_FOG_START_VALUE............................................................................. 306
XS_RENDERED_PIXEL_TOLERANCE_SCALE .......................................................................306
XS_REPORT_BOLTS_WITH_SUPPORTING_MEMBER ........................................................ 306
XS_REPORT_OUTPUT_DIRECTORY .................................................................................... 308
XS_RESTORE_ENABLES........................................................................................................ 309
XS_ROTATE_CUT_VIEWS ......................................................................................................309
XS_RUN_AT_STARTUP.......................................................................................................... 310
XS_RUNPATH ....................................................................................................................... 310
XSR_USE_NO_FEET_SEPARATOR ........................................................................................311
XSR_USE_NO_FEET_SYMBOL ............................................................................................. 311
XSR_USE_NO_INCH_SYMBOL ............................................................................................ 312
XSR_USE_ZERO_FEET_VALUE ............................................................................................. 312
XSR_USE_ZERO_INCH_FOR_FRACTIONS ...........................................................................312
XSR_USE_ZERO_INCH_VALUE ............................................................................................ 313
3.18 S....................................................................................................................... 313
XS_SAVE_WITH_COMMENT................................................................................................. 313
XS_SCALE_COPIED_OR_MOVED_OBJECTS_IN_DRAWINGS ............................................. 313
XS_SCALE_MARKS_TO_FIT_LIMIT .......................................................................................314
XS_SCREW_DIAMOND_WITHOUT_PHI ..............................................................................314
XS_SDNF_CONVERT_PL_PROFILE_TO_PLATE ................................................................... 314
XS_SDNF_EXPORT_INCLUDE_GLOBAL_ID ........................................................................ 315
XS_SDNF_IMPORT_MIRROR_SWAP_OFFSETS....................................................................315
XS_SDNF_IMPORT_STORE_MEMBER_NUMBER ............................................................... 315
XS_SECONDARY_PART_HARDSTAMP ................................................................................ 316
XS_SECTION_LINE_COLOR ................................................................................................. 316
XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_LEFT_ARROW_SYMBOL ............................................................... 317
XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_REFERENCE ...................................................................................318
XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_RIGHT_ARROW_SYMBOL ............................................................ 318
XS_SECTION_VIEW_REFERENCE .........................................................................................319
XS_SET_FIXEDMAINVIEW_UDA_TO_AFFECT_NUMBERING.............................................. 320
XS_SET_HATCH_ORIGIN_INTO_VIEW_ORIGIN................................................................... 321
XS_SHARING_INFO_URL...................................................................................................... 322
XS_SHARING_JOIN_SHOW_AVAILABLE_UPDATES............................................................. 322
XS_SHARING_READIN_SHOW_AVAILABLE_VERSIONS......................................................322
XS_SHARING_READIN_SHOW_CHANGEMANAGER.......................................................... 323
XS_SHARING_READIN_SHOW_CHANGEMANAGER_CONFLICTSONLY........................... 323
XS_SHARING_TEMP..............................................................................................................323
XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE .......................................................................324
XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA .......................................................... 325
XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE ...................................................................... 326

13
XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA ..........................................................326
XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE ............................................................327
XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA ............................................... 328
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_COLOR................................................................................... 329
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_LINE_TYPE............................................................................. 330
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_WITH_ZIGZAG....................................................................... 330
XS_SHOW_HARDWARE_DASHED_LINE_IN_PIXEL_SCALE.................................................331
XSR_SHOW_INCH_MARK_IN_PROFILE_NAMES ................................................................331
XS_SHOW_NOTIFICATION_REPORT....................................................................................332
XS_SHOW_PERFORM_NUMBERING_MESSAGE.................................................................333
XS_SHOW_PROGRESS_BAR_FOR_PROJECT_STATUS_VISUALIZATION............................ 333
XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRAWING_LIST ........................................................... 333
XS_SHOW_SITE_STUDS_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS ........................................................ 334
XS_SHOW_STUDS_IN_WORKSHOP_DRAWINGS .............................................................. 334
XS_SHOW_TEMPLATE_LOG_MESSAGES ............................................................................334
XS_SINGLE_CENTERED_SCREW ......................................................................................... 335
XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_DIMENSIONS ...................................................................................... 335
XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_SHORT_DIMENSIONS ........................................................................ 335
XS_SINGLE_COMBINE_DISTANCE ...................................................................................... 336
XS_SINGLE_COMBINE_MIN_DISTANCE ............................................................................. 336
XS_SINGLE_COMBINE_WAY ................................................................................................336
XS_SINGLE_DIMENSION_TYPE ...........................................................................................337
XS_SINGLE_DRAW_PART_AS ...............................................................................................338
XS_SINGLE_EXCLUDE .......................................................................................................... 338
XS_SINGLE_FORWARD_OFFSET ......................................................................................... 339
XS_SINGLE_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS .............................................................339
XS_SINGLE_NO_SHORTEN ................................................................................................. 340
XS_SINGLE_ORIENTATION_MARK ......................................................................................340
XS_SINGLE_PART_DRAWING_VIEW_TITLE .........................................................................340
XS_SINGLE_PART_EXTREMA ............................................................................................... 341
XS_SINGLE_PART_SHAPE .................................................................................................... 341
XS_SINGLE_SCALE................................................................................................................ 342
XS_SINGLE_SCREW_INTERNAL .......................................................................................... 342
XS_SINGLE_SCREW_POSITIONS .........................................................................................342
XS_SINGLE_USE_WORKING_POINTS ................................................................................. 343
XS_SINGLE_X_DIMENSION_TYPE ....................................................................................... 343
XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE ......................................................................... 344
XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA ............................................................. 345
XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE ......................................................................... 346
XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA .............................................................347
XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE ...............................................................348
XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA .................................................. 348
XS_SNAPSHOT_DIRECTORY ............................................................................................... 349
XS_SOLID_BUFFER_SIZE ..................................................................................................... 350
XS_SOLID_USE_HIGHER_ACCURACY ................................................................................. 351
XS_STACKED_FRACTION_TYPE ........................................................................................... 351
XS_STANDARD_GUSSET_WIDTH_TOLERANCE ................................................................. 352
XS_STANDARD_STIFFENER_WIDTH_TOLERANCE .............................................................353
XS_STD_LOCALE................................................................................................................... 353
XS_STD_PART_MODEL ........................................................................................................ 353
XS_STEEL1_TS_PAGE_9_EXTENSION...................................................................................354
XS_STEEL1_TS_PAGE_10_EXTENSION................................................................................ 354
XS_STORE_MULTIPLE_BAK_FILES....................................................................................... 356
XS_SUPERSCRIPT_HEIGHT_FACTOR .................................................................................. 356
XS_SUPERSCRIPT_USED_IN_DRAWING_TEXTS..................................................................357

14
 XS_SUPPORT_EMAIL_ADDRESS.......................................................................................... 357
XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR ................................................................................. 358
XS_SWITCH_POS_NUMBERS_FOR ..................................................................................... 358
SYMEDHOME .......................................................................................................................359
XS_SYSTEM ...........................................................................................................................359
3.19 T....................................................................................................................... 360
TEMPLATE_FONT_CONVERSION_FILE ...............................................................................360
XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY .................................................................................................360
XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY_SYSTEM ................................................................................. 360
XS_TEMPLATE_MARK_SUB_DIRECTORY.............................................................................361
XS_TEXT_ORIENTATION_EPSILON...................................................................................... 362
TEXT_X_SIZE ......................................................................................................................... 362
TEXT_Y_SIZE ......................................................................................................................... 363
XS_THICKNESS_PARAMETER_IS_CROSS_SECTION_THICKNESS...................................... 363
XS_TPLED_INI .......................................................................................................................364
XS_TRY_TO_KEEP_LOCATION_IN_FREEPLACING ..............................................................364
XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_LIMIT_THICKNESS .............................................................................364
XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_PAPER_THICKNESS ........................................................................... 365
XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_USE_PLATE_PROFILE_TYPE_IN_NC ..................................................365
XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_WITH_CUT_HOLES ............................................................................ 366
3.20 U...................................................................................................................... 367
XS_UEL_IMPORT_FOLDER................................................................................................... 367
XS_UNDERLINE_AFTER_POSITION_NUMBER_IN_HARDSTAMP...................................... 368
XS_UNFOLDING_ANGLE_DIM_FORMAT ............................................................................368
XS_UNFOLDING_DONT_USE_NEUTRAL_AXIS_FOR_RADIUS........................................... 368
XS_UNFOLDING_ANGLE_DIM_PRECISION ....................................................................... 369
XS_UNFOLDING_PLANE_EPSILON .....................................................................................369
XS_UNIQUE_NUMBERS ...................................................................................................... 370
XS_UNIQUE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBERS................................................................................... 370
XS_UPDATE_MARK_PLACING_IN_DRAWING .....................................................................370
XS_UPDATE_MARKS_IN_FROZEN_DRAWINGS ..................................................................371
XS_UPSIDE_DOWN_TEXT_ALLOWED .................................................................................371
XS_USABSOLUTE_TO_RELATIVE_LIMIT ..............................................................................372
XS_USABSOLUTE2_TO_RELATIVE_LENGTH_FACTOR ....................................................... 373
XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_EXTREMA_IN_MARK_PLACING......................................................... 373
XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR ................................................................................... 375
XS_USE_BOLT_DISTANCE_IN_NOTCH_CALCULATIONS ................................................... 376
XS_USE_COLOR_DRAWINGS .............................................................................................. 376
XS_USE_CONVEX_PROTECT_AREA......................................................................................376
XS_USE_CROSS_FOR_OPENING_SYMBOL......................................................................... 377
XS_USE_DRAWING_NAME_AS_PLOT_FILE_NAME ............................................................ 378
XS_USE_DYNAMIC_ROW_WIDTH_IN_TEMPLATES............................................................ 378
XS_USE_DRAWING_NAME_AS_PLOT_TITLE ...................................................................... 379
XS_USE_EIGHT_COLORS_IN_MODELING_VIEWS ............................................................. 380
XS_USE_EXACT_SOLID_FOR_CLASH_CHECK......................................................................380
XS_USE_EXISTING_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS.................... 381
XS_USE_EXISTING_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS_SCALE...................................................... 381
XS_USE_FLAT_DESIGNATION ..............................................................................................381
XS_USE_LINECLIP ................................................................................................................ 382
XS_USE_LONG_POINTS_IN_DIMENSIONING.....................................................................383
XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR ...................................................... 384
XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR.....................................................................................384
XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_WHEN_COPYING_DRAWING_VIEWS .............................. 385
XS_USE_NEW_PLATE_DESIGNATION ................................................................................. 385
XS_USE_NEW_WELD_PLACING .......................................................................................... 386

15
 XS_USE_NEW_USNOTCH .................................................................................................... 386
XS_USE_NUMBER_SELECTED_FOR_DRAWING_CREATION_AND_UPDATE..................... 387
XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR ......................................................................387
XS_USE_OLD_DRAWING_CREATION_SETTINGS................................................................ 388
XS_USE_OLD_DRAWING_EXPORT...................................................................................... 388
XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG............................................................................................... 389
XS_USE_OLD_POLYBEAM_LENGTH_CALCULATION .........................................................389
XS_USE_ONLY_INCHES_IN_SHEET_SIZES ..........................................................................390
XS_USE_ONLY_INCHES_IN_WELD_LENGTH ......................................................................390
XS_USE_ONLY_NOMINAL_REBAR_DIAMETER .................................................................. 390
XS_USE_OPENING_SYMBOL_IN_BORDER_HOLES............................................................ 391
XS_USE_OPENING_SYMBOL_IN_CORNER_HOLES............................................................ 392
XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING .................................................................................. 393
XS_USE_POINT_AS_SEPARATOR_IN_PROFILE_NAME ...................................................... 394
XS_USE_RECESS_SYMBOL_FOR_BORDER_AND_CORNER_RECESSES............................. 394
XS_USE_REPAIR_NUMBERING_INSTEAD_OF_NUMBERING.............................................395
XS_USE_ROUND_MAIN_PART_COORDINATES_FOR_SECONDARY_PART_ANGLE..........395
XS_USE_SCREW_POINT_ELEVATION_DIM..........................................................................395
XS_USE_SMALLER_GUSSET_PLATE .................................................................................... 396
XS_USE_SMART_PAN ...........................................................................................................397
XS_USE_SMOOTH_LINES .................................................................................................... 397
XS_USE_SOFTWARE_RENDERING ...................................................................................... 397
XS_USE_SPECIAL_FILLER_PLATE_THICKNESS ................................................................... 398
XS_USE_TUBE_INNER_LENGTH_IN_DIMENSIONING .......................................................398
XS_USE_USABSOLUTE_ARROW_TYPE_FOR_ABSOLUTE_DIMENSIONS.......................... 398
XS_USE_USER_DEFINED_REBAR_LENGTH_AND_WEIGHT................................................398
XS_USE_USER_DEFINED_REBARSHAPERULES...................................................................399
XS_USE_VERTICAL_PLACING_FOR_COLUMNS_IN ............................................................400
XSUSERDATADIR...................................................................................................................400
XS_USER_DEFINED_BOLT_SYMBOL_TABLE ...................................................................... 400
XS_USER_DEFINED_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATORS ..............................................401
XS_USER_SETTINGS_DIRECTORY........................................................................................401
3.21 V.......................................................................................................................401
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMBERS ............................... 402
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_QUALIFIER ................................................. 402
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBERS ................................................... 403
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_NUMBERS ............................................. 403
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_MULTI_NUMBERS .............................................................403
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_POSITION_NUMBERS .......................................................404
XS_VIEW_DIM_LINE_COLOR ............................................................................................... 404
XS_VIEW_DIM_TEXT_COLOR ...............................................................................................405
XS_VIEW_FAST_BOLT_COLOR............................................................................................. 405
XS_VIEW_FREE_MEASURE_PLANE...................................................................................... 406
XS_VIEW_HEIGHT ................................................................................................................ 406
XS_VIEW_PART_LABEL_COLOR .......................................................................................... 407
XS_VIEW_POSITION_X .........................................................................................................407
XS_VIEW_POSITION_Y ......................................................................................................... 407
XS_VIEW_TITLE_FONT ......................................................................................................... 408
XS_VIEW_WIDTH ..................................................................................................................408
XS_VISUALIZE_VIEW_IN_ANOTHER_VIEWS........................................................................ 408
XS_VISUALIZE_VIEW_IN_FATHER_VIEW_ONLY...................................................................409
XS_VISUALIZE_VIEW_NEIGHBOUR_PART_EXTENSION..................................................... 409
3.22 W......................................................................................................................410
XS_WARP_MAX_ANGLE_BETWEEN_CS ............................................................................. 410
XS_WARP_MAX_DEVIATION ...............................................................................................410

16
 XS_WEB_PUBLISHING_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY .............................................................. 410
XS_WELD_FILTER_TYPE ...................................................................................................... 411
XS_WELD_FONT ..................................................................................................................411
XS_WELDING_LENGTH_TOLERANCE ................................................................................411
XS_WELDING_TOUCH_TOLERANCE ................................................................................. 412
XS_WELD_LENGTH_CC_SEPARATOR_CHAR ..................................................................... 412
XS_WELD_NUMBER_FORMAT ........................................................................................... 412
XS_WORKING_POINTS_VALID_ALSO_OUTSIDE_PART .................................................... 413
XS_ZERO_POINT_SYMBOL_OLD_WAY .............................................................................. 413
3.23 Z....................................................................................................................... 413
XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO ......................................................................................................413
XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO_IN_MOUSEWHEEL_MODE ........................................................ 414
XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO_IN_SCROLL_MODE .................................................................... 414

4 Disclaimer...................................................................................415

17
18
1 Advanced options reference

Tekla Structures contains several advanced options that you can use to
customize your version of Tekla Structures. For example, you can choose to
use imperial units by setting an advanced option. If you want to use the same
settings in more than one project, add the advanced options in a file that is
located in a project or firm folder.
The advanced options are grouped in different categories according to their
usage in the Advanced Options dialog box. To access the dialog box, click File
menu --> Settings and in the Settings area select Advanced options.
Note that the default values given for the advanced options are the default
values in the default environment. The default values may be different in your
environment.

TIP Use the Advanced options search tool to find advanced options by name.

See also
Alphabetical list of advanced options (page 22)
Categories in the Advanced Options dialog box (page 20)

Advanced options reference 19

 2 Categories in the Advanced
Options dialog box

The Advanced Options dialog box groups advanced options in the following
categories:
• Analysis & Design
• CNC
• Components
• Concrete Detailing
• Dimensioning: General
• Dimensioning: Bolts
• Dimensioning: Parts
• Dimensioning: Unfolding
• Drawing Properties
• Drawing View
• Export
• File Locations
• Hatching
• Imperial Units
• Import
• Marking: General
• Marking: Bolts
• Marking: Parts
• Model View
• Modeling Properties
• Multi-user

Categories in the Advanced Options dialog box 20

 • Numbering
• Plate Work
• Printing
• Profiles
• Single Part View in Assembly Drawing
• Speed and Accuracy
• Templates and Symbols
• Welds

See also

Categories in the Advanced Options dialog box 21

3 Alphabetical list of advanced
options

Click on a letter in the alphabetical list of advanced options to open a list of

advanced options that begin with that letter, ignoring the initial letters XS. For
example, under A you will find the advanced option XS_AISC_WELD_MARK,
under B, XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR,etc.
Advanced options starting with XSR are listed under R. They control how Tekla
Structures displays imperial units in reports and drawing tables.

TIP Use the Advanced options search tool to find advanced options by name.

3.1 A

XS_AD_CURVED_BEAM_SPLIT_ACCURACY_MM
Category
Analysis & Design
Use to set the maximum distance between a curved member and straight
segment. Enter the value in millimeters. The default value is 25.0 mm.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 22 A

 XS_AD_ELEMENT_ANGLE_CHECK_ANGLE_DIFF_LIMIT
Category
Analysis & Design
Use to set a limit angle between physical part and analysis model member, in
order to test the validity of the analysis model. When the angle is greater than
the limit, a message appears and a warning is added to the log. Small
differences in angles are usual in the analysis model of a truss, for example.
The default value is 10.0.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_AD_ENVIRONMENT
Category
Analysis & Design
This advanced option is used in analysis and design integration to set the
environment, for example, to set the cross section catalog. The default value is
Europe.
Possible values are dependent on the analysis application that is used. For
some applications, this advanced option is not used.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_AD_GET_MOMENT_CONNECTION_STATUS
Category
Analysis & Design
Use to specify to which value (Yes or No) the Moment connection symbols
option is set when the Get results command is used in the analysis model.
The Moment connection symbols option is available on the End conditions
tab in the user-defined attributes properties dialog box of the part, and it
defines whether the moment connection symbols are shown in drawings.
Set the advanced option to one of the following values:
• yz: if the rotations ry and rz are fixed in the analysis model, the value Yes is
used, otherwise No is used.
• xyz: if all rotations are fixed in the analysis model, the value Yes is used,
otherwise No is used.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 23 A

 • z: if the rotation rz is fixed in the analysis model, the value Yes is used,
otherwise No is used.
• The advanced option is not set: The value you have set manually in the
Moment connection symbols option is used.
The default is yz.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_AD_GET_RESULTS_DESIGN_VALUES
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
Set this advanced option to TRUE to import steel and concrete design values
from Robot into Tekla Structures when you use the Get results or Get results
for selected command in the Analysis & Design Models dialog box. The
default value is TRUE. If you do not want to import the design values, set this
advanced option to FALSE.

See also
XS_AD_GET_RESULTS_FORCES (page 24)

XS_AD_GET_RESULTS_FORCES
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
Set this advanced option to TRUE to import forces from Robot into Tekla
Structures when you use the Get results or Get results for selected
command in the Analysis & Design Models dialog box. The default value is
FALSE.

See also
XS_AD_GET_RESULTS_DESIGN_VALUES (page 24)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 24 A

 XS_AD_MEMBER_NUMBER_VISUALIZATION
Category
Analysis & Design
Use to show or hide member numbers when displaying the analysis model in
a model view. The default is TRUE, which shows the numbers. To hide the
numbers, set to FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_AD_MEMBER_RESULT_DISP_DIVISION_COUNT
Category
Analysis & Design
Use to define the analysis member points whose results are saved in the
analysis_results.db5 database. This advanced option defines into how
many parts each analysis member is divided.
Enter an integer value. The default is 0, which does not save any displacement
results.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
To save only the displacements of member ends, set
XS_AD_MEMBER_RESULT_DISP_DIVISION_COUNT to 1.
To save three intermediate displacement results, in addition to the end
displacements, set XS_AD_MEMBER_RESULT_DISP_DIVISION_COUNT to 4.

See also
XS_AD_MEMBER_RESULT_MIN_DISTANCE (page 26)
XS_AD_MEMBER_RESULT_DIVISION_COUNT (page 25)

XS_AD_MEMBER_RESULT_DIVISION_COUNT
Category
Analysis & Design
Use to define the analysis member points whose results are saved in the
analysis_results.db5 database. This advanced option defines into how
many parts each analysis member is divided.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 25 A

 The default is 1, which saves only the results of member ends.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
To save the results of three intermediate points (quartiles) on each member, in
addition to the end results, set XS_AD_MEMBER_RESULT_DIVISION_COUNT to
4.

See also
XS_AD_MEMBER_RESULT_MIN_DISTANCE (page 26)
XS_AD_MEMBER_RESULT_DISP_DIVISION_COUNT (page 25)

XS_AD_MEMBER_RESULT_GRID_SIZE
Category
Analysis & Design
Use to define the grid spacing for the analysis results of plates, slabs, and
panels. Enter the value in millimeters. The default value is 500.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_AD_MEMBER_RESULT_MIN_DISTANCE
Category
Analysis & Design
Use to define the minimum distance between the analysis result points on
analysis members. Enter the value in millimeters.The default value is 500.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_AD_MEMBER_RESULT_DIVISION_COUNT (page 25)
XS_AD_MEMBER_RESULT_DISP_DIVISION_COUNT (page 25)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 26 A

 XS_AD_MEMBER_TYPE_VISUALIZATION
Category
Analysis & Design
Use color to show different analysis member types when displaying the
analysis model in a model view. A setting of FALSE shows the analysis
members in red. The default setting is TRUE. This identifies analysis members
using the following colors:
• Red = normal member
• Gray = composite beam
• Green = truss member
• Violet = truss member, tension only
• Yellow = truss member, compression only
• Dark blue = rigid link
• Light blue = plate, slab, or panel edge
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_AD_NEAR_NODES_WARNING_LIMIT
Category
Analysis & Design

Use this advanced option to trigger a warning when analysis nodes are closer
to each other than the limit.
Enter the limit in millimeters. The default value is 0, which means that Tekla
Structures does not show warnings.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
To have Tekla Structures show a warning for analysis nodes that are closer
than 5 mm to each other, set XS_AD_NEAR_NODES_WARNING_LIMIT to 5.

See also
XS_AD_SHORT_MEMBER_WARNING_LIMIT (page 30)
XS_AD_SHORT_RIGIDLINK_WARNING_LIMIT (page 30)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 27 A

 XS_AD_NODE_NUMBER_BY_Z
Category
Analysis & Design

If you set this advanced option to TRUE, the start number of a new analysis
node is set according to the z coordinate of the node. For example:
• If z is less than 1000.0, the node start number is 0.
• If z is between 1000.0 and 1999.0, the node start number is 1000.
• If z is between 2000.0 and 2999.0, the node start number is 2000.
The first free number above the start number is assigned to the node.
The default is FALSE.

XS_AD_NODE_NUMBER_VISUALIZATION
Category
Analysis & Design
Use to show or hide node numbers when displaying the analysis model in a
model view. The default is TRUE, which shows the numbers.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_AD_OPTIMISATION_DISABLED
Category
Analysis & Design
Use to check profile catalog analysis values. To enable design optimization, use
the value FALSE. To disable design optimization, use the value TRUE. The
default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_CHECK_ALL (page 288)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 28 A

 XS_AD_OPTIMISATION_NO_WEIGHT_SORT
Category
Analysis & Design

When optimization cross section group is extracted from the profile catalog,
the group is sorted by default according to the section weight (cross section
area). Set this advanced option to TRUE to disable this sorting, in which case
the section order is the same as in the profile catalog.
If you use the value FALSE, the group is sorted according to the section weight.
The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_AD_OPTIMISATION_RECURSE_CATALOG
Category
Analysis & Design
Set this advanced option to TRUE to have Tekla Structures ignore profile
catalog rules for optimizing steel part sizes and search the entire profile
catalog. If you want to take the rules into account, set it to FALSE. The default
value is TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_AD_RESULT_DATABASE_ENABLED
Category
Analysis & Design
Use to define whether the analysis results database analysis_results.db5
is created or not. The default setting is TRUE. This creates the analysis results
database.
If you decide not to create the analysis results database, set this advanced
option to FALSE. In this way the use of large models with several load
combinations is faster and less memory consuming.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 29 A

 XS_AD_RIGID_DIAPHRAGM_VISUALIZATION
Category
Analysis & Design

Defines whether extra sticks are drawn in visualization for rigid diaphragms.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Advanced option is set to Appearance

TRUE (default)

FALSE

XS_AD_SHORT_MEMBER_WARNING_LIMIT
Category
Analysis & Design

Use this advanced option to trigger a warning when a analysis member is

shorter that the limit.
Enter the length in millimeters. Default is 50. If the limit is set to 0, no checking
is done.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 30 A

 XS_AD_SHORT_RIGIDLINK_WARNING_LIMIT
Category
Analysis & Design

Use this advanced option to trigger a warning when an analysis rigid link is
shorter that the limit. Enter the length in millimeters. Default is 10. If the limit
is set to 0, no checking is done.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_AD_SOLID_AXIAL_EXPAND_MM
Category
Analysis & Design

Used in analysis model creation when checking if parts are clashing. Parts are
expanded in axial direction by the given distance to create clash also when
there is a small gap between parts. The default value is 25.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_AD_SUPPORT_VISUALIZATION
Category
Analysis & Design
Use to show or hide the support conditions when showing the analysis model
in a model view. The default is TRUE, which shows the support conditions.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_AD_USE_HIGH_ACCURACY
Category
Analysis & Design
Set this advanced option to FALSE to allow for more tolerance in the creation
of the analysis model. In certain situations this will result in a more suitable

Alphabetical list of advanced options 31 A

 analysis model. If you do not want to allow more tolerance in the analysis
mode creation, set this advanced option to TRUE. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_ADAPTIVE_OBJECTS
Category
Modeling Properties
Use to define which adaptivity method to use. The options are:
• ENABLED: the new adaptivity method is used
• ENABLED_OLD: the old adaptivity method is used
• DISABLED: adaptivity is disabled
The default value is ENABLED.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_ADJUST_GRID_LABELS
Category
Model View
Set this advanced option to FALSE to disable the dynamic moving of grid
labels when zooming in, and to keep the labels anchored to the end of the grid
line. The default value is TRUE, and the grid line labels are kept visible. When
working with very large grids having the grid labels always visible might slow
down Tekla Structures. After you change the advanced option setting, close
and re-open the view to implement the change.

XS_AISC_WELD_MARK

Category: Welds
Set this advanced option to TRUE to create AISC weld marks, to use leg length
as default fillet weld size dimensioning, and to create arrow side weld using
below line weld properties.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 32 A

 Set this advanced option to FALSE to create ISO weld marks, to use throat
thickness as default fillet weld size dimensioning, and to create arrow side
weld using above line weld properties. FALSE is the default value.
This advanced option also affects the spacing of intermittent welds:
• TRUE uses the Pitch value entered in the Weld Properties dialog box as
the center to center spacing of welds.
• FALSE uses the Pitch value entered in the Weld Properties dialog box as
the spacing between the welds.
An AISC weld mark of a staggered intermittent weld with the pitch after a dash:

An ISO weld mark of a staggered intermittent weld with the pitch in

parenthesis:

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

NOTE The XS_AISC_WELD_MARK advanced option is delivered with model

folder files. If you need to deliver the model to another party, send the
full model with all files (not just the model database file *.db1) to
ensure that the weld cross section size remains the same. If the value
for this advanced option is changed, then the actual weld cross-
section size will change accordingly.

XS_ALLOW_DRAWING_TO_MANY_MULTI_DRAWINGS
Category
Numbering
Set this advanced option to TRUE to allow the same drawings to be included in
more than one multidrawing.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 33 A

 If you want the drawing to be included in only one multidrawing, set this value
to FALSE (default).
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_ALLOW_INCH_MARK_IN_DIMENSIONS
Category
Dimensioning: general
Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures include the inch symbol in dimensions.
The default value is TRUE. If you do not want to allow inch marks, set this
advanced option to FALSE.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

XS_ALLOW_INCH_MARK_IN_WELD_SYMBOLS
Category: Imperial Units
Set this advanced option to TRUE to have Tekla Structures include the inch
symbol (") in weld symbols. If you do not want to include the inch symbol, set it
to FALSE (default).
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_ALLOW_REBARS_ON_TOP_OF_EACH_OTHER
Category
Concrete Detailing
If you set this advanced option to TRUE, reinforcing bars can be drawn on top
of each other. In this case you have selected Visibility of reinforcing bars in
group to bar in the middle of group or to customized, and you have two
reinforcing bar groups on top of each other, for example, on the top surface of
a slab and on the bottom surface of a slab. The default value is FALSE. This
advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 34 A

 XS_ALLOW_REINFORCING_LOCKED_PARTS
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.

Set to TRUE to create, modify, or delete reinforcement in parts that have been
locked. This is useful, for example, when different parties of a project are
responsible for modeling concrete parts and for modeling reinforcement, and
when modification of parts needs to be prevented.

XS_ALLOW_SHEAR_PLATE_CLASH_FLANGE
Category
Components
Set this advanced option to TRUE (default) to omit the default 0.3 mm
tolerance between shear tab and secondary part web for shear tab
components. To use the tolerance, set it to FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_ALWAYS_CONFIRM_SAVE_WHEN_CLOSING_DRAWING
Category
Drawing Properties
Set this advanced option to TRUE to always display the confirmation message
"Do you want to save current drawing?".
The default value is FALSE. This means that if you close a drawing without
making any changes, Tekla Structures does not by default prompt you to save
the drawing.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_ALWAYS_CONFIRM_SAVE_WHEN_EXIT
Category
Modeling Properties
Use to define whether or not Tekla Structures prompts you to save the model
if you are closing it without making any changes.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 35 A

 If this advanced option is set to TRUE (default), Tekla Structures always asks
you to save the model when closing it.
If this advanced option is set to FALSE, Tekla Structures does not ask you to
save the model if there are no changes after the last save.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_ADDITIONAL_PARTS_FILTER
Category Drawing properties
Use to add additional parts that are not usually part of a column assembly to
an anchor bolt plan, such as anchor rods or leveling plates. First define a
general arrangement drawing filter and then give that filter name as the value
for this advanced option.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

In the following example we will make anchor rods and leveling plates visible
in an anchor bolt plan.

1. Go to the File menu and click Settings --> Advanced options --> Drawing
Properties .
2. Enter the name of the general arrangement drawing filter for the
advanced option XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_ADDITIONAL_PARTS_FILTER .
In this example, we will use the name SHOW_IN_ABPLAN (default).
3. On the Drawings & Reports tab, click Drawing properties > GA drawing.
4. In the general arrangement drawing properties dialog box, click Filter.
5. Click Add row.
6. Select Part as the Category, Name as the Property, Equals as the
Condition and enter*ANCHOR*LEVEL in the Value box.
7. Enter the name of the drawing filter, SHOW_IN_ABPLAN, in the Save as
box and click Save as.
8. Click Cancel to exit the dialog box.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 36 A

 When you create an anchor bolt plan, both the anchor rods and the leveling
plates are shown in the drawing. In the drawing below, the name of the anchor
rod is "ANCHOR ROD" and the name of the leveling plate is "LEVELING PLATE."

XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BASEPLATE_FILTER
Category
Drawing Properties
Use a general arrangement drawing filter to limit the number of visible objects
to determine the parts to be included in the anchor bolt plan. First create the
base plate filter, then enter its name as the value for the advanced option.
Tekla Structures will show in the anchor bolt plan the base plates defined by
the drawing filter.
If this advanced option is set, base plate is a part that fulfills the following
rules:
• Part belongs to the same assembly as the column, which is the main part
of the assembly.
• Part passes the drawing filter specified by
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BASEPLATE_FILTER.
If there is more than one part in the column assembly that fulfills the rules, the
lowest part is considered to be the base plate.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BASEPLATE_FILTER =<the name of the
drawing filter for base plates>

Alphabetical list of advanced options 37 A

 XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BOLT_FILTER
Category
Drawing Properties
Use a general arrangement drawing filter to limit the number of visible objects
in a drawing and determine the parts to be included in the anchor bolt plan.
First create the general arrangement drawing bolt filter, then enter its name as
the value for this advanced option. Tekla Structures will show in the anchor
bolt plan the bolts included in the drawing filter.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BOLT_FILTER =<the name of the drawing
filter for bolts>

XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_COLUMN_FILTER
Category
Drawing Properties
Use a general arrangement drawing view filter to limit the number of visible
objects and determine the parts to be included in the anchor bolt plan. First
create a general arrangement drawing column filter, then enter its name as
the value for this advanced option. Tekla Structures will show in the anchor
bolt plan the columns included in the filter.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_COLUMN_FILTER =<the name of the drawing
filter for columns>

XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_DRAWING_TOLERANCE
Category
Drawing Properties

Alphabetical list of advanced options 38 A

 Use to specify the distance of an assembly from the view plane for the
assembly to be included in the anchor bolt plan. Enter the distance in
millimeters. The default value is 200.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_USE_VIEW_COORDSYS_FOR_BOLT_
DIMENSIONS
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to select the direction for the dimensions in the anchor bolt plans. If set to
TRUE, anchor bolt plan detail view dimensions are created using the
coordinate system of the main view. This advanced option is set to FALSE by
default, which means that the dimensions of anchor bolt plan detail views are
created according to the base plate coordinate system.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_ANGLE_DEGREE_SIGN
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to show the degree symbol correctly in Asian languages. By default, the
value is unicode:176. The value can be changed depending on the desired
character. To add the degree symbol in an Asian language, copy the symbol
from a text file and paste it directly in the value field. Do not use a unicode
value.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_ANGLE_DIMENSION_SYMBOL_SIZE_FACTOR
Category
Dimensioning: General
Use to define the size of angle symbols.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 39 A

 Value 1 Value 3 (default) Value 5

NOTE Setting this advanced option disables the advanced option

XS_CHECK_TRIANGLE_TEXT_SIZE.

See also
XS_CHECK_TRIANGLE_TEXT_SIZE (page 75)

XS_ANGLE_TEXT_IN_UNFOLDING_BENDING_LINE_
DIMENSIONING
Category
Dimensioning: Unfolding
Use to set the prefix text for unfolded angles. This affects single-part drawings
that show folded parts unfolded. The default value is A=.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

APPL_ERROR_LOG
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
This advanced option is system specific and is read from
teklastructures.ini. Generally, there is no need to modify system-specific
settings. Do not modify them if you are not an administrator.
This advanced option tells the prefix of the application error log files.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 40 A

 Example
If you enter set APPL_ERROR_LOG=TeklaStructures, Tekla Structures
creates at least the following log files by default in C:
\TeklaStructuresModels\ folder:
• TeklaStructures_%USERNAME%.log: log data collected while the
program is running
• TeklaStructures_%USERNAME%.err: errors collected while the program
is running

XS_APPLICATIONS
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
This advanced option is system specific and is read from
teklastructures.ini. Generally, there is no need to modify system-specific
settings. Do not modify them if you are not an administrator.
This advanced option defines the folder that contains the connection, detail,
and modeling tool applications.

Example
set XS_APPLICATIONS=%XS_DIR%\applications\

XS_ARC_WIDTH_OF_CLOUD
Category
Drawing Properties

Use to control the width of cloud arcs on paper (default 10 mm). You can use
the Cloud tool to highlight changes in drawings.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example

Advanced option is set to Example of appearance in

drawing
1

Alphabetical list of advanced options 41 A

 Advanced option is set to Example of appearance in
drawing
10

XS_ASCII_IMPORT_CREATES_CONSTRUCTION_LINES
Category
Import
Set this advanced option to TRUE to have Tekla Structures only draw
construction lines between object points in an ASCII import. If you do not want
to do this, set it to FALSE (default).
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_ASSEMBLY_DRAWING_VIEW_TITLE
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to define a title for an assembly drawing views in a multidrawing. The
options are:
• PART_NAME
• PART_MATERIAL
• PART_POS, ASSEMBLY_POS
• MODEL_NUMBER
• LENGTH, PROFILE
• LENGTH
• BASE_NAME
• NAME
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is

Alphabetical list of advanced options 42 A

 in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

XS_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING
Category
Numbering
Use to define the contents of the assembly family position number. For
example, instead of DT1-1, DT1-2, you can define the numbering as DT1-A,
DT1-B. To get this result, set the advanced option as follows:
XS_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING=
%ASSEMBLY_PREFIX%%ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_NUMBER%-
%ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_QUALIFIER_WITH_LETTERS%
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.
Use the following options to define the contents of family position numbers.
Use as many options as you need, and enclose each one in percent symbols
(%).

Option Description
%ASSEMBLY_PREFIX% Assembly prefix, defined in the part
properties dialog box.
%ASSEMBLY_POS% The running assembly position
number, starting from the start
number defined in the part properties
dialog box.
%ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_NUMBER% Assembly family number, defined by
the start number (in part properties
dialog box) and the final position in
that numbering series.
%ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_NUMBER_WITH_ Assembly family number with letters.
LETTERS% The letters run automatically from A
to Z. If more letters are needed, Tekla
Structures takes a second or even a
third letter into use, for example AA
or AAA.
You can also define valid letters with
the advanced option
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_F
AMILY_POSITION_NUMBERS.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 43 A

 Option Description
%ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_QUALIFIER% Assembly family qualifier, defined by
the family numbering criteria given in
the Numbering Setup dialog box.
%ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_QUALIFIER_WI Assembly family qualifier with letters.
TH_LETTERS% The letters run automatically from A
to Z. If more letters are needed, Tekla
Structures takes a second or even a
third letter into use, for example AA
or AAA.
You can also define valid letters with
the advanced option
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_F
AMILY_QUALIFIER.
%UDA:[uda_name]% User-defined attribute of the
assembly or assembly main part. If
the attribute is defined for the
assembly, it will be used. If it is not
defined, the main part attribute will
be used. You can also define that only
the user-defined attribute of the main
part will be used, for example
%UDA:MAINPART.USER_FIELD_1%.
%TPL:[tpl_name]% Template attribute of the assembly or
assembly main part, for example %
TPL:PROJECT.NUMBER% .

Number of characters
You can define the number of characters by adding a period and the required
number to the end of each option. For example
%ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_QUALIFIER_WITH_LETTERS.3% will result in three
letters for every assembly, starting from AAA.

Example
If you set the advanced option like this:
XS_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING=
%ASSEMBLY_PREFIX%/%ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_NUMBER.3%-
%ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_QUALIFIER.3%
The result:
A/001-001.

See also

XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMBERS (page 401)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 44 A

 XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_QUALIFIER (page 402)

XS_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING
Category: Numbering
Use to base assembly numbers on drawing numbers. Use the following
switches to define the contents of assembly marks. Use as many switches as
you need, and enclose each one in percent symbols (%).
The available switches are:

Switch Description
%ASSEMBLY_MULTI_ Multidrawing name.
DRAWING_NUMBER%
%ASSEMBLY_MULTI_ Position of the assembly drawing
DRAWING_POS% inside the multidrawing.
%ASSEMBLY_PREFIX Assembly prefix in the model.
%
%ASSEMBLY_POS% Assembly position number in the
model.
Template fields Enter TPL: followed by the name of
any relevant template field. Enclose
each name in percent symbols (%). For
example, %TPL:PROJECT.NUMBER%
NOTE: No template fields starting with
DRAWING work for this advanced
option, for example,
DRAWING.TITLE1. If you use them in
the value, Tekla Structures will replace
the whole value string with the default
value.
User-defined Enter UDA: followed by the name of
attributes that are any relevant user-defined attribute,
defined in the exactly as it appears in the
objects.inp file objects.inp file. For example,
%UDA:MY_INFO_1%

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
To put the assembly multinumbers in the format multidrawing name + part
prefix + position on multidrawing, set the advanced option as follows:

Alphabetical list of advanced options 45 A

 %ASSEMBLY_MULTI_DRAWING_NUMBER%%ASSEMBLY_PREFIX%
%ASSEMBLY_MULTI_DRAWING_POS%
This will create the assembly mark 10B1, where:
• 10 is the drawing number
• B is the assembly prefix
• 1 designates that it is the first assembly on the sheet.

See also
XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR (page 384)
XS_PART_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING (page 269)
XS_CAST_UNIT_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING (page 66)

XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_CODE_3D
Category
Templates and symbols
Set to TRUE to include Z orientation in assembly position codes.
The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_CODE_TOLERANCE
Category
Templates and symbols
Tolerance distance to use when identifying grid position code for assembly.
The default value is 500.0.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_NEW_FORMAT
Category
Templates and Symbols

Alphabetical list of advanced options 46 A

 Use to define how the assembly position code is displayed in reports. Set to
TRUE to use a format such as B1/C2 instead of B-C/1-2. The default value is
FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING
Category: Numbering
Use to define the contents of the assembly position number.

NOTE Do not change this advanced option after you have created single-
part, assembly, or cast unit drawings, if you are using cloning. It may
partially separate the drawings from the part they represent, causing
the drawings to be flagged as deleted and other drawings to be cloned
after the next numbering.

The options are:

Option Description
%ASSEMBLY_PREFIX% Assembly prefix, defined in the part
properties dialog box.
%ASSEMBLY_POS% The running assembly position
number, starting from the start
number defined in the part properties
dialog box.
%ASSEMBLY_POS_WITH_LETTERS% Same as above, but with letters.
Uses letters A – Z by default, but you
can also define valid letters with the
advanced option
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_P
OSITION_NUMBERS.
%UDA:[uda_name]% User-defined attribute of the
assembly or assembly main part. If
the attribute is defined for the
assembly, it will be used. If it is not
defined, the main part attribute will
be used. You can also define that only
the user-defined attribute of the main
part will be used, for example
%UDA:MAINPART.USER_FIELD_1%.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 47 A

 Option Description
%TPL:[tpl_name]% Template attribute of the assembly or
assembly main part, for example %
TPL:PROJECT.NUMBER% .

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Number of characters in the assembly position number

You can define the number of characters by adding a period and the required
number to the end of the options %ASSEMBLY_POS_WITH_LETTERS% and
%ASSEMBLY_POS%. For example,%ASSEMBLY_POS_WITH_LETTERS.3% will
result in three letters for every assembly, starting from AAA.

Example
If you set the advanced option to %ASSEMBLY_PREFIX%/%ASSEMBLY_POS.3%,
the result will be A/001.

See also
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_NUMBERS (page 403)

XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SIZE
Category
Dimensioning: General
Use to define the height of the change symbol around the points. The default
value is 7.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_HIGHLIGHT_ASSOCIATIVE_DIMENSION_CHANGES (page 214)

XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SYMBOL
Category
Dimensioning: General

Alphabetical list of advanced options 48 A

 Use to define the used associativity change symbol. The default value is
AssociativityAnchor@1 (a cloud).
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_HIGHLIGHT_ASSOCIATIVE_DIMENSION_CHANGES (page 214)

XS_ATTRIBUTE_FILE_EXCLUDE_LIST
Category
File Locations
Use this advanced option to exclude attribute files or reports from the user
interface. For this advanced option control strings are given for controlling the
access to attribute files or reports. If a control string is present anywhere in a
filename of an attribute file or a report, the file or report becomes unavailable.
Several control strings can be entered, and the values are case sensitive. Use
semicolon (;) as a separator.
The default value is
TS_Report_Inquire;dgn_attribute_info;import_revision
• Enter the file name or a part of the file name that you want to exclude from
the user interface as the value for the advanced option. For example,
setting the advanced option to _eng;_det removes all the attribute files
that include the string _eng or _det in their name from the user interface.
• Enter the name or a part of the name of the report you want to exclude
from the Create report dialog box. For example, setting the advanced
option to _Part hides the report ts_Report_Inquire_Part.rpt in the
dialog box.
Example:
PROJ1_;PROJ2_;_TeamA;Team_Detailing
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

XS_AUTOCONNECTION_TOLERANCE
Category
Components

Alphabetical list of advanced options 49 A

 Use to set the size of the area that Tekla Structures searches for parts to
connect with AutoConnection. Enter a value in millimeters. The default value
is 500.0.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_AUTOCONNECTION_USE_UDL
Category
Components
Set this advanced option to TRUE to switch on UDL calculation in
AutoConnection. This calculates the maximum shear force allowed. The
default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_AUTODEFAULT_UDL_PERCENT
Category
Components
Use to set a default percentage for UDL calculation. The default value is 50.
In AutoDefaultsTekla Structures uses the percentage in the connection
properties. If no percentage is given, Tekla Structures uses this value.
In AutoConnection only the default percentage is used. You switch UDL
calculation on with the advanced option XS_AUTOCONNECTION_USE_UDL.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_AUTOCONNECTION_USE_UDL (page 50)

XS_AUTOMATIC_NEW_MODEL_NAME
Category
Modeling Properties

Alphabetical list of advanced options 50 A

 Set this advanced option to TRUE (default) to have Tekla Structures suggest a
name for a new model automatically in the New dialog box. The suggested
name is New model XX, where XX is a running number.
If you set this advanced option to FALSE, the name is not suggested.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_AUTOMATIC_USER_FEEDBACK_SAVING_INTERVAL
Category
Modeling Properties
Enter an integer to define the saving interval of the automatic user feedback
information. The saving interval means the number of commands or
interactions that the Automatic user feedback program observes before saving
data to file. The value of the advanced option corresponds to the number of
rows in the log file. The default value is 100.

The log file is called UserFeedbackLog.txt and it is located in the

TeklaStructuresModels folder.

XS_AUTOMATIC_USER_FEEDBACK_SENDING_INTERVAL
Category
Modeling Properties
Enter an integer to define the sending interval of the automatic user feedback
information. The value of the advanced option corresponds to the number of
rows in the log file. The default value is 10000.

The log file is called UserFeedbackLog.txt and it is located in the

TeklaStructuresModels folder.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_AUTOSAVE_DIRECTORY
Category
File Locations

Alphabetical list of advanced options 51 A

 Enter the path to the folder that contains the files that Tekla Structures saves
automatically. The default value is %XS_RUNPATH%\autosave\
If you do not define a path, Tekla Structures places autosave files in the
current model folder.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

3.2 B

XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR1
Category
Model view
To have a gradient background color in model views, use the advanced options
XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR1 (page 52), XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR2 (page 52),
XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR3 (page 53), and XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR4
(page 53). With these advanced options you can control the color of each
corner separately in a model view.
This advanced option controls the upper-left corner of the model view.
Define the color using RGB (Red Green Blue) values. The scale is from 0 to 1,
and separate the numbers with spaces. If you want to use the traditional
single-colored background, set the same value for all four background color
advanced options. Reopen the view for the change to take effect.
The default value is 1.0 1.0 1.0. To use the default background color, leave
the box empty.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Example
• Use 0.0 0.0 0.0 for black background.
• Use 1.0 1.0 1.0 for white background.

XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR2
Category
Model view

Alphabetical list of advanced options 52 B

 See XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR1 (page 52).
This advanced option controls the upper-right corner of the model view.
The default value is 1.0 1.0 1.0. To use the default background color, leave
the box empty.

XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR3
Category
Model view
See XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR1 (page 52).
This advanced option controls the bottom-left corner of the model view.
The default value is 0.80 0.79 0.85. To use the default background color,
leave the box empty.

XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR4
Category
Model view
See XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR1 (page 52).
This advanced option controls the bottom-right corner of the model view.
The default value is 0.80 0.79 0.85. To use the default background color,
leave the box empty.

XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH
Category
Plotting
Use this advanced option to specify the base line width for printed drawings.
Enter the value in millimeters as decimal value. The default value is 0.1. The
final line thicknesses in a printed drawing is the base line width multiplied by
the pen thickness from the Color dialog box. For example, 25 will give a
thickness of 2.5 mm.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 53 B

 TIP To control the accuracy of line thickness, use a small value for
XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH and a large number for the pen.

This advanced option also affects lines on the screen, if you set
XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH_AFFECTS_SCREEN to TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH_AFFECTS_SCREEN (page 54)

XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH_AFFECTS_SCREEN
Category
Plotting
Set this advanced option to TRUE, if you want XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTHto affect
line widths drawn on the screen.
Enter FALSE if you do not want XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH to affect line widths on
the screen.
The default value is TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH (page 53)

XS_BASICVIEW_HEIGHT
Category
Model View
Use to define the height of basic view windows. Enter the height in pixels. The
default value is 375.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Example
XS_BASICVIEW_HEIGHT=570

Alphabetical list of advanced options 54 B

 See also
XS_BASICVIEW_POSITION_X (page 55)

XS_BASICVIEW_POSITION_X
Category
Model View
Use to control the horizontal position of basic view windows on the screen.
Enter the value in pixels. The default value is 100.
If the advanced option XS_MDIBASICVIEWPARENT is set, the origin for the
position is the top left corner of the client area. Otherwise, the origin is the top
left corner of the whole Tekla Structures window. Moving a toolbar also affects
the size of the client area, because menus and toolbars are not part of it.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also
XS_MDIBASICVIEWPARENT (page 248)

XS_BASICVIEW_POSITION_Y
Category
Model View
Use to control the vertical position of basic view windows on the screen. Enter
the value in pixels. The default value is 20.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also
XS_BASICVIEW_POSITION_X (page 55)

XS_BASICVIEW_WIDTH
Category
Model view

Alphabetical list of advanced options 55 B

 Use to define the width of basic view windows. Enter the width in pixels, for
example, 570. The default value is 375.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also
XS_BASICVIEW_POSITION_X (page 55)

XS_BEVEL_DIMENSIONS_FOR_PROFILES_ONLY
Category
Dimensioning: Parts
Use to define whether to show bevel dimensions only for profiles.
If you set the advanced option to TRUE, bevel dimensions are shown only for
profiles
If you set the advanced option to FALSE (default), bevel dimensions are shown
always.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XSBIN
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
This advanced option is system specific and is read from
teklastructures.ini. Generally, there is no need to modify system-specific
settings. Do not modify them if you are not an administrator.
This advanced option defines the location of the Tekla Structures bin folder.

Example
set XSBIN=%XS_DIR%\nt\bin\

XS_BLACK_DRAWING_BACKGROUND
Category
Drawing View

Alphabetical list of advanced options 56 B

 Set to TRUE to have a black background and colored lines in drawings. If you
want to have white background and black lines, enter FALSE (default).

NOTE This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in
options.bin under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate
the new value. It only affects the Color mode, not Black and White or
Gray Scale mode.

See also

XS_USE_COLOR_DRAWINGS (page 376)

XS_BOLT_LENGTH_EPSILON
Category
Modeling Properties
Use to round bolt length.
Tekla Structures calculates bolt length using material thickness. To avoid
having several bolt lengths where material thickness only differs slightly, set
this advanced option to a positive or negative value. This value is multiplied by
two and the result is subtracted from the material thickness in bolt length
calculation. Enter the value in millimeters (all environments). Typical values are
0.001–0.5. The default value is 0.001.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_BOLT_MARK_DIAMETER_PREFIX
Category
Marking: Bolts
Use this advanced option to specify a prefix for bolt mark diameter. The
possible values are NONE or any string.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
For a bolt group consisting of three 20 mm diameter bolts:

Alphabetical list of advanced options 57 B

 • If you do not give any value, result is
3*M20
• If you set XS_BOLT_MARK_DIAMETER_PREFIX to NONE, the result is
3*20
• If you set XS_BOLT_MARK_DIAMETER_PREFIX to D, the result is
3*D20

XS_BOLT_MARK_IS_ALWAYS_VISIBLE
Category
Marking: Bolts
Set this advanced option to TRUE to show the bolt marks of bolts hidden from
views by other objects. The bolt marks are displayed with solid leader lines and
frames. If you set it to FALSE (default), the bolt marks of hidden bolts are
displayed with dashed leader lines and frames. This advanced option affects
all drawing types.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_BOLT_MARK_IS_ALWAYS_VISIBLE_IN_GA
Category
Marking: Bolts
Set this advanced option to TRUE to show the bolt marks of bolts hidden from
views by other objects. The bolt marks are displayed with solid leader lines and
frames. If you set it to FALSE (default), the bolt marks of hidden bolts are
displayed with dashed leader lines and frames. This advanced only affects
general arrangement drawings.

NOTE If you have set the advanced option

XS_BOLT_MARK_IS_ALWAYS_VISIBLE to TRUE, the bolt marks are
always displayed with solid lines even if you set
XS_BOLT_MARK_IS_ALWAYS_VISIBLE_IN_GA to FALSE.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 58 B

 XS_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
Category
Marking: bolts
Use to define the contents of the Size element in bolt marks. For example, to
have the bolt number and the hole diameter in the mark, enter
%BOLT_NUMBER%*D%HOLE.DIAMETER%.
The advanced options XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE and
XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE override this setting.

You can use any combination of text and the following options as the value for
this advanced option. Enclose each option in % characters. To use special
characters enter a backslash (\) followed by an ASCII number. You can use the
options in any order, and make calculations.
• BOLT_NUMBER
• DIAMETER
• LENGTH
• HOLE.DIAMETER
• LONG_HOLE_X
• LONG_HOLE_Y
• LONGHOLE_MIN (the shorter of the slotted hole dimensions)
• LONGHOLE_MAX (the longer of the slotted hole dimensions)
• BOLT_STANDARD
• BOLT_MATERIAL
• BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE
• BOLT_COUNTERSUNK
• BOLT_SHORT_NAME
• BOLT_FULL_NAME

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE (page 344)
XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE (page 323)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 59 B

 XS_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
Category
Marking: Bolts
Use to define the contents of the size element in bolt marks in general
arrangement drawings. If you have not set the advanced options
XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA or
XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA, then this advanced option
is used.

You can use any combination of text and the following options as the value for
this advanced option. Enclose each option in % characters. To use special
characters enter a backslash (\) followed by an ASCII number. You can use the
options in any order, and make calculations.
• BOLT_NUMBER
• DIAMETER
• LENGTH
• HOLE.DIAMETER
• LONG_HOLE_X
• LONG_HOLE_Y
• LONGHOLE_MIN (the shorter of the slotted hole dimensions)
• LONGHOLE_MAX (the longer of the slotted hole dimensions)
• BOLT_STANDARD
• BOLT_MATERIAL
• BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE
• BOLT_COUNTERSUNK
• BOLT_SHORT_NAME
• BOLT_FULL_NAME

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (page 324)
XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (page 345)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 60 B

 XS_BOLT_POSITION_TO_MIN_AND_MAX_POINT
Category
Dimensioning: Bolts
Set this advanced option to TRUE to create minimum and maximum position
dimensions for bolts. If you do not want to create minimum and maximum
position dimensions for bolts, set it to FALSE (default).
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

The examples below show a maximum bolt dimension of 40:

Setting Example
Before setting the advanced
option.

After setting the advanced

option to TRUE.

See also

XS_BOLT_REPRESENTATION_SYMBOL_AXIS_POSITION_AS_
EXACT_SOLID
Category
Drawing Properties
If you set the advanced option
XS_BOLT_REPRESENTATION_SYMBOL_AXIS_POSITION_AS_EXACT_SOLID to
TRUE, all bolt axis representations set to Symbol are presented in the same
position as with Exact solid.
The default value is TRUE.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 61 B

 This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.
Symbol representation when the advanced option is set to FALSE:

Symbol representation when the advanced option is set to TRUE:

See also

XS_BOLT_REPRESENTATION_USE_POSITIVE_CUT_LENGTH
Category
Drawing Properties

Alphabetical list of advanced options 62 B

 Set this advanced option to TRUE to create bolt holes in the drawing instead of
sticks when the cut length is negative. FALSE is the default value.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_BOLTS_PERPENDICULAR_TO_PART_PLANE_IN_NC
Category
CNC
Set this advanced option to TRUE (default) to dimension bolts perpendicular to
part plane in NC files. If you do not want to dimension the bolts, set it to
FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

3.3 C

XS_CALCULATE_POLYBEAM_LENGTH_ALONG_REFERENCE_
LINE
Category
Dimensioning: Unfolding
Use this advanced option to calculate polybeam length along the reference
line instead of the centerline. By default, Tekla Structures measures polybeam
length along the centerline of the beam, regardless of the Position in plane
values of the beam.
Set this advanced option to TRUE to calculate polybeam length along the
reference line. Set it to FALSE (default) to calculate along the centerline.
When this advanced option is set, Tekla Structures ignores all unfolding
parameters defined in the unfold_corner_ratios.inp file. However, this

Alphabetical list of advanced options 63 C

 only affects polybeams with straight sections. The length of polybeams with
curved chamfers is always controlled using unfold_corner_ratios.inp.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

NOTE The centerline option is always a safe alternative, because other

modifications do not impact on it. For example, if you calculate length
using the reference line and you have used offsets to move the beam,
the result may not be the true length of the beam.

NOTE When XS_USE_OLD_POLYBEAM_LENGTH_CALCULATION (page 389) is

set to TRUE, this advanced option is not used, even though results
might be the same in most cases. To obtain reliable results, especially
for Net Length, we recommend that you do not set
XS_USE_OLD_POLYBEAM_LENGTH_CALCULATION to TRUE.

See also
Define unfolding parameters

XS_CAST_UNIT_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING
Category
Numbering
Use to define the contents of the cast unit family position number. For
example, instead of DT1-1, DT1-2, you can define the numbering as DT1-A,
DT1-B.
To get this result, set the advanced option as follows:
%CAST_UNIT_PREFIX%%CAST_UNIT_FAMILY_NUMBER%-
%CAST_UNIT_FAMILY_QUALIFIER_WITH_LETTERS%
Use the following options to define the contents of family position numbers.
Use as many options as you need, and enclose each one in percent symbols
(%).

Option Description
%CAST_UNIT_PREFIX% Cast unit prefix, defined in the
part properties dialog box.
%CAST_UNIT_POS% The running cast unit position
number, starting from the start
number defined in the part
properties dialog box.
%CAST_UNIT_FAMILY_NUMB Cast unit family number,
ER% defined by the start number (in

Alphabetical list of advanced options 64 C

 Option Description
part properties dialog box) and
the final position in that
numbering series.
%CAST_UNIT_FAMILY_NUMB Cast unit family number with
ER_WITH_LETTERS% letters. The letters run
automatically from A to Z. If
more letters are needed, Tekla
Structures takes a second or
even a third letter into use, for
example AA or AAA.
You can also define valid letters
with the advanced option
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEM
BLY_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMB
ERS.
%CAST_UNIT_FAMILY_QUAL Cast unit family qualifier,
IFIER% defined by the family
numbering criteria given in the
Numbering Setup dialog box.
%CAST_UNIT_FAMILY_QUAL Cast unit family qualifier with
IFIER_WITH_LETTERS% letters. The letters run
automatically from A to Z. If
more letters are needed, Tekla
Structures takes a second or
even a third letter into use, for
example AA or AAA.
You can also define valid letters
with the advanced option
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEM
BLY_FAMILY_QUALIFIER.
%UDA:[uda_name]% User-defined attribute of the
cast unit or cast unit main part.
If the attribute is defined for
the cast unit, it will be used. If it
is not defined, the main part
attribute will be used. You can
also define that only the user-
defined attribute of the main
part will be used, for example
%UDA:MAINPART.USER_FIELD
_1%.
%TPL:[tpl_name]% Template attribute of the cast
unit or cast unit main part, for

Alphabetical list of advanced options 65 C

 Option Description
example %
TPL:PROJECT.NUMBER%.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Number of characters
You can define the number of characters by adding a period and the required
number to the end of each option. For example
%CAST_UNIT_FAMILY_QUALIFIER_WITH_LETTERS.3% will result in three
letters for every cast unit, starting from AAA.

Example
If you set the advanced option to
%CAST_UNIT_PREFIX%/%CAST_UNIT_FAMILY_NUMBER.3%-
%CAST_UNIT_FAMILY_QUALIFIER.3%
The result will be
A/001-001.

See also

XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_QUALIFIER (page 402)

XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMBERS (page 401)

XS_CAST_UNIT_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING
Category: Numbering
Use to base cast unit numbers on drawing numbers. Use the following
switches to define the contents of cast unit marks. Use as many switches as
you need, and enclose each one in percent symbols (%).
The available switches are:

Switch Description
%CAST_UNIT_MULTI Multidrawing name.
_DRAWING_NUMBER%
%CAST_UNIT_MULTI Position of the cast unit drawing
_DRAWING_POS% inside the multidrawing.
%CAST_UNIT_PREFI Cast unit prefix in the model.
X%

Alphabetical list of advanced options 66 C

 Switch Description
%CAST_UNIT_POS% Cast unit position number in the
model.
Template fields Enter TPL: followed by the name of
any relevant template field. Enclose
each name in percent symbols (%). For
example, %TPL:PROJECT.NUMBER%
NOTE: No template fields starting with
DRAWING work for this advanced
option, for example,
DRAWING.TITLE1. If you use them in
the value, Tekla Structures will replace
the whole value string with the default
value.
User-defined Enter UDA: followed by the name of
attributes that are any relevant user-defined attribute,
defined in the exactly as it appears in the
objects.inp file objects.inp file. For example,
%UDA:MY_INFO_1%

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
To put the cast unit multinumbers in the format multidrawing name + part
prefix + position on multidrawing, set the advanced option as follows:
%CAST_UNIT_MULTI_DRAWING_NUMBER%%CAST_UNIT_PREFIX%
%CAST_UNIT_MULTI_DRAWING_POS%
This will create the cast unit mark 10B1, where:
• 10 is the drawing number
• B is the cast unit prefix
• 1 designates that it is the first cast unit on the sheet.

See also
XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR (page 384)
XS_PART_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING (page 269)
XS_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING (page 45)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 67 C

 XS_CAST_UNIT_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING
Category: Numbering
Use to define the contents of the cast unit position number.

NOTE Do not change this advanced option after you have created single-
part, assembly, or cast unit drawings, if you are using cloning. It may
partially separate the drawings from the part they represent, causing
the drawings to be flagged as deleted and other drawings to be cloned
after the next numbering.

The options are:

Option Description
%CAST_UNIT_PREFIX% Cast unit prefix, defined in the part
properties dialog box.
%CAST_UNIT_POS% The running cast unit position
number, starting from the start
number defined in the part properties
dialog box.
%CAST_UNIT_POS_WITH_LETTERS% Same as above, but with letters.
Uses letters A – Z by default, but you
can also define valid letters with the
advanced option
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_P
OSITION_NUMBERS
%UDA:[uda_name]% User-defined attribute of the cast unit
or cast unit main part. If the attribute
is defined for the cast unit, it will be
used. If it is not defined, the main part
attribute will be used. You can also
define that only the user-defined
attribute of the main part will be
used, for example
%UDA:MAINPART.USER_FIELD_1%.
%TPL:[tpl_name]% Template attribute of the cast unit or
cast unit main part, for example %
TPL:PROJECT.NUMBER%.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Number of characters
You can define the number of characters by adding a period and the required
number to the end of the options %CAST_UNIT_POS% and
%CAST_UNIT_POS_WITH_LETTERS%. For example,

Alphabetical list of advanced options 68 C

 %CAST_UNIT_POS_WITH_LETTERS.3% will result in three letters for every cast
unit, starting from AAA.

Example
If you set the advanced option to %CAST_UNIT_PREFIX%/%CAST_UNIT_POS.
3%, the result will be A/001.

XS_CENTER_LINE_TYPE
Category: Drawing Properties
Drawing Properties
Use this advanced option to change the line type of the part center lines in
drawings. Enter an integer value from 1 to 7. To see the center line type
change, close the drawing and open it again.

Value Description
1 Solid line
2 - 7 Dotted lines.
The default value is 4 (dash-and-dot line).

If you enter a value that is lower than 1 or higher than 7, Tekla Structures uses
the default value 4.

TIP To see what the line types look like, see the Hidden lines > Type options
on the Appearance tab in Part Properties.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_ONE_PART_STRING
Category
Marking: Bolts
Sets the format of the element Center-to-center distance in bolt marks,
when the bolts are in the same part, for example, in a column or beam flange.
Use to define gage information in the bolt mark in the following way:
• Use the switch %VALUE% for the numeric value of a gage.
• You can add text and the option in any order, for example, %VALUE% GAGE
or GAGE %VALUE%.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 69 C

 • If %VALUE% is missing, Tekla Structures adds the center-to-center distance
to the end of the string.
• If this advanced option is not set, only %VALUE% is used.
• If Tekla Structures cannot calculate the gage, nothing is added in the mark.
• The default value value is GAGE = %VALUE% .
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
There is a symmetrical bolt group in a beam flange. The value for gage is 10.

In the Advanced Options dialog box In bolt mark

GAGE GAGE = 10
= %VALUE%

XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_TWO_PARTS_STRING
Category
Marking: Bolts
Sets the format of the element Center-to-center distance in bolt marks
where there are two parts.
The default value is C/C = %VALUE%.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
There is a symmetrical bolt group in two clip angles. The center-to-center
distance is 10.

In the Advanced Options dialog box In bolt mark

c/c = %VALUE% c/c = 10

See also
XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_ONE_PART_STRING (page 69)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 70 C

 XS_CHAMFER_ACCURACY_FACTOR
Category: Speed and accuracy
Use this advanced option to define the number of points used for chamfers.
Use lower values to increase the number of points used to construct the
chamfer, thus making the curved chamfer smoother. Use larger values to
decrease the number of points used to construct the chamfer, thus making
the curved chamfer less smoother.
The default value is 4.0.
Restart Tekla Structures after changing the value to activate the new setting.

NOTE Even though the XS_CHAMFER_ACCURACY_FACTOR setting changes the

appearance of the curved chamfers in the model, it does not affect the
accuracy of the DSTV file.

In the example below, the value is 16.

In the example below, the value is 1.

Click the links below to find out more:

Round chamfers does not appear round in model
Chamfer accuracy for polybeams and contour plates

Alphabetical list of advanced options 71 C

 XS_CHAMFER_DISPLAY_LENGTH_FACTOR
Category
Model view
Use to adjust chamfer length. Tekla Structures calculates plate chamfer length
from the plate side length using the following formula:
XS_CHAMFER_DISPLAY_LENGTH_FACTOR * plate side length. By default
this factor is 0.08.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_DIMENSIONS_TO_FIXED
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to define whether dimensions have fixed placing when you drag them
away from their original locations. When set to TRUE, dimension placing uses
fixed placing routine instead of free placing. FALSE keeps the placing free.
The default value is TRUE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_MARKS_TO_FIXED
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to define whether part, bolt and reinforcement marks have fixed placing
when you drag them away from their original locations. When set to TRUE,
mark placing uses fixed placing routine instead of free placing.
The default value is TRUE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 72 C

 XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_NOTES_TO_FIXED
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to define whether associative notes have fixed placing when you drag
them away from their original locations. When set to TRUE, associative notes
placing uses fixed placing routine instead of free placing. FALSE keeps the
placing free.
The default value is TRUE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_TEXTS_TO_FIXED
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to define whether texts have fixed placing when you drag them away from
their original locations. When set to TRUE, text uses fixed placing routine
instead of free placing. The default value is TRUE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_VIEWS_TO_FIXED
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to define whether views have fixed placing when you drag them away
from their original locations. When set to TRUE, view placing uses fixed placing
routine instead of free placing. If you set this advanced option to FALSE, fixed
placing is not used. The default value is TRUE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_CHANGE_MARK_ASTERISK_TO
Category
Marking: parts

Alphabetical list of advanced options 73 C

 Use to specify a symbol to replace the asterisk character (*) in bolt marks and
the size elements of part marks. The default value is asterisk (*).
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

NOTE You cannot use this advanced option to change the asterisk character
in profile strings (e.g. PL10*100).

Example
XS_CHANGE_MARK_ASTERISK_TO=X

XS_CHANGE_WORKAREA_WHEN_MODIFYING_VIEW_DEPTH
Category
Model view
Makes working with reference files easier. Objects such as parts and reference
files outside the work area are not visible, even when they are within the view
depth range.
Set to TRUE (default) to automatically adjust the work area when you change
the view depth.

XS_CHECK_BOLT_EDGE_DISTANCE_ALWAYS
Category
Modeling Properties
Use this advanced option to select whether to check the bolt edge distance.
Set to TRUE to always check the bolt edge distance and to FALSE to check it
only when there are bolts in the object (the check is not done if there is only a
hole).
The default value is TRUE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_CHECK_FLAT_LENGTH_ALSO
Category
Plate Work

Alphabetical list of advanced options 74 C

 Set this advanced option to TRUE (default) to check plate length and plate
width, and then compare those with the possible dimensions for flat bars in
fltprops.inp.
If you set this advanced option to FALSE, Tekla Structures only checks the
plate width.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_CHECK_TRIANGLE_TEXT_SIZE
Category
Dimensioning: General
Set this advanced option to TRUE to size the triangle to fit text in bevel
dimensions. The default value is FALSE.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.
To define the angle symbol size, use the advanced option
XS_ANGLE_DIMENSION_SYMBOL_SIZE_FACTOR.

NOTE Using advanced option

XS_ANGLE_DIMENSION_SYMBOL_SIZE_FACTOR will disable advanced
option XS_CHECK_TRIANGLE_TEXT_SIZE.

See also
XS_ANGLE_DIMENSION_SYMBOL_SIZE_FACTOR (page 39)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 75 C

 XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_FOR_SMALL_TUBE_SEGMENTS
Category
Speed and Accuracy
Use this advanced option to define the chord tolerance for round tubes
smaller than or equal to the limit set by the advanced option
XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_SMALL_TUBE_SIZE_LIMIT. Enter the value in
millimeters. The default value is 1.0.
Re-open the model to activate the new value.

NOTE Do not change the chord tolerance settings during a project. Changing
them automatically recreates the tubular sections in the model when
you restart Tekla Structures, resulting in slightly different solid objects,
which may affect numbering.

See also
XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_SMALL_TUBE_SIZE_LIMIT (page 77)
XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_FOR_TUBE_SEGMENTS (page 76)

XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_FOR_TUBE_SEGMENTS
Category
Speed and Accuracy
Use this advanced option to define the chord tolerance for round tubes larger
than the limit set by the advanced option
XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_SMALL_TUBE_SIZE_LIMIT. Enter the value in
millimeters. The default value is 1.0.
Re-open the model to activate the new value.

Chord tolerance
Chord tolerance is the maximum difference between a straight segment used
to display a tubular section in model views and the actual tubular section:

Alphabetical list of advanced options 76 C

 NOTE Do not change the chord tolerance settings during a project. Changing
them automatically recreates the tubular sections in the model when
you restart Tekla Structures, resulting in slightly different solid objects,
which may affect numbering.

See also
XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_SMALL_TUBE_SIZE_LIMIT (page 77)
XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_FOR_SMALL_TUBE_SEGMENTS (page 75)

XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_SMALL_TUBE_SIZE_LIMIT
Category
Speed and Accuracy
Use this advanced option to define the limit that determines whether a tube is
considered small when calculating the chord tolerance. The value is compared
to the diameter of the profile. Enter the value in millimeters. The default value
is 50.0.
Re-open the model to activate the new value.

NOTE Do not change the chord tolerance settings during a project. Changing
them automatically recreates the tubular sections in the model when
you restart Tekla Structures, resulting in slightly different solid objects,
which may affect numbering.

See also
XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_FOR_TUBE_SEGMENTS (page 76)
XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_FOR_SMALL_TUBE_SEGMENTS (page 75)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 77 C

 XS_CIS_DEP1_DATABASE_NAME
Category
Export
Use to define the name of the temporary database used in CIMsteel transfers.
This advanced option is system specific and is read from environment files.
Generally, there is no need to modify system-specific settings. Do not modify
them if you are not an administrator.

XS_CIS_DEP1_DATABASE_PASSW
Category
Export
Use to define the password for the temporary database used in CIMsteel
transfers.
This advanced option is system specific and is read from environment files.
Generally, there is no need to modify system-specific settings. Do not modify
them if you are not an administrator.

XS_CIS_DEP1_DATABASE_PATH
Category
Export

Use to define a path to the temporary database that Tekla Structures creates
while converting a model from/to CIMsteel STEP format.
This advanced option is system specific and is read from environment files.
Generally, there is no need to modify system-specific settings. Do not modify
them if you are not an administrator.

XS_CIS_DEP1_EXPRESS_FILE
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.

Use this advanced option to specify the name of the EXPRESS file located in
the system folder. The EXPRESS file describes the CIMsteel DEP1 logical

Alphabetical list of advanced options 78 C

 product model. It is used when you convert a Tekla Structures model to/from
CIMsteel DEP1 STEP format.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_CLASH_CHECK_BETWEEN_PARTS
Category
Modeling Properties
Set to FALSE to detect clashes only between Tekla Structures objects and
reference model objects and to TRUE to detect clashes also between Tekla
Structures objects. The default is TRUE.

See also
XS_CLASH_CHECK_BETWEEN_REFERENCES (page 79)
XS_CLASH_CHECK_INSIDE_REFERENCE_MODELS (page 80)
XS_CLASH_CHECK_BETWEEN_REINFORCING_BARS (page 79)

XS_CLASH_CHECK_BETWEEN_REFERENCES
Category
Modeling Properties
Use to define whether or not Tekla Structures should run the clash check also
between reference models.
Set to TRUE if you want to perform clash check also between two reference
models. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

See also

XS_CLASH_CHECK_BETWEEN_PARTS (page 79)

XS_CLASH_CHECK_INSIDE_REFERENCE_MODELS (page 80)
XS_CLASH_CHECK_BETWEEN_REINFORCING_BARS (page 79)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 79 C

 XS_CLASH_CHECK_BETWEEN_REINFORCING_BARS
Category
Modeling Properties
Set this advanced option to TRUE to detect clashes between Tekla Structures
reinforcing bars, and between reinforcing bars and other Tekla Structures
objects (steel parts, bolts, embeds, and reference objects). Set to FALSE to
detect clashes between reinforcing bars and other Tekla Structures objects
except between reinforcing bars. The default is TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_CLASH_CHECK_BETWEEN_PARTS (page 79)
XS_CLASH_CHECK_BETWEEN_REFERENCES (page 79)
XS_CLASH_CHECK_INSIDE_REFERENCE_MODELS (page 80)

XS_CLASH_CHECK_INSIDE_REFERENCE_MODELS
Category
Modeling Properties

Use this advanced option for defining whether internal clashes are checked in
reference models.
The default value FALSE means that clashes between reference model objects
within one reference model are ignored. Clashes between reference model
objects belonging to different models are detected. The value TRUE means
that clashes between reference model objects within one reference model are
checked.
Note that this advanced option is taken into account only if the
XS_CLASH_CHECK_BETWEEN_REFERENCES advanced option is set to TRUE.

See also
XS_CLASH_CHECK_BETWEEN_REFERENCES (page 79)

XS_CLEAR_MODEL_HISTORY
Category
Speed and Accuracy

Alphabetical list of advanced options 80 C

 If you use model history log files, set this advanced option to TRUE to clear
history data from the log file each time you open and save the model. The
default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is system specific and is read from environment files.
Generally, there is no need to modify system-specific settings. Do not modify
them if you are not an administrator.

See also
XS_COLLECT_MODEL_HISTORY (page 83)

XS_CLONING_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY
Category: File Locations

Enter a path to the folder that contains cloning templates used by the Master
Drawing Catalog. This advanced option is set to %XSDATADIR%
\environments\common\cloning_templates by default.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also
Master Drawing Catalog

XS_CLOUD_SHARING_PROXY

NOTE We recommend you to set this advanced option in File menu -->
Sharing --> Sharing settings --> Tekla Model Sharing cache.

Use this advanced option to set up a cache server that is used with the Tekla
Model Sharing sharing service.
If needed, the advanced option can be set in initialization files. Set
XS_CLOUD_SHARING_PROXY to name of the server;port in initialization
files.
This advanced option is user-specific.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 81 C

 XS_CNC_CUT_PLANE_HEIGHT
Category
CNC

Set this advanced option to a value between 0.3 and 1.0 if you get the
following warning in the dstv_nc.log file for some NC files:
Error: Can't find intersection between solid and nc plane.
Please try to adjust XS_CNC_CUT_PLANE_HEIGHT (0.3 .. 1.0)
You may get these warnings when you try to create NC files for folded parts.
These NC files are not correct. For example, the external contours of the part
may be entirely missing from the NC file. You will notice this, if you view a DXF
file created from the NC file.
To use this advanced option, follow these steps:
1. Set this advanced option using a value bigger than 0.3. Start with smaller
values first. The internal default value is 0.3.
2. Create the NC files for the problematic part.
3. Check the file dstv_nc.log, and if there is still warning for this part,
repeat steps 1 to 4 with another value.
4. After creating the NC files without any error messages in the
dstv_nc.log, remove the advanced option from the user.ini file as
this advanced option may cause problems for some other parts.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_CNC_HOLE_DIAMETER_ROUNDING
Category
CNC
Defines the rounding factor of holes for NC files. NC files are accurate to 0.01
mm.
Use to round bolt diameters with very small differences in diameter to the
same value. You may need to use different diameters because bolts can have
different tolerance values in a Tekla Structures model. You can input more
decimals into bolt tolerance values in the component dialog boxes than in the
general bolt dialog box.
The rounding routine is used only when you create NC files.
Set the rounding factor the same value (in mm) as the drill tolerance of the
machine tool. The default value is 0.00001.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 82 C

 Tekla Structures divides the original hole diameter by the rounding factor, then
rounds the result to the nearest integer, then multiplies it by the rounding
factor. As a result, bolt diameters with very small differences in diameter are
now rounded to the same value.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
Here the rounding factor is 1.5875 (1/16 inch), which results in the following:
• Diameter 26.99 mm (1” 1/16 from component dialog box) => 26.99/1.5875
=> 17.00 => 17 => 17*1.5875 => 26.99 mm
• Diameter 27.00 mm (1” 1/16 from bolt dialog box) => 27.00/1.5875 => 17.01
=> 17 => 17*1.5875 => 26.99 mm

XS_COLLECT_MODEL_HISTORY
Category
Speed and Accuracy
Tekla Structures is able to collect model history data on various objects, for
example, parts in the inquire object dialog, reinforcing bars, and components
in reports, etc. Set this advanced option to TRUE (default) to collect the data. If
you do not want to collect the model history, set it to FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

NOTE This advanced option works only in multi-user mode and in Tekla
Model Sharing.

See also
XS_CLEAR_MODEL_HISTORY (page 80)

XS_COMBINED_BOLT_DIM_CHARACTER
Category
Dimensioning: Bolts
Use to set the character in bolt dimensions. The default value is asterisk (*).
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 83 C

 XS_COMPANY_SETTINGS_DIRECTORY
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.

Use this advanced option to define a folder where the initialization file
company.ini is located. This file contains enterprise-level settings. You can
define the folder, for example, in an options.ini file located under the
model, firm or project folder.

XS_COMPLEX_PART_MEMBERS_DO_NOT_HAVE_TO_BE_MAIN_
PARTS
Category
Dimensioning: Parts
Use in complex part/ assembly dimensioning to have Tekla Structures
dimension other than main parts as one. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

XS_COMPONENT_CATALOG_ALLOW_SYSTEM_EDIT
Category: Modeling Properties
Set this advanced option to TRUE to be able to edit the Applications &
components catalog definition files that are located in the XS_SYSTEM folders.
This advanced option is system specific and is read from
teklastructures.ini. Generally, there is no need to modify system-specific
settings. Do not modify them if you are not an administrator.

XS_COMPONENT_CATALOG_DO_REPORT_LEGACY_FILE_ISSUES
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 84 C

 This advanced option is system specific and is read from
teklastructures.ini. Generally, there is no need to modify system-specific
settings. Do not modify them if you are not an administrator.
Set the advanced option to TRUE to enable the reporting of legacy component
catalog issues to the message log in the Applications and Components
catalog.
Restart Tekla Structures after changing the value to activate the new setting.

XS_COMPONENT_CATALOG_COMPACT_THUMBNAIL_SIZE
Category: Modeling Properties
Use to adjust the size of thumbnails to between 16 and 96 pixels in the
compact view. The default is 40.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also
XS_COMPONENT_CATALOG_THUMBNAIL_SIZE (page 85)

XS_COMPONENT_CATALOG_THUMBNAIL_SIZE
Category: Modeling Properties
Use to adjust the size of thumbnails to between 16 and 96 pixels in the normal
view. The default is 96 pixels.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also
XS_COMPONENT_CATALOG_COMPACT_THUMBNAIL_SIZE (page 85)

XS_CONCRETE_PART_NUMBERING_PREFIX
Category
Numbering

Alphabetical list of advanced options 85 C

 Use to define a numbering prefix for concrete parts. The default value is
Concrete.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_CONCRETE_PART_NUMBERING_START_NUMBER (page 86)

XS_CONCRETE_PART_NUMBERING_START_NUMBER
Category
Numbering

Use to define a start number for concrete parts. The default value is 1.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_CONCRETE_PART_NUMBERING_PREFIX (page 85)

XS_CONNECTING_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL
Category
Marking: Parts
Use to change the symbol for a connecting side mark in single-part, cast unit,
and assembly drawings. By default the side mark symbol is number 34 in the
symbol file. To change the symbol, set this advanced option to a different
symbol number.
In general arrangement drawings, use XS_GA_CONNECTING_SIDE_MARK_
SYMBOL (page 204).
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 86 C

 XS_CONNECT_CONNECTION_PARTS_IN_AUTOCONNECTION
Category: Components
Set this advanced option to FALSE (default) if you do not want to connect the
parts created by the connection in Autoconnection. If you set it to TRUE, the
the parts created by the connection are connected in Autoconnection.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
AutoConnection

XS_CONNECT_PLATE_PROFILES_IN_AUTOCONNECTION
Category
Components
Set to TRUE to enable AutoConnection for built-up members. If you set this
advanced option to FALSE, Tekla Structures does not consider plates as
members when you use AutoConnection. The default value is TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_CONSIDER_NEIGHBOUR_PARTS_IN_HIDDEN
Category
Drawing Properties
Set this advanced option to TRUE (default) to draw parts behind neighbor
using hidden lines. If you want to show parts behind neighboring parts using a
visible line type, set this advanced option to FALSE.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 87 C

 Setting Example of appearance in
drawing
Set to TRUE (default). Parts
behind neighbor parts are
drawn with hidden lines.

Set to FALSE. Parts behind

neighbor parts are drawn with
the visible line type.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_CONSIDER_REBAR_NAME_IN_NUMBERING
Category
Concrete Detailing
Set to FALSE to have Tekla Structures only take part names into account when
numbering, not reinforcing bar names. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 88 C

 XS_CONTOUR_PLATE_POINT_ON_SAME_LINE_LIMIT
Category
Modeling Properties

Cleans away system component provided contour plate profile points in cases
where points are on an almost straight line if the provided (middle) points
deviate from the line at most as much as the value of this advanced option.
The point is then so close to the line between the previous and next point that
it is redundant and can be removed. Enter a decimal value. The default is 1.0
mm.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_CONTOUR_PLATE_POINT_ON_SAME_LINE_LIMIT_FOR_CLOSE_POINTS
(page 89)

XS_CONTOUR_PLATE_POINT_ON_SAME_LINE_LIMIT_FOR_
CLOSE_POINTS
Category
Modeling Properties

Cleans away system component provided contour plate profile points in cases
where points are on an almost straight line if the provided (middle) points
deviate from the line at most as much as the value of this advanced option.
The point is then so close to the line between the previous and next point that
it is redundant and can be removed. This advanced option is used if section
point distances between two consecutive points are smaller than 10.0 mm.
The default value for this advanced option is 0.1 mm.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_CONTOUR_PLATE_POINT_ON_SAME_LINE_LIMIT (page 88)

XS_CONVERT_OLD_FORCE_UNITS_TO_SI_FROM
Category
Components

Alphabetical list of advanced options 89 C

 Use to define how to convert part and connection attribute tables when you
open a Tekla Structures catalog prior to version 7.0.
You can use the following units: kg/T/N/daN/kN/lbf/kip, or a numerical value.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
To convert force units from kip to SI, set this advanced option to kip.

XS_CONVERT_OLD_MOMENT_UNITS_TO_SI_FROM
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
Use to define how to convert part and connection attribute tables when you
open a Tekla Structures catalog prior to version 7.0.
You can use the following units: kgm/Tm/Nm/daNm/kNm/lbf-in/lbf-ft/kip-in/
kip-ft, or a numerical value.

Example
To convert moment units from kip-ft to SI, set this advanced option to kip-ft.

XS_COPY_REVISIONS_IN_AUTOMATIC_CLONING
Category
Drawing Properties
Set the advanced option XS_COPY_REVISIONS_IN_AUTOMATIC_CLONING to
TRUE to copy the revisions and user-defined attributes to the automatically
cloned drawings. TRUE is the default value.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_COUNT_ALL_PARTS_IN_NSFS_REPEATED_PART_MARK
Category
Marking: Parts

Alphabetical list of advanced options 90 C

 Use this advanced option to determine how the quantity of parts with merged
part marks is shown. Set this advanced option to TRUE to count all parts. By
default, this advanced option is set to FALSE.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

Example
When there are four or more identical stiffeners on both sides of a beam web,
the mark is
• 4x1002BS if XS_COUNT_ALL_PARTS_IN_NSFS_REPEATED_PART_MARK is
set to TRUE.
• 2x1002BS if XS_COUNT_ALL_PARTS_IN_NSFS_REPEATED_PART_MARK is
set to FALSE.

See also
XS_COUNT_BOTH_PARTS_IN_NSFS_PART_MARK (page 91)

XS_COUNT_BOTH_PARTS_IN_NSFS_PART_MARK
Category
Marking: Parts
Use this advanced option to determine how the quantity of parts with merged
part marks is shown. Set this advanced option to TRUE to count both parts. If
you do not want to do this, set it to FALSE (default).
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

Example
When there are two identical stiffeners on both sides of a beam web, the mark
is
• 2x1002BS if XS_COUNT_BOTH_PARTS_IN_NSFS_PART_MARK=TRUE.
• 1002BS if XS_COUNT_BOTH_PARTS_IN_NSFS_PART_MARK=FALSE.

See also
XS_COUNT_ALL_PARTS_IN_NSFS_REPEATED_PART_MARK (page 90)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 91 C

 XS_CREATE_ALSO_BIG_HTML_REPORT_PICTURES
Category
Concrete Detailing
Set to TRUE to create an additional set of pictures to the report folder. The
pictures are three times larger in size compared to the ones in the HTML
report. The default is FALSE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_CREATE_DRAWING_PREVIEW_AUTOMATICALLY
Category
Drawing Properties
Set this advanced option to TRUE to take a snapshot of a drawing each time
the drawing is saved. The snapshot is saved in the \drawing folder under the
current model folder. The snapshot is used as the default preview image for
the drawing in the Master Drawing Catalog. If you set this advanced option
to FALSE, the snapshot is not taken. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_CREATE_MISSING_MARKS_IN_INTELLIGENT_CLONING
Category
Marking: General
Use to create all marks to a cloned drawing where new parts have been added.
To create the marks, set the advanced option to TRUE. The default is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_CREATE_ROUND_HOLE_DIMENSIONS
Category
Dimensioning: Parts

Alphabetical list of advanced options 92 C

 Enter TRUE (default) to dimension the round hole center point in drawings.

Setting Example of appearance in drawings

TRUE

FALSE

This advanced option does not apply to automatic general arrangement

drawing dimensions.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_CREATE_CONNECTION_WHEN_COPYING_DRAWING_VIEWS
Category
Drawing Properties
Set to TRUE to link copied views to the original drawing. This means, for
example, that when you delete a drawing from which you copied a view, Tekla
Structures also deletes the copied view. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

Useful links
For more information about using
XS_CREATE_CONNECTION_WHEN_COPYING_DRAWING_VIEWS, see the following
Support Article in Tekla User Assistance: What does the XS_

Alphabetical list of advanced options 93 C

 CREATE_CONNECTION_WHEN_COPYING_DRAWING_VIEWS advanced option
do?

XS_DRAWING_CREATE_SNAPSHOT_ON_DRAWING_CREATION
Category: Drawing Properties
Set this advanced option to TRUE to create a snapshot of a drawing at the
same time that you create the drawing. If you set this option to TRUE, you no
longer need to open a drawing to save it to create the snapshot. The default
values is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_CREATE_VIEW_FROM_MODEL_OLD_WAY
Category
Drawing View
Use this advanced option to specify which values Tekla Structures uses for
drawing view boundaries in general arrangement drawings. This only affects
views created from the model.
If you set this advanced option to FALSE (default), the drawing view
boundaries values are based on the current work area x and y coordinates of a
model view.
When this advanced option is set to TRUE, the drawing view boundary values
are based on the entire model view, ignoring the work area settings.
In both cases depth values are based on the model view display depth values.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_CS_CHAMFER_DIVIDE_ANGLE
Category: Speed and accuracy
Use this advanced option to change the angles dividing a cross section
chamfer. The default value is 30.0 degrees.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 94 C

 NOTE A very small value will cause profile roundings not to be visible.
Using this advanced option affects the rounding radius for parts that
have high accuracy (for example parts in drawings and in DWG
export).

Example
XS_CS_CHAMFER_DIVIDE_ANGLE=10.0

See also
XS_SOLID_USE_HIGHER_ACCURACY (page 350)

XS_CURVED_AXIS_PLACE
Category
Profiles
By default, Tekla Structures calculates the length of curved parts along the
center axis. Use this advanced option to define the position of this axis as a
ratio.
Tekla Structures calculates the location of the axis using the formula h=H/
2.0*ratio. The default value is zero (0). Define the ratio as 1.0 to calculate
length along the upper flange. Define the ratio as -1.0 to define the length
along the lower flange.
This value is used in reports and drawing templates.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 95 C

 XS_CUSTOM_COMPONENT_DECIMALS
Category
Speed and Accuracy
Use this advanced option to adjust the number of decimals for custom
components. This setting only works with parametric variables whose Value
type is Text. Other parameter types follow the normal accuracy settings.
The default value is 3.

XS_CUT_SYMBOL_FONT
Category
Drawing Properties

Use to define the font for section symbol text. The default value is Arial. If you
do not specify a font, Tekla Structures uses the default font defined for
XS_DEFAULT_FONT.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_DEFAULT_FONT (page 99)

XS_CYCLIC_SOLVER_MAX_LOOPS
Category
Modeling properties
Use to define how many cycles Tekla Structures makes to solve the
dependencies in custom components. Enter a number for the amount of cycle
loops. The default is 2.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

3.4 D

Alphabetical list of advanced options 96 D

 DAK_BMPPATH
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
This advanced option is system specific and is read from
teklastructures.ini. Generally, there is no need to modify system-specific
settings. Do not modify them if you are not an administrator.
Use to point to the folder for bitmap files used in
• custom components
• user-defined attributes (objects.inp file)
• profile catalog
• some system components
You can use semicolon-separated lists of folder paths, see an example below.
This advanced option is by default defined in the teklastructures.ini file
and it points to the folder ..\ProgramData\Tekla Structures
\<version>\Bitmaps
If you want to use another folder, add DAK_BMPPATH to the options.ini file
under the model folder with the new path that points to the folder where your
own bitmaps are located.

Example
DAK_BMPPATH=%XSDATADIR%\Bitmaps\
DAK_BMPPATH=%XSDATADIR%\Bitmaps\;H:\Tekla\bitmap\

XSDATADIR
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
This advanced option is system specific and is read from
teklastructures.ini. It can also be set locally, see your environment ini file
(env_<environment_name>.ini). Generally, there is no need to modify
system-specific settings. Do not modify them if you are not an administrator.
XSDATADIR is defined in the teklastructures.ini file. It points to a
location, where the installation installs the environment files and folders.

Example
By default, this advanced option is set as follows: set XSDATADIR=C:
\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\<version>\

Alphabetical list of advanced options 97 D

 XS_DEFAULT_BREP_PATH
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.

Use to define the location of the default shapes that are available in the Shape
Catalog dialog box when you create a new model. By default, this advanced
option is set to point to the common environment, and the definition files of the
default shapes are read from the \Shapes and \ShapeGeometries folders
under the \profil folder.

Example
To have Tekla Structures read the default shapes from the US imperial
environment, set this advanced option as follows:
set XS_DEFAULT_BREP_PATH=%XSDATADIR%\environments\usimp\
or
set XS_DEFAULT_BREP_PATH=C:\ProgramData\Tekla Structures
\<version>\environments\usimp\

XS_DEFAULT_ENVIRONMENT
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.

Use together with XS_DEFAULT_LICENSE and XS_DEFAULT_ROLE for

bypassing the login dialog. Set these advanced options in a separate
initialization file, and point to that file using the -I (capital i) parameter in the
Tekla Structures shortcut. The parameter is used to point to a file which needs
to be read before other initialization files.

WARNING If roles are used in your environment, both

XS_DEFAULT_ENVIRONMENT and XS_DEFAULT_ROLE should be
set for the startup to work correctly. XS_DEFAULT_LICENSE is
optional.

Example
set XS_DEFAULT_ENVIRONMENT=C:\ProgramData\TeklaStructures
\<version>\environments\usimp\env_US_imperial.ini

See also
XS_DEFAULT_ROLE (page 101)
XS_DEFAULT_LICENSE (page 100)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 98 D

 XS_DEFAULT_FONT
Category
Model view
Use to specify the default font in the model and drawings, for example, when
creating grids, dimensions, and mark texts. Enter the name of any Windows
font, for example, Arial Narrow. The default value is Arial Black.
If any of the following advanced options are not set, or if font conversion is
needed in drawings, Tekla Structures uses this advanced option:
• XS_CUT_SYMBOL_FONT
• XS_DIMENSION_FONT
• XS_GRID_TEXT_FONT
• XS_MARK_FONT
• XS_VIEW_TITLE_FONT
• XS_WELD_FONT
For example, if XS_MARK_FONT has no value set and you open an old model
with a newer version of Tekla Structures, XS_DEFAULT_FONT is used when
converting marks to the new model database.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also
XS_DEFAULT_FONT_SIZE (page 99)
XS_CUT_SYMBOL_FONT (page 96)
XS_DIMENSION_FONT (page 112)
XS_GRID_TEXT_FONT (page 209)
XS_MARK_FONT (page 237)
XS_VIEW_TITLE_FONT (page 408)
XS_WELD_FONT (page 411)

XS_DEFAULT_FONT_SIZE
Category
Model View

Alphabetical list of advanced options 99 D

 Use to set the default font size when modeling. The default value is 12.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_DEFAULT_FONT_SIZE_GRID
Category
Model View
Use this advanced option to define the font size for grids in models. The
default value is 12.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_DEFAULT_HEIGHT_FOR_CALCULATED_DRAWING_SIZE
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to change the default height for the calculated drawing size. Enter the
value in millimeters. The default value is 287.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
Defining calculated sizes

XS_DEFAULT_LICENSE
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.

Use to set the default license for a user role. The advanced option can be used
either in a role-specific initialization file (role_*.ini) for setting the default
license for a selected role, or in a separate initialization file together with
XS_DEFAULT_ROLE and XS_DEFAULT_ENVIRONMENT for bypassing the login
dialog.

WARNING If roles are used in your environment, both

XS_DEFAULT_ENVIRONMENT and XS_DEFAULT_ROLE should be

Alphabetical list of advanced options 100 D

 set for the startup to work correctly. XS_DEFAULT_LICENSE must
be set if there are more than one license type available.

Possible values are:

• FULL
• TeklaStructures_Primary
• STEEL_DETAILING
• REBAR_DETAILING
• PRECAST_CONCRETE_DETAILING
• CONSTRUCTION_MODELING
• DRAFTER
• ENGINEERING
• PROJECT_VIEWER
• PRODUCTION_PLANNER
• EDUCATIONAL
• DEVELOPER

XS_DEFAULT_MODEL_TEMPLATE
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
Use to define the model template which is used as the default in File menu -->
New when you create a new model.
Define a value for the advanced option in the role initialization files, available
in your environment folders. Store the default model template to the folder
defined by the advanced option XS_MODEL_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY
(page 254).
If this advanced option is not set, the model template that was used last is
displayed in File menu --> New.

Example
set XS_DEFAULT_MODEL_TEMPLATE=EngineeringTemplate

Alphabetical list of advanced options 101 D

 XS_DEFAULT_ROLE
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.

Use together with XS_DEFAULT_LICENSE and XS_DEFAULT_ENVIRONMENT for

bypassing the login dialog. Set these advanced options in a separate
initialization file, and point to that file using the -I (capital i) parameter in the
Tekla Structures shortcut. The parameter is used to point to a file which needs
to be read before other initialization files.

WARNING If roles are used in your environment, both

XS_DEFAULT_ENVIRONMENT and XS_DEFAULT_ROLE should be
set for the startup to work correctly. XS_DEFAULT_LICENSE is
optional.

Example
set XS_DEFAULT_ROLE=C:\ProgramData\TeklaStructures\<version>
\environments\usimp\Role_Steel_Detailing.ini

XS_DEFAULT_WIDTH_FOR_CALCULATED_DRAWING_SIZE
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to change the default width for the calculated drawing size. Enter the
value in millimeters. The default is 410.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_DELETE_UNNECESSARY_DG_FILES
Category
Drawing Properties
Set the advanced option to TRUE (default) to delete unnecessary drawing files.
If you do not want to do this, set it to FALSE. This advanced option deletes the
dg files older than seven days, which is the default value for the advanced
option XS_DELETE_UNNECESSARY_DG_FILES_SAFETY_PERIOD.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 102 D

 See also
XS_DELETE_UNNECESSARY_DG_FILES_SAFETY_PERIOD (page 103)

XS_DELETE_UNNECESSARY_DG_FILES_SAFETY_PERIOD
Category
Drawing Properties

Defines the time frame after which unnecessary drawing files are deleted.
Enter the required time frame in days. The advanced option is set to 7 by
default.

WARNING We recommend that you do not modify the value of this

advanced option unless you are an experienced Tekla Structures
user.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_DELETE_UNNECESSARY_DG_FILES (page 102)

XS_DELETE_UNNECESSARY_INT_ARRAYS

Category: Speed and Accuracy

Set to TRUE to also clean the int arrays when you go to the File menu and click
Diagnose and repair --> Repair model . The default value is FALSE.
Create a backup copy of the model before you use this advanced option.

WARNING This setting reduces the model size in some cases but should be
used with caution. if you have this advanced option enabled and
run repair database, it deletes from the database all the integer
and double arrays that are no longer used. If someone starts
using integer arrays in a new location in the database, they would
have to know about this functionality and update it so that those
references would be found and no information would be lost.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 103 D

 XS_DELETE_UNNECESSARY_REFMODEL_FILES_SAFETY_PERIOD
Category : Multi-user

Defines the time frame after which unnecessary reference model files are
deleted. Enter the required time frame in days. This advanced option is set to
7 by default. To use this advanced option, you need to set the advanced
optionXS_REFERENCE_MODEL_KEEP_VERSIONS_COUNT (page 301) to
clean up the unnecessary reference models.
• In multiuser model, files are kept until safety period has passed.
• In shared model, files are kept until write out.

WARNING We recommend that you do not modify the value of this

advanced option unless you are an experienced Tekla Structures
user.
This advanced option has no effect on shared models.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DETAIL_BOUNDARY_RADIUS
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to define a fixed size for circle-shaped detail boundaries in detail views.
Enter a numeric value in millimeters for the radius. By default, no size is set.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DETAIL_MARK_REFERENCE_SYMBOL
Category
Drawing Properties

If you have set Symbol to Custom on the Detail mark tab page of the Detail
symbol properties dialog box, Tekla Structures uses the value that you have

Alphabetical list of advanced options 104 D

 set to this advanced option. For example, if you enter xsteel@3, Tekla
Structures uses the symbol number 3 in symbol file xsteel.sym.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_DETAIL_SYMBOL_REFERENCE
Category
Drawing Properties
Sets the reference text for symbols that show a detail from another drawing.
The text can include:
• free text
• user-defined attributes
• template attributes
In the Advanced options dialog box, use single % characters around the user-
defined and template attributes. %DRAWING_TITLE% is the default value.
%TITLE% gives the same result. This advanced option gets the drawing name
entered in the drawing properties dialog box. If you enter TITLE1 - TITLE3,
Tekla Structures gets the drawing title from the drawing properties dialog box.
You can also use the format DR_TITLE1 - DR_TITLE3.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 105 D

 This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DETAIL_VIEW_REFERENCE
Category
Drawing Properties
Set the reference text for detail view labels. You can enter free text, user-
defined, attributes, and template attributes
Use single % characters around the user-defined and template attributes.
%DRAWING_TITLE% is the default value. %TITLE% gives the same result. This
advanced option gets the drawing name entered in the drawing properties
dialog box. If you enter TITLE1 - TITLE3, Tekla Structures gets the drawing
title from the drawing properties dialog box. You can also use the format
DR_TITLE1 - DR_TITLE3.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 106 D

 This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_DETAIL_SYMBOL_REFERENCE (page 105)

XS_DGN_EXPORT_PART_AS
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
Use to specify how Tekla Structures exports solid objects to DGN format.
• Set to CELL to export solid objects as cells containing the solid faces as a
DGN shape.
• Set to SOLID to export solid objects as DGN solid objects defined by
boundary elements.
The default value is CELL.

XS_DGN_EXPORT_USE_LOCAL_ID
Category
Export
Set this advanced option to TRUE to enable the use of local ID numbers in 3D
DGN export. Every exported part gets a unique ID number starting from 1. The

Alphabetical list of advanced options 107 D

 ID is saved as a user-defined attribute, and the same ID will be used in
consequent exports. The default value is TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DIALOG_ENABLE_STATE
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
Use this advanced option to remove selections from dialog box check boxes.
TRUE is the default value.

XS_DIMENSION_ALL_BOLT_GROUPS_SEPARATELY
Category
Dimensioning: Bolts

Alphabetical list of advanced options 108 D

 Set this advanced option to TRUE to prevent Tekla Structures from combining
bolt group dimensions. To combine bolt group dimensions, set it to FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DIMENSION_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR
Category
Dimensioning: General
Use to define the character to be used as a decimal separator in dimensions
and level marks. The default value is a full stop (.).
XS_DIMENSION_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR = <separator character>.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

NOTE With this advanced option, you can change the separators in
dimension objects in drawings only, not in part marks or templates.

Example
In the following example, the dimension mark contains a comma when the
dimension settings in the Dimension Properties dialog box are as follows,
and the advanced option is set to XS_DIMENSION_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR=,

Alphabetical list of advanced options 109 D

 In the following example, the separator was first a period and was then
changed to a comma.

XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_CHARACTER
Category
Dimensioning: General
Use to specify which separator character to use in large dimension values. If
you enter a comma (,), 154321 would become 154,321. If you do not specify a
character, Tekla Structures uses a space in dimensions when you set grouping
toYes in Dimension properties > General > Use grouping. By default, no
value is set.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_COUNT (page 110)

XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_COUNT
Category
Dimensioning: general
Use to specify the number of digits after which a separator character will be
inserted in dimension values. If you set this advanced option to 3 (default),
154321 becomes 154 321.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_CHARACTER (page 110)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 110 D

 XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_AWAY_FACTOR
Category
Dimensioning: General
Use to adjust the length of the dimension extension lines that are facing away
from the dimension points. Define the length as a factor for the dimension
text size. The default is 1.0 (text height * 1.0).

This option is used only when the option Short extension line is set to Yes or
On grid lines only in the Dimension Properties dialog box.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
Setting the dimension extension line length
XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_TOWARD_FACTOR (page 111)

XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_ORIGIN_OFFSET
Category
Dimensioning: General
Use to specify the distance between the extension line origin and the start of
the extension line (extension line origin offset). The default value is 1.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.
In the following example, extension line origin offset is defined:

XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_TOWARD_FACTOR
Category
Dimensioning: General

Alphabetical list of advanced options 111 D

 Use to adjust the length of the dimension extension lines that are facing
towards the dimension points. Define the length as a factor for the dimension
text size. The default is 1.5 (text height * 1.5).

This option is used only when the option Short extension line is set to Yes or
On grid lines only in the Dimension Properties dialog box.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
Setting the dimension extension line length
XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_AWAY_FACTOR (page 111)

XS_DIMENSION_FONT
Category
Drawing Properties

Use to specify the font for dimension text. The default value is Arial. If you do
not specify a font, Tekla Structures uses the default font defined for
XS_DEFAULT_FONT instead.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_DEFAULT_FONT (page 99)

XS_DIMENSION_GROUPING_COUNT_SEPARATOR
Category
Dimensioning: General

Use to define the symbol that is displayed between the quantity and the
automatic tag text in grouped dimensions. The default is x.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

Alphabetical list of advanced options 112 D

 XS_DIMENSION_LINE_TEXT_EPS
This advanced option has been removed, please use the advanced option XS_
TEXT_ORIENTATION_EPSILON (page 362) instead.

XS_DIMENSION_MARK_CONNECTOR
Category
Dimensioning: General

Use this advanced option to change the character that is used in dimension
tags when the dimension tag displays the properties of the different objects
dimensioned, for example, different part positions, and one dimension line is
used. A plus sign is used by default.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_DIMENSION_MARK_MULTIPLIER
Category
Dimensioning: General
Use this advanced option to change the multiplication sign when there are
several parts that have the same mark content, for example, HEA400 + 2 x
HEA300. This advanced option has effect only if you have selected Include

Alphabetical list of advanced options 113 D

 part count in tag in the Dimension Properties dialog box. x is the default
value.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_ASSEMBLY
Category
Dimensioning: Parts
Use for defining the content of the part mark placed next to the dimension
line label in assembly drawings. Give any combination of the switches.
The available switches are:
• PROFILE
• MATERIAL
• SIZE
• LENGTH
• COMMENT
• WPDIST (distance between work points)
• GR_L (gross length of the part)

TIP If you want to display the part mark content in the same order as the
switches, set XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_STRICT_POSITION
to TRUE.

This advanced option is role-specific. When you change the value, it changes
from system- to model-specific, and its value is the same for all users in the
current model.

Example
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_ASSEMBLY=PROFILE_AND_LENGTH
.
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_ASSEMBLY=PROFILE_AND_GR_L

See also
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_SINGLE (page 114)
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_STRICT_POSITION (page 115)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 114 D

 XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_SINGLE
Category
Dimensioning: Parts
Use to define the content of the part mark that is placed next to the dimension
line label in single-part drawings. Give any combination of the switches.
The available switches are:
• PROFILE
• MATERIAL
• SIZE
• LENGTH
• COMMENT
• WPDIST (distance between work points)
• GR_L (gross length of the part)

TIP If you want to display the part mark content in the same order as the
switches, set XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_STRICT_POSITION
to TRUE.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_SINGLE=PROFILE_AND_MATERIAL
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_SINGLE=PROFILE_AND_GR_L

See also
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_ASSEMBLY (page 114)
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_STRICT_POSITION (page 115)

XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_STRICT_POSITION
Category
Dimensioning: Parts
Use for controlling the order of the switches in
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_ASSEMBLY and
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_SINGLE and thus the order of the
part mark content in assembly and single drawings.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 115 D

 When set to TRUE, you can freely select the order of the switches in
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_ASSEMBLY and
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_SINGLE, and the part mark
content follows the order of the switches. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_ASSEMBLY (page 114)
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_SINGLE (page 114)

XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_CENTER
Category
Dimensioning: General
Use this advanced option to define the symbol Tekla Structures uses in center
plate side marks. The default value is 1. Tekla Structures uses the symbols
defined in dimension_marks.sym file located usually in the folder ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\common\symbols\.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_LEFT
Category
Dimensioning: General
Use this advanced option to define the symbol Tekla Structures uses in left
plate side marks. The default value is 0. Tekla Structures uses the symbols
defined in dimension_marks.sym file located usually in the folder ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\common\symbols\.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_RIGHT
Category
Dimensioning: General

Alphabetical list of advanced options 116 D

 Use this advanced option to define the symbol Tekla Structures uses in right
plate side marks. The default value is 2. Tekla Structures uses the symbols
defined in dimension_marks.sym file located usually in the folder ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\common\symbols\.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DIMENSION_SKEWED_BOLTS_IN_PART_PLANE_IN_SINGLE_
DRAWINGS
Category
Dimensioning: Bolts
Set this advanced option to TRUE to dimension bolts perpendicular to the part
plane in single-part drawings. If you do not want to do this, set it to FALSE. The
default value is TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DIR
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
This advanced option points to the folder for Tekla Structures data, source,
and binary files.
This advanced option is system specific and is read from
teklastructures.ini. Generally, there is no need to modify system-specific
settings. Do not modify them if you are not an administrator.

XS_DISABLE_ADVANCED_OPTIONS
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.

You can disable the Advanced Options dialog box so that the advanced
options can be edited only in the initialization files.
To disable the dialog box, set this advanced option to TRUE. If you do not want
to disable the dialog box, set it to FALSE. The default value is FALSE.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 117 D

 See also

XS_DISABLE_ANALYSIS_AND_DESIGN
Category
Analysis & Design
Set to TRUE to disable the following analysis and design tools from the Tekla
Structures user interface:
• The following command from the Analysis menu and the related icons
from the Loads and Analysis toolbar:
• Analysis & Design Models
• The following tabs from the part properties dialog boxes:
• Analysis
• Loading
• Composite
• Spanning
• Start releases
• End releases
• Design
• The two Analysis tabs from the parts’ user-defined attributes dialog boxes
The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_DISABLE_CANCEL_DIALOG_FOR_SAVE_NUMBERING_SAVE
Category
Numbering
Use to revert to the old numbering functionality that offers no option to cancel
numbering before the second save is made. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 118 D

 XS_DISABLE_CIS2
Category: Analysis & Design

Use to hide or display the CIMSteel command.

To hide the CIMSteel command in the Export and Import menus in the File
menu, set the XS_DISABLE_CIS2 advanced option to TRUE. The default value
is FALSE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_DISABLE_CLASSIFIER_FOR_MODIFIED_PARTS
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to disable the Detailed object level settings check for modified parts.
When you change part properties in a model after you have defined the
Detailed object level settings, part presentation and mark content are updated
in general arrangement drawings unless you have set this advanced option to
TRUE.
To disable the check for modified parts, set the advanced option to TRUE.
To enable the check for modified parts, set the advanced option to FALSE. The
default value is FALSE.

NOTE Drawings are not updated if the change does not affect numbering.

This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_DISABLE_DRAWING_PLOT_DATE
Category
Drawing Properties
Set this advanced option to TRUE to disable the print date information in
drawings. Disabling the print date helps to avoid possible conflicts when
working with multi-user models in situations where a user modifies drawings
while another user prints the same drawings. Set to FALSE to have the print
date information.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 119 D

 By default, the advanced option is set to TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DISABLE_PARTIAL_REFRESH
Category
Model View
Set this advanced option to TRUE to disable partial refreshing of OpenGL
windows. This advanced option is for older ATI graphics cards. If you do not
want to disable the partial refresh, set the advanced option to FALSE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_DISABLE_REBAR_MODELING
Category
Analysis & Design

If you set this advanced option to TRUE, Tekla Structures removes reinforcing
bar modeling module, even if you have a license for this module. This license is
always included, except in the Viewer configuration. The default is FALSE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_DISABLE_TEMPLATE_DOUBLE_CLICK
Category: Drawing Properties
By default, you are allowed to edit drawing templates and table layouts. It is
possible to prevent the template and table layout editing by setting the
advanced option XS_DISABLE_TEMPLATE_DOUBLE_CLICK to TRUE. When you
do this:
• You cannot start editing templates or table layouts by double-clicking a
template in a drawing. Instead, the Drawing properties dialog box will be
displayed.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 120 D

 • You cannot start editing templates or table layout by right-clicking a
template in a drawing and selecting the corresponding commands.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_DISABLE_VIEW_CENTERING_ASSEMBLY
Category
Drawing View
Use to left-align and/or top-align assembly drawing views. You can use values
HOR (left-align), VER (top-align), TRUE (left-align and top-align), or FALSE (no
alignment). Leaving out the value gives the same result as FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DISABLE_VIEW_CENTERING_GA
Category
Drawing View
Use to left-align or top-align GA drawing views. You can use values HOR (left-
align), VER (top-align), or both. For creating centered views, leave this advanced
option empty
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DISABLE_VIEW_CENTERING_MULTI
Category
Drawing View
Use to left-align or top-align multidrawing views. You can use values HOR (left-
align), VER (top-align), or both.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 121 D

 XS_DISABLE_VIEW_CENTERING_SINGLE
Category
Drawing View
Use to left-align or top-align single-part drawing views. You can use values HOR
(left-align), VER (top-align), or both.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DISPLAY_DIMENSIONS_WHEN_CREATING_OBJECTS
Category
Model View
Use for defining whether dimensions and dimension lines are displayed when
model objects are created.
When set to TRUE (default), Tekla Structures displays the dimensions and
dimension lines.
Dimensions and dimension lines are displayed when you create a new model
object and pick the start point and the intermediate or end points for the
object.
If you set this advanced option to FALSE, the dimensions are not displayed.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_DISPLAY_DIMENSIONS_WHEN_SELECTING_OBJECTS
Category
Model View
Use for defining whether dimensions and dimension lines are displayed when
you select a column or a beam.
Dimensions and dimension lines are displayed when you select a column or a
beam, or when you select multiple objects by picking them. The dimensions
are not displayed if a command is running, or if you select multiple objects
with area selection.
When set to TRUE (default), Tekla Structures displays the dimensions and
dimension lines.
When set to FALSE, the dimensions and dimension lines are not displayed.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 122 D

 This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

NOTE When direct modification is on, the standard object dimensions and
dimension lines are always hidden, regardless of these settings. Only
the direct modification dimensions are then shown. This makes it
easier to know which dimensions can be edited.

XS_DISPLAY_FILLET_EDGES
Category: Model View
Use this advanced option to show or hide fillet edges in model views. The
default value is TRUE, which shows the fillet edges. If you do not want to show
the fillet edges, set this advanced option to FALSE.
Fillet edges are lines that define the boundary between straight faces and
curved faces in the model. Examples of model objects containing fillet edges
are profiles with curved fillets, slabs or contour plates with curved chamfers,
and curved polybeams.

The fillet edges in certain profiles are shown in model views only when you
show parts with high accuracy.
This advanced option is user specific, and the setting is saved in options.bin
under the user folder. Reopen the model to activate the new value.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 123 D

 See also
XS_SOLID_USE_HIGHER_ACCURACY (page 350)

XS_DISPLAY_ZERO_INCHES

Category: Imperial units

Set this advanced option to TRUE to display zero inches. The default value is
FALSE.
Using this advanced option affects the results you get with the inquire tool,
and the dimensions in the model and drawings.
Example:
TRUE: 2'-0"
FALSE: 2'
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DISTANT_OBJECT_FINDER_TOLERANCE
Category
Model View
Use to set the minimum distance from the nearest part for the reporting of
distant objects. The object must be located outside this distance for it to be
listed by the Find Distant Objects tool.
The distance is measured from the nearest part. Enter the value in meters. The
default value is 100.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_DO_NOT_CREATE_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS_FOR_CONCRETE_
PARTS
Category
Drawing Properties

Alphabetical list of advanced options 124 D

 Use to control the creation of single-part and assembly drawings from
concrete parts.
To enable the creation of drawings, set the advanced option to FALSE.
To disable the creation of drawings, set the advanced option to TRUE (default).
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DO_NOT_CREATE_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS_FOR_LOOSE_
PARTS
Category
Drawing Properties
Use this advanced option for defining whether assembly drawings are created
for assemblies that contain only one part.
When you set this advanced option to TRUE, Tekla Structures does not create
assembly drawings for single-part assemblies. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DO_NOT_CREATE_BOLT_MARKS_IN_ALL_INCLUDED_
SINGLE_VIEWS
Category
Single Part View in Assembly Drawing

Use to prevent the creating of bolt marks in included single views.

Enter TRUE to exclude the bolt marks, FALSE to create the bolt marks. The
default is FALSE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_DO_NOT_CREATE_PART_MARKS_IN_ALL_INCLUDED_
SINGLE_VIEWS
Category
Single Part View in Assembly Drawing

Alphabetical list of advanced options 125 D

 Use to prevent the creating of part marks in included single part views.
Enter TRUE to exclude the part marks and FALSE to create the part marks. The
default is FALSE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_DO_NOT_CREATE_PROFILE_DIMENSIONS_FOR_CONCRETE
Contents
Drawing Properties
Set this advanced option to TRUE to prevent Tekla Structures from
automatically displaying the profile dimensions of concrete parts in cast unit
drawings. If you want to display the profile dimensions, set it to FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DO_NOT_DISPLAY_CHAMFERS
Category: Model View
Set this advanced option to TRUE to draw polygon plates without chamfer
lines. If you want to display the chamfer lines, set this advanced option to
FALSE. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option works with XS_DRAW_CHAMFERS_HANDLES (page 142)
set to CHAMFERS or to CHAMFERS_AND_HANDLES.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_DO_NOT_DRAW_COLUMN_MARKS_AT_45_DEGREES_IN_GA_
DRAWING
Category
Marking: Parts
Tekla Structures places column mark texts in general arrangement drawing
plan views by default at an angle of 45 degrees in respect to the position of the
column. To place the marks horizontally, set this advanced option to TRUE. If

Alphabetical list of advanced options 126 D

 you set this advanced option to FALSE, the mark texts are placed at the angle
of 45 degrees. The default value is TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
In the following example, the advanced option is set to TRUE.

In the following example, the advanced option is set to FALSE.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 127 D

 XS_DO_NOT_EXTEND_DIMENSION_LINES_THROUGH_ALL_
HOLES
Category
Dimensioning: Bolts
Set this advanced option to TRUE (default) to prevent dimension lines from
extending through all holes in a bolt group. If you wish to extend the
dimension lines, set this advanced option to FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DO_NOT_PLOT_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLES
Category
Dimensioning: General
Set to TRUE to prevent Tekla Structures from printing red dimension point
invalidity symbols when you print from the drawing list. Dimension point
invalidity symbols are always printed if you have a drawing open. The default
value is FALSE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_DO_NOT_OVERWRITE_PLUGIN_INP_FILE
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
With standard settings Tekla Structures overwrites the step profile settings and
replaces them with the default values every time when Tekla Structures is
started. To prevent Tekla Structures from losing the step profile settings, set
the advanced option XS_DO_NOT_OVERWRITE_PLUGIN_INP_FILE to TRUE in
the teklastructures.ini file.
If you are using catalog step profiles and have set
XS_DO_NOT_OVERWRITE_PLUGIN_INP_FILE to TRUE and you update Tekla
Structures, do the following:
1. Set XS_DO_NOT_OVERWRITE_PLUGIN_INP_FILE to FALSE in
teklastructures.ini file.
2. Update Tekla Structures.
3. Start Tekla Structures.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 128 D

 4. Set XS_DO_NOT_OVERWRITE_PLUGIN_INP_FILE to TRUE in
teklastructures.ini file.
5. Run Steps.exe.
6. Restart Tekla Structures.

See also

XS_DO_NOT_REMOVE_END_ABSOLUTE_DIMENSIONS
Category
Dimensioning: Parts
When you use absolute dimensions, Tekla Structures removes the last
absolute vertical dimension. To prevent this, set this advanced option to TRUE
(default). If you do not want to do this, set this advanced option to FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Setting Example of appearance in drawings

TRUE

Alphabetical list of advanced options 129 D

 Setting Example of appearance in drawings
FALSE

XS_DO_NOT_USE_FOLDED_GUSSET_PLATE
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
Set this advanced option to TRUE to use part-adds to create bent plates in
gusset connections. If you set it to FALSE, Tekla Structures creates bent gusset
plates using the Polybeam command instead of the Part-add command.

XS_DO_NOT_USE_GLOBAL_PLATE_SIDE
Category
Components
By default, connections 141, 146, 147, 149, 181, 184, 185, 186 and 187 create
all shear tabs on the same side of the main part if the main part has several
connections (global positioning). Set this advanced option to TRUE to position
each shear tab according to which end of the main part the connection that
creates it is closest to (local positioning). The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 130 D

 XS_DONT_SHOW_POLYBEAM_MID_EDGES
Category
Drawing Properties
Set this advanced option to TRUE to hide polybeam fold and bend lines in
drawings. If set it to FALSE (default), the fold and bend lines are shown.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Example

Advanced Example Description

option is set to
TRUE Polybeam fold and
bend lines are not
shown in the handrail.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 131 D

 Advanced Example Description
option is set to
FALSE Polybeam fold and
bend lines are shown
in the handrail.

XS_DRAW_ALL_SECTION_EDGES_IN_DRAWINGS
Category
Drawing Properties
Set this advanced option to TRUE to draw the edges of a cut part in the
drawing and to FALSE to leave the edges open. The default value is TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_SECTION_LINE_COLOR (page 316)

XS_DRAW_ANGLE_AND_RADIUS_INFO_IN_UNFOLDING
Category
Dimensioning: Unfolding

Alphabetical list of advanced options 132 D

 Set this advanced option to TRUE to show the angle and radius information on
the dimension line. The default for this advanced option is that the
information is shown. To hide this information, set it to FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_DRAW_BENDING_LINE_DIMENSIONS_IN_UNFOLDING
Category
Dimensioning: Unfolding
Set this advanced option to TRUE to create bending line dimensions in a
drawing.
If you do not want to create these dimensions, set this advanced option to
FALSE. The default value is TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES

Category: Drawing properties

Use the following advanced options to show or hide bolts that are hidden from
view by other parts, in single part, assembly, and general arrangement
drawings. The default values are shown here:
• XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_SINGLE_DRAWINGS=AS_PART
• XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS=AS_PART
• XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_GA_DRAWINGS=FALSE
Possible values are:
• AS_PART: uses part’s hidden line visibility settings.
• TRUE: always shows hidden bolts.
• FALSE: does not show hidden bolts.

NOTE Tekla Structures sets the way the bolt hidden lines are shown when
the bolt is added to a drawing, usually when you create the drawing or

Alphabetical list of advanced options 133 D

 a drawing view. The hidden lines setting of the bolts cannot be
changed afterwards.
One way to change the setting in an old drawing is to create a new
drawing view using the desired bolt hidden lines settings.

Example
The following examples show how these advanced options can be used
together with drawing property settings.

To Do this
Set the hidden 1. In the Assembly Drawing Properties dialog
lines to be always box, click Bolts.
invisible in
2. On the Content tab, select solid from the
assembly drawings
Solid/Symbol list.
3. Click OK.
4. Go to File menu --> Settings --> Advanced
options --> Drawing Properties , and set
XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_ASSEMBL
Y_DRAWINGS to FALSE.
5. Create the drawing.
Set the hidden 1. In the Assembly Drawing Properties dialog
lines to be visible box, click Bolts.
as the assembly
2. On the Content tab, select solid from the
drawing part
Solid/Symbol list.
properties allow
3. Click OK.
4. Click Part in the drawing properties dialog box.
5. On the Content tab, remove the check mark
from the Hidden line on/off check box.
6. Go to File menu --> Settings --> Advanced
options --> Drawing Properties , and set
XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_ASSEMBL
Y_DRAWINGS to AS_PART.
7. Create the drawing.

See also
XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES (page 136)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 134 D

 XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS
Category
Drawing Properties
Use this advanced option to show or hide bolts that are hidden from view by
other parts in assembly drawings.
The possible values are:
• AS_PART: uses part’s hidden line visibility settings.
• TRUE: always shows hidden bolts.
• FALSE: does not show hidden bolts.
The default value is AS_PART.

NOTE This setting only affects bolts with solid or exact solid representation.
Bolts with symbol representation are always visible. Changing the
advanced option does not affect existing drawings, but you need to
recreate them.

This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

See also
XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES (page 133).

XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_GA_DRAWINGS
Category
Drawing Properties
Use this advanced option to show or hide bolts that are hidden from view by
other parts in general arrangement drawings.
The possible values are:
• AS_PART: uses part’s hidden line visibility settings.
• TRUE: always shows hidden bolts.
• FALSE: does not show hidden bolts.
The default value is FALSE.

NOTE This setting only affects bolts with solid or exact solid representation.
Bolts with symbol representation are always visible. Changing the

Alphabetical list of advanced options 135 D

 advanced option does not affect existing drawings, but you need to
recreate them.

This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

See also
XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES (page 133).

XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_SINGLE_DRAWINGS
Category
Drawing Properties
Use this advanced option to show or hide bolts that are hidden from view by
other parts in single part drawings.
The possible values are:
• AS_PART: uses part’s hidden line visibility settings.
• TRUE: always shows hidden bolts.
• FALSE: does not show hidden bolts.
The default value is AS_PART.

NOTE This setting only affects bolts with solid or exact solid representation.
Bolts with symbol representation are always visible. Changing the
advanced option does not affect existing drawings, but you need to
recreate them.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES (page 133).

XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES
Category
Drawing properties

Alphabetical list of advanced options 136 D

 Use the following advanced options show or hide own hidden lines in bolts in
single part, assembly, and general arrangement drawings. The own hidden lines
are the lines of the object representation covered up by the object itself.
The default values are shown here:
• XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_SINGLE_DRAWINGS=AS_PART
• XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS=AS_PART
• XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_GA_DRAWINGS=FALSE
Possible values are:
• AS_PART: used the visibility settings of the part’s own hidden lines.
• TRUE: always shows bolts’ hidden lines.
• FALSE: does not show bolts’ hidden lines.

See also
XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES (page 133)

XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_ASSEMBLY_
DRAWINGS
Category
Drawing Properties
To show or hide the hidden lines of the bolts based on the own hidden line
settings of the part that hides the bolts, enter AS_PART. To always show
hidden lines of the hidden bolts, enter TRUE. To never show the hidden lines,
enter FALSE. The default value is AS_PART.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

See also
XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES (page 136)

XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_GA_DRAWINGS
Category
Drawing Properties

Alphabetical list of advanced options 137 D

 To show or hide the hidden lines of the bolts based on the own hidden line
settings of the part that hides the bolts, enter AS_PART. To always show
hidden lines of the hidden bolts, enter TRUE. To never show hidden lines of the
hidden bolts, enter FALSE. The default value is FALSE.

NOTE This setting only affects bolts with solid or exact solid representation.
Bolts with symbol representation are always visible. Changing the
advanced option does not affect existing drawings, but you need to
recreate them.

This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

See also
XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES (page 136)

XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_SINGLE_DRAWINGS
Category
Drawing Properties
To show or hide the hidden lines of the bolts based on the own hidden line
settings of the part that hides the bolts, enter AS_PART. To always show
hidden lines of the hidden bolts, enter TRUE. To never show hidden lines of the
hidden bolts, enter FALSE. The default value is AS_PART.

NOTE This setting only affects bolts with solid or exact solid representation.
Bolts with symbol representation are always visible. Changing the
advanced option does not affect existing drawings, but you need to
recreate them.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES (page 136)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 138 D

 XS_DRAW_BOLTS_PERPENDICULAR_TO_PART_IN_SINGLE_
DRAWINGS
Category
Dimensioning: Bolts
Set this advanced option to TRUE to draw bolts perpendicular to the part plane
in single part drawings. If you do not want to do this, set it to FALSE. This only
applies to bolt symbol types symbol and symbol3.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DRAW_BOLTS_THROUGH_NEIGHBOUR_PARTS
Category
Drawing Properties
Set this advanced option to TRUE to draw the bolt parts that coincide with
neighboring parts. If you do not want to draw these bolt parts, set it to FALSE.
The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.
The following example shows how the drawing looks like when you set this
advanced option to FALSE.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 139 D

 In the following example, the advanced option is set to TRUE.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 140 D

 XS_DRAW_CAST_PHASE_INTERNAL_LINES
Category: Concrete detailing
Use to show or hide edge lines of (precast) concrete cast units in drawings. Set
to TRUE (default) to show overlapping edge lines between adjacent cast units.

NOTE If you are working with cast-in-place concrete parts and

XS_ENABLE_POUR_MANAGEMENT is set to TRUE, the advanced options
XS_DRAW_CAST_UNIT_INTERNAL_LINES and
XS_DRAW_CAST_PHASE_INTERNAL_LINES do not have an effect.
If XS_ENABLE_POUR_MANAGEMENT is set to FALSE, both cast-in-place
and precast concrete parts are treated in the same way and are
affected by the advanced options
XS_DRAW_CAST_UNIT_INTERNAL_LINES and
XS_DRAW_CAST_PHASE_INTERNAL_LINES.

This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is

Alphabetical list of advanced options 141 D

 in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

See also
XS_DRAW_CAST_UNIT_INTERNAL_LINES (page 142)

XS_DRAW_CAST_UNIT_INTERNAL_LINES
Category: Concrete Detailing
Use to show or hide concrete part lines inside (precast) cast units in drawings.
Set to TRUE to show overlapping part lines inside cast units.
The default value is FALSE.

NOTE If you are working with cast-in-place concrete parts and

XS_ENABLE_POUR_MANAGEMENT is set to TRUE, the advanced options
XS_DRAW_CAST_UNIT_INTERNAL_LINES and
XS_DRAW_CAST_PHASE_INTERNAL_LINES do not have an effect.
If XS_ENABLE_POUR_MANAGEMENT is set to FALSE, both cast-in-place
and precast concrete parts are treated in the same way and are
affected by the advanced options
XS_DRAW_CAST_UNIT_INTERNAL_LINES and
XS_DRAW_CAST_PHASE_INTERNAL_LINES.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_DRAW_CAST_PHASE_INTERNAL_LINES (page 141)

XS_DRAW_CHAMFERS_HANDLES
Category: Model view
Use to define whether to show the handles or the chamfers for contour plates,
concrete slabs, and polybeams. The options are:

Alphabetical list of advanced options 142 D

 • HANDLES: handles are shown. Makes the selection of handles easier. This is
the default value.

• CHAMFERS: chamfers are shown. Use this option, for example, when you
want to check the status of polybeam chamfers.

• CHAMFERS_AND_HANDLES shows both the chamfers and handles.

See also
XS_DO_NOT_DISPLAY_CHAMFERS (page 126)

XS_DRAW_CROSS_AXIS
Category
Drawing properties
Set to N to have Tekla Structures hide the axis cross in beam cross sections.
Leave the value out to display the axis cross in beam cross sections.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 143 D

 XS_DRAW_CUT_FACES_WITH_RED_COLOR
Category
Model View

Set to TRUE (default) to have cut faces shown in red color and to FALSE to
show the cut faces with the same color as other faces.
You do not need to restart Tekla Structures for the change to take effect.
However, you do need to, for example, modify the parts, or delete the parts
and then undo the delete command, so that they are redrawn.
This advanced option is user-specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder.

XS_DRAW_HIDDEN_FACES
Category: Drawing Properties
Set this advanced option to TRUE to draw hidden part faces in drawings. The
default value is FALSE. This advanced option hides the hatches on the hidden
part faces, for example.
This advanced option also affects rebars, if the rebar representation option
filled line is used.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example of using the value TRUE:

Example of using the value FALSE:

Alphabetical list of advanced options 144 D

 XS_DRAW_HORIZONTAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_
PARTS
Category
Drawing Properties
Set to TRUE to show horizontal view shortening symbols automatically. The
default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

Limitations
• Shortening symbols are not shown in general arrangement drawings.
• Shortening symbols are not shown in rectangular hollow sections or
channel sections.

See also
XS_DRAW_VERTICAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS (page 148)

XS_DRAW_INSIDE_ANGLE_IN_UNFOLDING
Category
Dimensioning: Unfolding

Alphabetical list of advanced options 145 D

 Set this advanced option to TRUE to display the interior angle instead of the
exterior angle in angle text. If set this advanced option to FALSE (default), the
exterior angle is displayed.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_DRAW_LONG_HOLE_DIMENSIONS
Category
Dimensioning: Bolts
Set this advanced option to TRUE to dimension slotted holes to the center
points of the curve. If you set this advanced option to FALSE (default), the
slotted holes are dimensioned to the center points of the holes.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DRAW_MESH_OUTLINE_SYMBOL_FROM_BOTTOM_LEFT_TO
_TOP_RIGHT
Category
Concrete Detailing
Use to define the outline representation of reinforcement meshes in drawings.
When you set this advanced option to TRUE (default), the outline
representation symbol of the mesh is always from bottom left to top right.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DRAW_ROOT_OPENING_EVEN_WHEN_ZERO
Category
Welds

Alphabetical list of advanced options 146 D

 Set this advanced option to TRUE to show zero root openings. The default is
TRUE. If you set this advanced option to FALSE, the zero root openings are not
shown.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_PART_MARKS
Category
Marking: Parts
Use this advanced option to define if a leader line is drawn when the leader
line is shorter than defined with the advanced option
XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_PART_MARKS_MINIMUM_LENGTH. When
you set this option to FALSE, the leader line is not drawn. Set to TRUE (default)
to always draw leader lines in part marks.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_PART_MARKS_MINIMUM_LENGTH
(page 147)

XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES
_OF_PART_MARKS_MINIMUM_LENGTH
Category
Marking: Parts

Use this advanced option to define the minimum length of a leader line that
Tekla Structures draws. If the leader line is shorter that the minimum length
and the advanced option XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_PART_MARKS
is set to FALSE, the leader line is not drawn. The default value is 0.0. If the
advanced option
XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_PART_MARKS_MINIMUM_LENGTH is set
to TRUE, the part mark leader lines are always drawn.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 147 D

 See also
XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_PART_MARKS (page 147)

XS_DRAW_SKEWED_ELEVATIONS
Category
Dimensioning: Parts
Set this advanced option to TRUE to display skewed elevation dimensions.
If you set it to FALSE (default), skewed elevation dimensions are not displayed
in drawings.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_DRAW_VERTICAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_
PARTS
Category
Drawing Properties
Set this advanced option to TRUE to show vertical view shortening symbols
automatically. The default value is FALSE.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 148 D

 This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

Limitations
• Shortening symbols are not shown in general arrangement drawings.
• Shortening symbols are not shown in rectangular hollow sections or
channel sections.

See also
XS_DRAW_HORIZONTAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS (page 145)

XS_DRAWING_ALLOW_NEW_SECTIONS_IN_REDIMENSIONING
Category
Drawing Properties

Use to define whether new views or sections are created during

redimensioning of existing drawings. The default is FALSE, which means that
no views or sections are created.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 149 D

 XS_DRAWING_ALLOW_SNAPPING_TO_DISTANT_POINTS
Category
Drawing Properties
Set this advanced option to TRUE to allow the cursor to snap to object end
points in a drawing even if the cursor is not near the end point. This means
that if the cursor is anywhere on the object, the cursor will snap to the object
end points. If you do not want to allow this, set this advanced option to FALSE.
Then the cursor will snap only to the snap points near the cursor.
The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_DRAWING_ASSEMBLY_HATCH_SCHEMA
Category
Hatching
Use to indicate the name of the schema file to use for assembly drawings.

Example
To use the default schema file, enter assembly.htc.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DRAWING_CAST_UNIT_HATCH_SCHEMA
Category
Hatching
Use to determine the name of the schema file used for cast unit drawings.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
To use the default schema file, enter cast_unit.htc.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 150 D

 XS_DRAWING_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_COLOR
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to change the highlight color of the automatic change symbols. The color
options are RED, DARK RED, ORANGE, DARK YELLOW, GREEN, DARK GREEN,
BLUE, DARK BLUE, BLACK, GREY, DARK GREY, CYAN, DARK CYAN and MAGENTA.
You can also enter colors as numerical values.

NOTE If you use the default color 190, the symbols are displayed on the
screen but they will not appear in the printed drawings.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example

Set the advanced Color on screen Color in printed

option to drawings
190(default) not visible

MAGENTA magenta

RED red

GREEN green

BLUE blue

Alphabetical list of advanced options 151 D

 Set the advanced Color on screen Color in printed
option to drawings
BLACK black

GREY grey

XS_DRAWING_CLONING_IGNORE_CHECK
Category
Drawing Properties
Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures clone a drawing even though all the parts
of the original drawing have been deleted and the position number is the
same as in the original drawing. The default is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
You have drawing A[A.1] in your drawing list. You number the model so that
the assembly A.1 changes to A.2. In the drawing list, the A[A.1] drawing is
marked with an x and with the status message "All parts deleted." Then you
number the model again, so that the assembly in the model changes from A.2
back to A.1. To clone, set the advanced option
XS_DRAWING_CLONING_IGNORE_CHECK to TRUE, select the A[A.1] drawing
(marked with x) from the drawing list and assembly A.1 from the model, and
click Clone.

XS_DRAWING_COMBINE_ADDED_DIMENSIONS
Category
Drawing Properties

Alphabetical list of advanced options 152 D

 Use to control whether added dimensions are merged to existing ones in
updated or cloned drawings. If set to FALSE, added dimensions are not
merged to existing ones. The default value is TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DRAWING_CUT_VIEW_COMPARISON_CRITERIA
Category
Drawing View

Use to specify the criteria used when comparing section views. If section views
are different, they will be visible and will receive a unique section mark. By
default, section views are compared based on the boundaries of the parts
(EXTREMA) and the orientation of the parts in the view (ORIENTATION). The
advanced option may contain a combination of the following options
separated by a comma:
• POSITION compares position numbers of all the parts in the view
(including non-dimensioned parts).
• EXTREMA compares the boundaries of the parts in the view.
• ORIENTATION compares the orientation of the parts in the view.
• SHOWALL considers all section views different and displays them with
unique section marks.
• EXACT uses more rigid rules when comparing section views. Use in
combination with the options EXTREMA or ORIENTATION.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

See also
Setting automatic section view properties

XS_DRAWING_FILTER_UDAS_WITHOUT_TYPE_CHECK
Category
Drawing Properties

Alphabetical list of advanced options 153 D

 Set this advanced option to FALSE (default) to use only user-defined attributes
that have been defined for the object in the object.inp in drawing view
filtering.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DRAWING_GA_HATCH_SCHEMA
Category
Hatching
Use to determine the name of the schema file used for general arrangement
drawings.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
To use the default schema file, enter general.htc.

XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_FIXED_WIDTH
Category
Drawing Properties

Use to specify a fixed size for the grid label frames. This is useful, for example,
when you want all the grid label frames to be the same size no matter whether
there are one or two digits in the frame. If you set this advanced option to zero
(0), the width of the grid label frame depends on the width of the grid label.
Enter the desired value in millimeters.
A fixed width of 18 is suggested for 5 characters (XX.XX) when the text height is
3/16. Change the fixed width to 14 for 4 characters (XX.X), 12 for 3 characters
(X.X), and to 10 for 2 characters (XX). If you use a different text height than
3/16, fixed width values need to be adjusted accordingly. This advanced option
overrides the automatic frame width calculation for grid labels.
If you do not set this advanced option, Tekla Structures adjusts the grid label
frames to text within each frame.
Example of grid label frames when the frame size is not fixed:

Alphabetical list of advanced options 154 D

 Example of grid label frames when the frame size is fixed:

This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_LINE_WIDTH_FACTOR
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to change the thickness of the grid label frame in drawings. You may want
to emphasize the grid label frames so that they are shown with a thicker line
than the rest of the grid.

Example
XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_LINE_WIDTH_FACTOR=1

Alphabetical list of advanced options 155 D

 NOTE Each color has a certain line thickness. The thickness of the grid label
frame on the printed black-and-white drawings depends on the color
that has been defined for the grid label in the grid properties and on
the value of this advanced option. .

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DRAWING_HISTORY_LOG_TYPE
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to define the contents of the drawing history log file
drawing_history.log. You can use the following options individually or in
any combination.
• ALL
• NEW
• DELETED (default)
• MODIFIED

Example
Separate the options using the _ character, for example, NEW_DELETED.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DRAWING_IGNORE_ZERO_LEVELS_IN_PART_MARKS
Category
Marking: Parts
Use to control whether zero levels (+0.000) are shown or hidden in part marks.
By default the advanced option is set to FALSE, so zero levels are shown in
part marks. Set to TRUE to hide the zero levels in part marks.
For example, you can use this advanced option for hiding connection side
marks at the specified distance from the view plane.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 156 D

 TIP To list level information in part marks, go to the Part mark properties
dialog box and insert the element User-defined attribute and enter one
of the following template attributes:
• ASSEMBLY_BOTTOM_LEVEL
• ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL
• CAST_UNIT_BOTTOM_LEVEL
• CAST_UNIT_TOP_LEVEL

This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

See also

XS_DRAWING_PART_REFERENCE_LINE_TYPE
Category:Drawing Properties
Use to set the reference line type in drawings. You can use the following
switches:
• POINT_LINE creates a line between the part’s creation points.
• DEFINITION_LINE creates a line between the part’s definition points
(creation points + end offsets ).
• CORNER_REFERENCE_LINE creates a line between the part’s corner points.

POINT_LINE DEFINITION_LINE CORNER_

REFERENCE_LINE

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 157 D

 XS_DRAWING_PART_SYMBOL_REPRESENTATION_TYPE
Category
Drawing Properties
Use this advanced option for adjusting thesymbol representation of parts in
drawings. Value 0 (default) means by reference line, and value 1 means by
center line. This affects the part representation options Symbol and Symbol
with partial profile in the part properties dialog box.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_DIRECTORY
Category Printing
The instructions below apply when you are printing using Printer Catalog
printer instances, which means that you have set the advanced option
XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG to TRUE in File menu --> Settings --> Advanced
options --> Printing.
Use this advanced option to define the folder where Tekla Structures creates
the plot files, if the file name field is empty in the Print Drawings dialog box.
By default, .\PlotFiles is used.

NOTE This advanced option overrides the folder defined in the Printer
Catalog.

XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
Use this advanced option to define print filenames for drawings, if the
filename is missing from the Print Drawings dialog box. This advanced option
is used instead, if you have not entered a value for some of the following
advanced options: XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_A,
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_C, XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_G,
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_W, or XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_M.
Enter any combination of text and options: NAME, NAME.-, NAME.,
DRAWING_NAME, DRAWING_NAME., DRAWING_NAME.-, REVISION,

Alphabetical list of advanced options 158 D

 DRAWING_REVISION, REV_MARK, REVISION_MARK, DRAWING_REVISION_MARK,
REV, TITLE, DRAWING_TITLE, UDA:<drawing user-defined attribute>,
TPL:<template attribute>, and REV?- <text> (if REV exists).
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME=%NAME.% - %TITLE%
%UDA:DRAWING_USERFIELD_1? - %%UDA:DRAWING_USERFIELD_1%
%DRAWING_REVISION? - Rev%%DRAWING_REVISION%.dxf

See also

XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_A
Category
Printing
Use to define print filenames for assembly drawings. Enter any combination of
text and options: Enter any combination of text and options: NAME, NAME.-,
NAME., DRAWING_NAME, DRAWING_NAME., DRAWING_NAME.-, REVISION,
DRAWING_REVISION, REV_MARK, REVISION_MARK, DRAWING_REVISION_MARK,
REV, TITLE, DRAWING_TITLE, UDA:<drawing user-defined attribute>,
TPL:<template attribute>, and REV?- <text> (if REV exists).
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

Example
%DRAWING_NAME.% - %DRAWING_TITLE%%DRAWING_REVISION? - Rev %
%REVISION_MARK%
%NAME.% - %TITLE%%UDA:DRAWING_USERFIELD_1? - %
%UDA:DRAWING_USERFIELD_1%%DRAWING_REVISION? - Rev%
%DRAWING_REVISION%.dxf

See also

Alphabetical list of advanced options 159 D

 XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_W
Category
Printing
Use to define print filenames for single part drawings. Enter any combination
of text and options: NAME, NAME.-, NAME., DRAWING_NAME, DRAWING_NAME.,
DRAWING_NAME.-, REVISION, DRAWING_REVISION, REV_MARK,
REVISION_MARK, DRAWING_REVISION_MARK, REV, TITLE, DRAWING_TITLE,
UDA:<drawing user-defined attribute>, TPL:<template
attribute>, and REV?- <text> (if REV exists).
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

Example
%DRAWING_NAME.% - %DRAWING_TITLE%%DRAWING_REVISION? - Rev %
%REVISION_MARK%
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_W = %NAME% - %TITLE%
%UDA:DRAWING_USERFIELD_1? - %%UDA:DRAWING_USERFIELD_1%
%DRAWING_REVISION? - Rev%%DRAWING_REVISION%.dxf

See also

XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_G
Category
Printing
Use to define print filenames for general arrangement drawings. Enter any
combination of text and options: NAME, NAME.-, NAME., DRAWING_NAME,
DRAWING_NAME., DRAWING_NAME.-, REVISION, DRAWING_REVISION,
REV_MARK, REVISION_MARK, DRAWING_REVISION_MARK, REV, TITLE,
DRAWING_TITLE, UDA:<drawing user-defined attribute>,
TPL:<template attribute>, and REV?- <text> (if REV exists).
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 160 D

 Example
%DRAWING_NAME.% - %DRAWING_TITLE%%DRAWING_REVISION? - Rev %
%REVISION_MARK%
%NAME.% - %TITLE%%UDA:DRAWING_USERFIELD_1? - %
%UDA:DRAWING_USERFIELD_1%%DRAWING_REVISION? - Rev%
%DRAWING_REVISION%.dxf

See also

XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_M
Category
Printing
Use to define print filenames for multidrawings. Enter any combination of text
and options: NAME, NAME.-, NAME., DRAWING_NAME, DRAWING_NAME.,
DRAWING_NAME.-, REVISION, DRAWING_REVISION, REV_MARK,
REVISION_MARK, DRAWING_REVISION_MARK, REV, TITLE, DRAWING_TITLE,
UDA:<drawing user-defined attribute>, TPL:<template
attribute>, and REV?- <text> (if REV exists).
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

Example
%DRAWING_TITLE%%DRAWING_REVISION? - Rev %%REVISION_MARK%
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_M = %NAME.% - %TITLE%
%UDA:DRAWING_USERFIELD_1? - %%UDA:DRAWING_USERFIELD_1%
%DRAWING_REVISION? - Rev%%DRAWING_REVISION%.dxf

See also

XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_C
Category
Printing
Use to define print filenames for cast unit drawings. Enter any combination of
text and options: NAME, NAME.-, NAME., DRAWING_NAME, DRAWING_NAME.,
DRAWING_NAME.-, REVISION, DRAWING_REVISION, REV_MARK,

Alphabetical list of advanced options 161 D

 REVISION_MARK, DRAWING_REVISION_MARK, REV, TITLE, DRAWING_TITLE,
UDA:<drawing user-defined attribute>, TPL:<template
attribute>, and REV?- <text> (if REV exists).
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

Example
%DRAWING_NAME.% - %DRAWING_TITLE%%DRAWING_REVISION? - Rev %
%REVISION_MARK%
%NAME.% - %TITLE%%UDA:DRAWING_USERFIELD_1? - %
%UDA:DRAWING_USERFIELD_1%%DRAWING_REVISION? - Rev%
%DRAWING_REVISION%.dxf

See also

XS_DRAWING_POINT_SCALE
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to scale the points Tekla Structures uses to create reference lines. Enter
the scale as a decimal. The default value is 0.5.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DRAWING_SCALE_SEPARATOR_CHAR
Category
Drawing Properties

Defines the separator character used in drawing scales. The default character
is colon (:).
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 162 D

 XS_DRAWING_SHEET_HEIGHT
Category
Drawing View
Use to define the default height of a drawing sheet. The default value is 800.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_X (page 163)

XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_X
Category
Drawing View
Use to define the initial position of the drawing sheet. This is useful when
using a dual display. The default value is 0.
You can set this in the following ways:
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_X=50XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_Y=50XS_DRAWING_SHE
ET_HEIGHT=600XS_DRAWING_SHEET_WIDTH=900

X and Y are the coordinates of the upper left corner of the drawing view,
measured from the upper left corner of the MDI client window (the dark gray
area in the Tekla Structures window).
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_Y (page 163)
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_HEIGHT (page 162)
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_WIDTH (page 164)

XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_Y
Category
Drawing View
Use to define the initial position of the drawing sheet. This is useful when
using a dual display. The default value is 0.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 163 D

 You can set this in the following ways:
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_X=50 XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_Y=50
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_HEIGHT=600 XS_DRAWING_SHEET_WIDTH=900
X and Y are the coordinates of the upper left corner of the drawing view,
measured from the upper left corner of the MDI client window (the dark gray
area in the Tekla Structures window).
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_X (page 163)
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_HEIGHT (page 162)
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_WIDTH (page 164)

XS_DRAWING_SHEET_WIDTH
Category
Drawing view
Use to define the default width of a drawing sheet. The default value is 1000.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_X (page 163)
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_Y (page 163)
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_HEIGHT (page 162)

XS_DRAWING_SINGLE_PART_HATCH_SCHEMA
Category
Hatching
Use to determine the name of the schema file used for single part drawings.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
To use the default schema file, enter single.htc.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 164 D

 XS_DRAWING_SNAPSHOT_CREATION
Category
Drawing Properties
If you set the this advanced option to FALSE, the snapshots are not created
automatically when you save a drawing, and you are no longer asked to select
if you want to create the snapshots when you close a drawing that you have
changed. The default value is TRUE, which means that snapshots are created
automatically when you save a drawing, and you will be asked to select if you
want to create a snapshot when you close a drawing that you have changed.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DRAWING_SOLID_MERGE_TOLERANCE
Category
Drawing View
Use to define the limit that determines whether some objects in a cast unit are
merged in the drawing view. Enter the value in millimeters. The default value is
6.0.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

Example
The following example shows the result of merging parts.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 165 D

 In the following example, unnecessary segments of curved parts that are one
above another are removed.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 166 D

 XS_DRAWING_STUD_REPRESENTATION
Category

Drawing Properties
Use this advanced option to define different representation options for bolts
and studs.
Set the advanced option to SOLID (default) to have the studs drawn as solid
objects regardless of the bolt representation setting, and to AS_BOLT to have
the studs drawn according to the settings in the Bolt properties dialog box.
This advanced option is role-specific. When you change the value, it changes
from system- to model-specific, and its value is the same for all users in the
current model.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 167 D

 XS_DRAWING_TEMPLATES_LIBRARY
Category
Drawing Properties
This advanced option has been removed.
You define the location of the drawing template library by setting this
advanced option to point to the model folder that contains the template
drawings
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database. .

Example
C:\TeklaStructuresModels\CloningTemplate
(where CloningTemplate is the model name).
To use the a cloning template library and the cloning template:
1. Open the user.ini file located in the folder ..\Tekla Structures
\<version>\nt\bin in a text editor, for example Microsoft Notepad.
2. Set the advanced option XS_DRAWING_TEMPLATES_LIBRARY to point to
the model folder that contains the cloning templates (template library):
set XS_DRAWING_TEMPLATES_LIBRARY=%XS_RUNPATH%
\DrawingLibrary
For example:
set XS_DRAWING_TEMPLATES_LIBRARY=C:\TeklaStructuresModels
\CloningTemplate
(where CloningTemplate is the model name).
3. To open the Clone Drawing dialog box, click Clone in the drawing list
dialog box.
4. Use the Objects and actions in cloning options to define the drawing
objects to be cloned and the actions for each cloned object.
5. Select the Clone from > Other model option. You can see that the
CloningTemplate folder is displayed in the box.
6. Click the Select template... button.
7. In the Drawing Templates dialog box, select the cloning template.
8. Leave the list open and clone the drawing by clicking Clone selected.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 168 D

 XS_DRAWING_UDAS_MODIFY_ALL_DRAWING_TYPES
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to modify the user-defined attributes of all selected drawings in the
drawing list at the same time, even if the drawings are of different types.
• To allow the modification of user-defined attributes for all drawings types
at the same time, set the advanced option to TRUE. TRUE is the default
value.
• To allow the modification of user-defined attributes only for one drawing
type at a time, set the advanced option to FALSE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_DRAWING_UPDATE_VIEW_PLACING
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to control how the view placing works. If the views do not fit on the screen
after scaling, Tekla Structures increases the sheet size using the layout
properties if autosizing is enabled ( Layout --> Drawing size --> Size
definition mode --> Autosize ). Use this advanced option together with XS_
INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED (page 223).
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Value Description
TRUE Updates the view placing. Does not affect the scale or
the sheet size.
TRUE, SCALE Updates the view placing and scales the view if the view
does not fit on the sheet. Tekla Structures scales the
views smaller using the scales in layout properties.
TRUE, SHEET Updates the view and increases the sheet size if the view
does not fit on the sheet.
TRUE, SHEET, Updates the view, scales the view and increases the
SCALE sheet size, if necessary.
TRUE, Updates the view placing. Does not affect the scale or
CLONING_ONLY the sheet size. View placing is updated only during
cloning, not during update. CLONING_ONLY is the default
value.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 169 D

 Value Description
TRUE, SCALE, Updates the view placing and scales the view if the view
CLONING_ONLY does not fit on the sheet. Tekla Structures scales the
views smaller using the scales in layout properties. View
placing is updated only during cloning, not during
update.
TRUE, SHEET, Updates the view placing and increases the sheet size if
CLONING_ONLY the view does not fit on the sheet. View placing is
updated only during cloning, not during update.
TRUE, SHEET, Updates the view placing, scales the view and increases
SCALE, the sheet size, if necessary. View placing is updated only
CLONING_ONLY during cloning, not during update.
FALSE Does not update the view placing or change the view
scale or sheet size.

XS_DRAWING_USE_WORKSHOP_FORM
_FOR_DOUBLE_PARTS_IN_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS
Category
Drawing Properties
Set this advanced option to TRUE to show haunch profiles always in workshop
form as double parts in single part drawings. TRUE is the default value. To
show the haunch profiles using the part representation selected in the part
properties dialog box, set this advanced option to FALSE. This setting affects
only part representation, not dimensioning or other part properties.
By default, a haunch (translations checked in drawing.ail) has different
length calculations and uses different part presentation in drawings than a
beam. The calculation routine checks the part name, and when the name
"HAUNCH" or translations of it is found, the haunch calculation is used.
You can add additional names for haunch profiles in drawing.ail file under
the \messages folder. Use the strings like drawing_haunch_2 or
drawing_haunch_3.
Below is an example of the workshop form representation.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 170 D

 Below is an example of the outline representation.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_FRONT
Category
Drawing properties
Use the following advanced options to define the arrow symbol used in section
and end view direction marks, for each basic view type (front, top, back,
bottom):
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_FRONT

Alphabetical list of advanced options 171 D

 • XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_TOP
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BACK
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BOTTOM

By default Tekla Structures uses the symbol no 66 in the xsteel.sym file

(located usually in the folder \environments\common\symbols\).
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_TOP

Category: Drawing properties

Use the following advanced options to define the arrow symbol used in section
and end view direction marks, for each basic view type (front, top, back,
bottom):
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_FRONT
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_TOP
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BACK
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BOTTOM

By default Tekla Structures uses the symbol no 66 in the xsteel.sym file

(located usually in the folder \environments\common\symbols\).
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BACK

Category: Drawing properties

Use the following advanced options to define the arrow symbol used in section
and end view direction marks, for each basic view type (front, top, back,
bottom):
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_FRONT
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_TOP
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BACK

Alphabetical list of advanced options 172 D

 • XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BOTTOM

By default Tekla Structures uses the symbol no 66 in the xsteel.sym file

(located usually in the folder \environments\common\symbols\).
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BOTTOM

Category: Drawing properties

Use the following advanced options to define the arrow symbol used in section
and end view direction marks, for each basic view type (front, top, back,
bottom):
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_FRONT
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_TOP
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BACK
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BOTTOM

By default Tekla Structures uses the symbol no 66 in the xsteel.sym file

(located usually in the folder \environments\common\symbols\).
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_DRAWING_VIEW_REFERENCE_SYMBOL
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to define the symbol that is displayed in drawing views, when you have
selected the option Custom in the Symbol list in the Detail or Section
Symbol Properties dialog box, or in the view properties dialog boxes of other
drawing views. For example, if you enter xsteel@3, Tekla Structures uses the
symbol number 3 in symbol file xsteel.sym.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 173 D

 XS_DRIVER
Category: File Locations
The print device definitions you create in the Printer Catalog ( File menu -->
Printing --> Printer catalog ) are located in the plotdev.bin file. This file is
located in the folder ..\environments\<your_environment>\system\.
The definitions in the system folder are accessible to all users. You can also
save printer definitions in the current model folder or in the project and firm
folders, and in a folder indicated by this advanced option. Tekla Structures
searches first for plotdev.bin in the model, project and firm folders, then in
the folder indicated by the advanced option XS_DRIVER.
This advanced option is system specific and is read from environment files.
Generally, there is no need to modify system-specific settings. Do not modify
them if you are not an administrator.

XS_DSTV_CREATE_AK_BLOCK_FOR_ALL_PLATES
Category: CNC
Set to TRUE (default) to create AK blocks in DSTV files also for rectangular
plates, combined NC files and part lists.
When you set the advanced option to FALSE, Tekla Structures checks whether
an AK block needs to be created for the plate, and creates the AK block when
needed.
The DSTV standard does not require the creation of AK blocks if the part is
completely described by its length, its dimensions and its skewed cuts in the
header data. This advanced option allows you to create AK blocks for plates
even if the header data already covers all the information of the plate.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DSTV_CREATE_AK_BLOCK_FOR_ALL_PROFILES
Category
CNC
When you set the advanced option to TRUE, Tekla Structurescreates AK blocks
in DSTV files for all profiles, combined NC files and part lists. The default value
is TRUE.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 174 D

 When you set the advanced option to FALSE, Tekla Structures checks whether
an AK block needs to be created for the part, and creates the AK block when
needed.
The DSTV standard does not require the creation of AK blocks if the profile is
completely described by its length, its dimensions and its skewed cuts in the
header data. This advanced option allows you to create AK blocks for profiles
even if the header data already covers all the information of the profile.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DSTV_CREATE_NOTCH_ONLY_ON_BEAM_CORNERS

Category: CNC

Use this advanced option to control the rounding of notch corners. The default
is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Examples
The following example describes the concepts of notches, notch corners,
notch corner roundings, and beam corners:

Alphabetical list of advanced options 175 D

 1. The notch is at the beam corner
2. The notch is not at the beam corner
3. Three notches, other corners are ordinary corners
4. Notch corner inner shape (or notch corner rounding) options in the NC
File Settings dialog box
The table below shows how the
XS_DSTV_CREATE_NOTCH_ONLY_ON_BEAM_CORNERS setting (TRUE/FALSE)
and the Inner corners shape setting affect the NC file.

XS_DSTV_CREATE_NOTCH_O XS_DSTV_CREATE_NOTCH_ONL
NLY_ON_BEAM_CORNERS set Y_ON_BEAM_CORNERS set to
to FALSE TRUE

Alphabetical list of advanced options 176 D

 Inner
corners
shape = 0

Inner
corners
shape = 1

XS_DSTV_DO_NOT_UNFOLD_POLYBEAM_PLATES
Category
Category: CNC

Set this advanced option to TRUE if you do not want to unfold polybeam plates
when you create DSTV files. This means that the polybeam plates will be
handled as “cut into shape” instead of “bent into shape” regardless of the
modeling method. For this advanced option to work, the polybeam plate must
lie in XY plane of the material.
If set this advanced option to FALSE, Tekla Structures writes the unfolded
geometry of the polybeam plates to the DSTV files. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 177 D

 XS_DSTV_LIST_NET_WEIGHT
Category: CNC
When you set XS_DSTV_LIST_NET_WEIGHT to TRUE, net weight is used in MIS
list export. If you set it to FALSE, gross weight is used. FALSE is the default
value.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DSTV_LIST_SEPARATOR
Category
CNC
Use to define the separator used in DSTV lists. By default the separator is the #
character.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DSTV_NET_LENGTH
Category
CNC
Set this advanced option to TRUE to make cuts affect the part length in the NC
file header. Set this advanced option to FALSE to make only fittings affect the
length.
Using this advanced option also affects MIS values, such as KISS and EJE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

For advanced users

The AK block of the NC file always contains the correct net length. Using this
advanced option writes the net length, instead of the length, to the header
block. Some NC machines take the length information either from the header
or AK-block. Check with the workshop if you are uncertain which method to
use.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 178 D

 NOTE Using this advanced option may damage cutting machines if the part
contains cuts and fittings and the longest length is not at the edge of
the part (machine tries to start cutting in the middle of the part):

See also
XS_DSTV_PRINT_NET_AND_GROSS_LENGTH (page 180)

XS_DSTV_NO_SAWING_ANGLES_FOR_PLATES_NEEDED
Category
CNC
With this variable you can define whether you need to specify skew angles in
NC file header or not for plates. TRUE does not write the skew angles in the file
heading. If you want to specify skew angles, set this advanced option to FALSE.
The default value is TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.
See below for an example:

Alphabetical list of advanced options 179 D

 XS_DSTV_NUMBER_OF_PARTS_BY_SELECTION
Category
CNC
Use to add the number of parts in the header of an NC file by the parts that
have been selected in the model.
When you set this advanced option to TRUE, and select the Create for
selected parts option in the NC Files dialog box, the number of parts in the
header of the NC file matches the number of selected parts.
The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DSTV_PLATE_PROFILE_WITH_WIDTH
Category
CNC
Set this advanced option to TRUE to have both the plate thickness and the
plate profile width written in the DSTV file header. Set this advanced option to
FALSE to have only the plate thickness written in the DSTV file header. The
default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DSTV_PRINT_NET_AND_GROSS_LENGTH
Category
CNC
Set this advanced option to TRUE to insert two length values in NC DSTV files:
• Gross length
• Net length
If you do not want to do this, set this advanced option to FALSE. FALSE is the
default value.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 180 D

 Gross length

Net length

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

NOTE Net and gross length may switch places in the NC file if the advanced
option XS_CHECK_FLAT_LENGTH_ALSO is set. Then Tekla Structures
may use the length value it finds in the fltprops.inp file instead.

See also
XS_DSTV_NET_LENGTH (page 178)

XS_CHECK_FLAT_LENGTH_ALSO (page 74)

XS_DSTV_REAL_WIDTH_INTO_HEADER_PROFILE_FOR_PLATES
Category
CNC
Set to TRUE to have the real plate width instead of the nominal plate width in
the header information of DSTV files. The default is FALSE.
Here is an example of the difference between the real plate width and the
nominal plate width: A user models a plate beam using the profile PL200*10,
but then uses part or line cuts to create a 5 mm cut along the length of the
plate, for example, to create a root opening for a weld, so that the end result is
a plate which is only 195 mm wide. In this case, the real plate width would be
195 mm, and the nominal plate width 200 mm.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

Alphabetical list of advanced options 181 D

 XS_DSTV_USE_COUNTERSUNK_HOLES
Category: CNC
If you set XS_DSTV_USE_COUNTERSUNK_HOLES to FALSE in File menu -->
Settings --> Advanced options --> CNC, Tekla Structures will not create CSK
holes in DSTV export. The default value is TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DSTV_USE_EQUAL_ACCURACY_FOR_PLATE_PROFILE_AND_
WIDTH
Category
CNC
Set this advanced option to TRUE if you want the plate profile width value,
plate width value in header and y coordinate values in AK and IK blocks to be
rounded to the nearest millimeter. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DSTV_USE_ONE_VERTEX_SHARP_INNER_CORNER
Category
CNC
Set this advanced option to TRUE if you do not need to add additional vertex
points in the AK block of your DSTV file, for example, when you do not define
the rounding radius in the NC settings. By default, this advanced option is set
to FALSE, which means that additional vertex points are added.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
Results in the following DSTV file when the advanced option is set to TRUE:

Alphabetical list of advanced options 182 D

 Results in the following DSTV file when the advanced option is set to FALSE.

XS_DSTV_USE_REAL_DIMENSIONS_IN_HEADER
Category
CNC
Set to TRUE to have bounding box values of the height and width written to
the profile header data in the NC file. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_DSTV_WRITE_BEHIND_FACE_FOR_PLATE
Category
CNC
Set to TRUE to write (AK + IK) contours for front (v) and back (h) faces of plates
in NC DSTV files. Set to FALSE to Tekla Structures only write the front face for
plate profiles. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_DUPLICATE_CHECK_LIMIT_FOR_COPY_AND_MOVE
Category
Modeling Properties
Use to define the maximum number of objects that are checked for duplicates
while copying or moving objects.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 183 D

 If the selection contains too many objects, Tekla Structures does not check for
duplicates. Enter an integer value. The default value is 100.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also

XS_DWG_EXPORT_UPDATE_TS_LINEWORK_OPTION
Category: Export
The setting Update Tekla Structures linework only is only shown in the
Export drawings to DWG/DXF dialog box if you have set the new advanced
option XS_DWG_EXPORT_UPDATE_TS_LINEWORK_OPTION to TRUE.Update
Tekla Structures linework only updates the Tekla Structures drawing content
only and keeps other content that is created in a CAD software intact at the
same file. Blocks (groups), created by Tekla Structures will be updated. Note
that you need to have the same drawing exported already, and the layer setup
and the layer template must be the same as during the previous export. All
CAD lines that were added previously will stay in the file and only Tekla
Structures content will get updated, unless editing was done in CAD blocks
editor. The default value is FALSE.
This setting is user specific, and it is saved in the options.bin under the user
folder.
Note that if you edit content of a block (CAD object), and then select the
Update Tekla Structures linework only option, the whole block will be re-
written, and the changes made in CAD will not be kept. To keep the changes in
CAD, you need to explode a block before editing it.
For example, you may want to use this option if you have added drawing title
blocks in the CAD after the first export of the drawing from Tekla Structures,
and want to keep these tables as they are, and update only the objects that
exported from Tekla Structures.
For more information about the DWG export, see Export a drawing to a 2D
DWG or DXF file....

XS_DWG_IMPORT_IGNORE_UNITS
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 184 D

 If a DWG reference file is created with imperial settings, it will import to Tekla
Structures in too large scale. You can use this advanced option to prevent this.
If you want all coordinates to be meters, set this advanced option to TRUE.If
you want to take the unit from the DWG file based on the measurement and
$insunit definitions in the file header, leave the value out. By default, this
advanced option is not set to any value.

XS_DXF_FONT_CONVERSION_FILE
Category
Printing
Use this advanced option to specify a font conversion file for Tekla Structures
drawings’ DWG and DXF export and printing. The font conversion file defines
which font file will be connected to the created AutoCAD style, and optional
font width and height correction factors. You can use both True Type font files
and AutoCAD .SHX font files.
If only the file name of the font conversion file is given, the file is read from the
model folder. To use a font conversion file from another location, give the file
name with relative or full path. If XS_DXF_FONT_CONVERSION_FILE is not set,
Tekla Structures will try to use the default font conversion file
(dxf_fonts.cnv) from the folder defined by DXK_FONTPATH. DXK_FONTPATH
is defined in teklastructures.ini.
If the font conversion file is not found or if it does not contain a mapping for a
certain font, the font name used in Tekla Structures is used to form the name
of the text style in AutoCAD. Spaces are replaced with underscores and
lowercase letters are replaced with uppercase ones. For example, font name
Arial Narrow in Tekla Structures will become a style named ARIAL_NARROW in
AutoCAD.
In addition to the font-specific width and height correction factors defined in
the font conversion file, there are general variables
XS_DXF_TEXT_HEIGHT_FACTOR and XS_DXF_TEXT_WIDTH_FACTOR, which
apply to all exported texts regardless of the font. If both font specific factors
and general variables are used, they are multiplied.
Syntax used in font mapping:
Font name in Tekla Structures = Font file name in AutoCAD [*
width correction factor [* height correction factor]]
Examples of font mappings in a .cnv file:
Arial Narrow = ARIALN.TTF
Arial Narrow Bold Italic = ARIALNBI.TTF * 0.5 * 1.0

NOTE • The names in the font conversion file are case sensitive.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 185 D

 • The font conversion file is used for drawings in DWG and DXF
export and printing only, it does not affect drawings DWG and DXF
import or model import or export.

See also
DXK_FONTPATH (page 187)
XS_DXF_TEXT_HEIGHT_FACTOR (page 186)
XS_DXF_TEXT_WIDTH_FACTOR (page 186)

XS_DXF_FONT_NAME
Category
Printing
Use to specify a font other than the default for 2D DXF files. By default, this
advanced option is not set to any value.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DXF_TEXT_HEIGHT_FACTOR
Category
Printing
Use to set a scale factor for 2D DXF text height. Enter the factor as a decimal.
The default value is 1.0.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_DXF_TEXT_WIDTH_FACTOR
Category
Printing
Use to set the scale factor for 2D-DXF text width. Enter the factor as a decimal.
The default value is 1.0.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 186 D

 DXK_FONTPATH
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
This advanced option is system specific and is read from
teklastructures.ini. It can also be set locally, see your environment ini file
(env_<environment_name>.ini). Generally, there is no need to modify
system-specific settings. Do not modify them if you are not an administrator.
Use to point to the folder containing Tekla Structures graphic fonts. The
Template editor, for example, uses graphic fonts. DXK_FONTPATH is defined in
teklastructures.ini.
Always end the path with the backslash character.

Example
set DXK_FONTPATH=%XSDATADIR%\environments\common\fonts\

See also

DXK_SYMBOLPATH
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
This advanced option is system specific and is read from
teklastructures.ini. It can also be set locally, see your environment ini file
(env_<environment_name>.ini). Generally, there is no need to modify
system-specific settings. Do not modify them if you are not an administrator.
This advanced option points to one or several folders containing Tekla
Structures symbol libraries. These folders also contain the DWG files used in
snap symbols and handles. The order of folders in DXK_SYMBOLPATH is
significant: If there are duplicate files, the first one found is used. All files are
read from all defined folders.
The DXK_SYMBOLPATH is defined in the environment initialization file
<your_environment>.ini located in ..\Tekla Structures\<version>
\<environments>\<your_environment\ and in the Tekla Structures
initialization file teklastructures.ini located in the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\nt\bin\ folder.
Separate different folder paths with a semicolon (;). Always end a folder path
with a backslash character.

Example
Example with one folder:

Alphabetical list of advanced options 187 D

 DXK_SYMBOLPATH=C:\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\<version>
\environments\common\symbols\
Example with several folders:
DXK_SYMBOLPATH=%XS_FIRM%;%XSDATADIR%\environments\usimp
\us_common\symbols\;%XSDATADIR%\environments\common\symbols\
In the latter example, Tekla Structures first checks your own symbol files in
your firm folder, then the symbol files in the US environment symbols folder,
and last the symbol files in the common environment symbols folder. If a
duplicate file exists, the one that Tekla Structures finds the first is used.

NOTE Since Tekla Structures version 19.0, the folder path definitions like
%DATADIR% or %XS_FIRM% in DXK_SYMBOLPATH have not converted
the paths correctly when used in options.ini located in the firm
folder. However, these definitions work correctly if used in user.ini.
Currently you need to write the absolute paths for DXK_SYMBOLPATH
in options.ini in the firm folder, like in the example below:
DXK_SYMBOLPATH=C:\TeklaStructures\21.0\environments
\common\symbols\;C:\firm\Symbols\;

Using a firm folder for images and symbols

You can define a firm folder where Tekla Structures always searches for the
images and symbols. When you store the images and symbols in this folder,
you do not have to move them from folder to folder when you install a new
version of Tekla Structures. Installing a new version does not replace the files
in the firm folder. For more information about defining the firm folder for
images and symbols, see Defining a firm folder for images and symbols.

See also
Symbols in drawings

3.5 E

XS_ENABLE_FAST_CUSTOM_ PROPERTY_LOADING
This advanced option must be set in startup .ini files
To switch off the functionality of loading custom properties from the extension
folder ..common\extensions\custom\properties\, set the advanced
option XS_ENABLE_FAST_CUSTOM_PROPERTY_LOADING to FALSE in a
startup .ini file using the following command:
set XS_ENABLE_FAST_CUSTOM_PROPERTY_LOADING=FALSE

Alphabetical list of advanced options 188 E

 When you do this, the custom properties are loaded from all folders and
subfolders in ..common\extensions, and from the locations defined in
XS_EXTENSION_DIRECTORY. This may cause performance issues and loading
failures when custom properties are used.
Loading custom properties from ..common\extensions\custom
\properties\ speeds up the loading process and solves loading problems
caused by other software components in other extension folders.

XS_ENABLE_INNER_CONTOURS_IN_CUT_PARTS
Category
Speed and Accuracy
Set this advanced option to TRUE to have Tekla Structures create a part cut
according to the inner and outer surfaces of the cutting part.
When the advanced option is set to FALSE, Tekla Structures creates the cut
according to the outer surface of the cutting part. This is the default.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
Here a beam has been cut with a round tube.

Advanced option set to TRUE

Advanced option set to FALSE

Alphabetical list of advanced options 189 E

 XS_ENABLE_MIDDLE_BUTTON_DOUBLE_CLICK_ZOOM_
ORIGINAL
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
When you set this advanced option to TRUE and double-click the middle
mouse button, Tekla Structures zooms the open drawing to its original size.

Example
XS_ENABLE_MIDDLE_BUTTON_DOUBLE_CLICK_ZOOM_ORIGINAL=TRUE

XS_ENABLE_POUR_MANAGEMENT
Category: Concrete Detailing
Set this advanced option to TRUE to enable pour management in the currently
open model and show cast-in-place concrete structures as continuous. The
commands that show and create pour objects and pour breaks in the model
and drawings are only available when pour management is enabled.
The default value for new models in the Concrete contractor role is TRUE. In
the other standard roles, the default value for new models is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

WARNING If the pours are enabled in the model, do not disable the pours
using XS_ENABLE_POUR_MANAGEMENT, especially in the middle of
the project. This may cause problems if you have drawings
containing pours, and if you are sharing your model. The pours
and pour breaks in the model and in the drawings may get
invalid, and you may lose pour-related modeling work.

XS_ENABLE_PUBLISH_TO_TEKLA_BIMSIGHT
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
When this advanced option is set to TRUE, the command Publish to Tekla
BIMsight is available in File menu --> Export. TRUE is the default value. FALSE
removes the command from the menu. Modifying this advanced options is not
recommended

Alphabetical list of advanced options 190 E

 See also
http://www.teklabimsight.com

XS_ENABLE_PULLOUT_PLACEHOLDERS
Category: Concrete Detailing
Set this advanced option to TRUE to add placeholders instead of dimensions in
pull-out pictures. This advanced option adds the option Placeholders in the
Pullout picture dialog box.

The following example shows how the placeholders are used:

Alphabetical list of advanced options 191 E

 This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_ENABLE_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POINT_
OPTIMIZATION
Category
Concrete Detailing
Use to select an optimal place for the base point of the reinforcing bar mark
leader line . If set to TRUE, Tekla Structures selects an optimal place for the
base point. The base point only points to one reinforcing bar. The default
value is TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_EQUAL_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS_TO_BOTH_ENDS_LIMIT
Category
Dimensioning: Parts
Shape dimensions are automatically shown on both ends of a beam, even if
the dimensions are the same. You can change this by entering a value in
millimeters for this advanced option.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

Example
If you set this advanced option to 300, and a part is 300 mm shorter in one
direction, Tekla Structures only displays the dimension in the longer direction.
Use millimeters in all environments.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 192 E

 XS_ERASE_UDA_VALUE_WITH_ATTRIBUTE_IMPORT_NULL_
AND_BLANK
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
Set to TRUE to erase the values of selected user-defined attributes in attribute
import.
To select which values of user-defined attributes are erased, enter any of the
following values at the end of the file to be imported, in the same order as the
user-defined attributes are entered in the file:
• NULL
• null
• blank

Example
If the content of the input file is the following:
ID; USER_FIELD_1; USER_FIELD_2; USER_FIELD_3; USER_FIELD_4;
12345;NULL;null;;4

The result is:

User-defined attribute values for 1-3 are erased in the attribute import. User-
defined attribute 4 has the value 4 in the attribute import.

NOTE Space and tab are not recommended as delimiters in the input file
when this functionality is used.

See also

XS_EXCLUDED_PARTS_IN_ORIENTATIONAL_NUMBERING
Category: Numbering
The advanced option XS_EXCLUDED_PARTS_IN_ORIENTATIONAL_NUMBERING
can be used in conjunction with the orientation numbering setting. Similar
parts will be numbered the same even if their orientation is different and the
orientation setting has been selected in the Numbering Setup dialog box. You
can enter the desired part names separated by spaces. Wildcards are also
allowed. This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the
options database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 193 E

 XS_EXPORT_CODEPAGE
Category
Export
Tekla Structures sets the codepage automatically so that exported files are
displayed correctly. If the proper codepage cannot be found, the codepage is
set to ansi_1252 by default. You can set the codepage manually by using this
advanced option, which overrides the automatic selection of codepage in
export. By default, this advanced option is not set to any value.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.
To set the advanced option to the required codepage, use one of the following
values:
• ascii
• iso8859-1
• iso8859-2
• iso8859-3
• iso8859-4
• iso8859-5
• iso8859-6
• iso8859-7
• iso8859-8
• iso8859-9
• dos437
• dos850
• dos852
• dos855
• dos857
• dos860
• dos861
• dos863
• dos864
• dos865
• dos869
• dos932

Alphabetical list of advanced options 194 E

 • mac-roman
• big5
• ksc5601
• johab
• dos866
• ansi_1250
• ansi_1251
• ansi_1252
• gb2312
• ansi_1253
• ansi_1254
• ansi_1255
• ansi_1256
• ansi_1257
• ansi_874
• ansi_932
• ansi_936
• ansi_949
• ansi_950
• ansi_1361
• ansi_1200
• ansi_1258

XS_EXPORT_DGN_COORDINATE_SCALE
Category
Export
Use this advanced option to set the coordinate scale to use in DGN exports.
DGN coordinate scale does not actually scale the model, but changes the
model precision. If you set this advanced option to 100, the accuracy is 1/100
mm.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 195 E

 XS_EXPORT_DGN_FILENAME
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
This advanced option has been removed.
Use to indicate the output file name in DGN exports. The default is
model.dgn.

XS_EXPORT_DGN_INCLUDE_CUTS
Category
Export
Use this advanced option to define the cuts to include in DGN exports. You can
use the following values:

Value Use to
FALSE Exclude all cuts.
TRUE Include all cuts (default value).
CLASH Include all cuts but skip hole cut
ends.
CLASH_NOR Same as TRUE for contour plates and
MAL_PLATE CLASH for all other parts.
S

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_EXPORT_DGN_INCLUDE_INNER_CONTOUR
Category
Export
Use to include or exclude inner contours of tubes in DGN exports. The options
are:
• TRUE to include inner contours (default)
• FALSE (default) to exclude inner contours
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 196 E

 XS_EXPORT_DGN_ROUND_SEGMENTS
Category
Export

Use to define the number of segments Tekla Structures uses to display round
tubes. Tekla Structures uses this value for large tubes (larger than 100 mm)
and 80% of this value for small tubes. The default value is 40.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_EXPORT_DGN_USE_CLASS_AS_COLOR
Category
Export

Set the color for exported parts by the part class (like Color by class in the
model).
By default the export uses the current colors of the Tekla Structures view. You
can use this advanced option when you have defined some other color setting
than Color by class in the Object Representation dialog box, but still want to
export with Color by class.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_EXPORT_DGN_USE_VOLUMETRIC
Category
Export
Set this advanced option to TRUE to define plates with profile type plate or
polygon plate to DGN type attribute 92 (0x05C in DGN cell header) and all
other beams to DGN type attribute 91 (0x05B in DGN cell header) in DGN
export. If you set it to FALSE, all beams get 91 as the type attribute in DGN
export. The default value is FALSE.
When this advanced option is set to TRUE, mapping to Microstation is
successful and the attribute report in Tekla Structures is correct.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 197 E

 XS_EXPORT_DRAWING_TRY_TO_KEEP_LOCATION
If you set the advanced option
XS_EXPORT_DRAWING_TRY_TO_KEEP_LOCATION to TRUE (default), Tekla
Structures tries to keep the DWG origin in the same position in the export as
the drawing view origin. This can only be done in plan views and elevation
views. If the drawing has more than one plan view or elevation view, Tekla
Structures places the DWG origin in the bottom-left corner of the drawing
frame.
If you set this advanced option to FALSE, the origin (0,0) is set to the bottom-
left corner of the drawing frame.
This advanced option is system specific and is read from
teklastructures.ini. Generally, there is no need to modify system-specific
settings. Do not modify them if you are not an administrator.
For more information about the drawing export, see Export a drawing to a 2D
DWG or DXF file....

XS_EXPORT_FILLMODE
Category
Export
Use to control how fills are exported to DWG and DXF formats.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Value Description Appearance in Appearance in

exported Tekla Structures
DWG/DXF
HATCH Fills are drawn as
hatches in the
exported DWG/
DXF. This is the
default value.
BORDER Only the border
lines of fills are
drawn in the
exported DWG/
DXF.
FILL Fills are drawn as
filled triangles in
the exported
DWG/DXF.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 198 E

 Value Description Appearance in Appearance in
exported Tekla Structures
DWG/DXF
NONE Fills are not drawn
in the exported
DWG/DXF.

XS_EXPORT_LINE_TYPE_DEFINITION_FILE
Category
Export

Enter the name of the line type definition file that contains the line type
definitions and is used in line type mapping.
The file name extension of the line type definition file is .lin. The advanced
option is set to point to the file TeklaStructures.lin by default.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also

XS_EXPORT_STEEL2000_PRIMARY_IDS
Category
Drawing Properties
Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures include main part IDs in MIS export files.
IDs appear on separate rows in the file. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 199 E

 XS_EXTENSION_DIRECTORY
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
Use the advanced option XS_EXTENSION_DIRECTORY for defining additional
installation folders for extensions, or customer tools developed on top of
Open API.
Before the additional installation folders, the default folder %XS_DATADIR%
\environments\common\extensions is used in installation.

XS_EXTERNAL_EXCEL_DESIGN_PATH
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.

This advanced option is system specific and is read from

teklastructures.ini. It can also be set locally, see your environment ini file
(env_<environment_name>.ini). Generally, there is no need to modify
system-specific settings. Do not modify them if you are not an administrator.
Points to the location of the Excel spreadsheet used in connection design. If
you want to change the location, set the advanced option in the user.ini file.

3.6 F

XS_FILTER_SEPARATOR_CHAR
Category
Modeling properties
Enter the separator to be used between filter strings, for example, in the view
filter. You can use any character. By default Tekla Structures uses a space.

Example
To use a semi-colon as a separator, set this advanced option as follows:
XS_FILTER_SEPARATOR_CHAR=;
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 200 F

 XS_FIRM
Category
File Locations

NOTE This advanced option is system-specific and only meant for

administrators.

Set the advanced options XS_PROJECT and XS_FIRM along with XS_SYSTEM to
point to the folders Tekla Structures searches for property files. Tekla
Structures always saves properties in the current model\attributes folder.
You can then copy or move them to XS_FIRM or XS_PROJECT folders if same
settings are needed in other models.

WARNING Changing an advanced option value in .ini files located outside

the model folder does not affect the existing models. You can
only update advanced options in the Advanced Options dialog
box or in the options.ini file located in model folder; not from
an options.ini file located in folders defined for the advanced
options XS_FIRM or XS_PROJECT. The .ini files are read also
when you open an existing model, but only new advanced
options that do not exist in options_model.db or
options_drawings.db are inserted, for example, such options
that are not yet in the Advanced Options dialog box but have
been added in the software.

See also
Folder search order
Project and firm folders

XS_FIX_FRAME_OF_FIXED_MODELVIEW
Category
Drawing Properties

This advanced option prevents the changing of the view size and location
especially in general arrangement drawings.
Set to TRUE to fix the frames of views that have Placing set to Fixed in View
Properties. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 201 F

 XS_FLAT_PREFIX
Category
Plate Work
Use this advanced option to set the flat bar prefix for output, reports, and
marks. If Tekla Structures finds a matching flat bar in the fltprops.inp file,
the plate name will consist of the prefix you enter here, followed by the
thickness X width, for example FLAT5X100. The default value is FLAT.
By default PL and PLT profiles get the prefix FL or FLT if a matching plate is
found in the fltprops.inp.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

NOTE In Imperial version, if XS_FLAT_PREFIX is not included in

profitab.inp as similar profile as PL (valid parametric profile name),
the profile is shown with metric units.

See also

XS_FLAT_THICKNESS_TOLERANCE
Category
Plate Work
Use to set the checking tolerance for flat bars. Tekla Structures uses this value
to check plate thickness to determine whether to convert it to a flat bar. Enter
a decimal value. The default value is 0.1 mm.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_FLAT_TOLERANCE
Category
Plate Work

Alphabetical list of advanced options 202 F

 Tekla Structures uses this value to check plate width to determine whether to
convert it to a flat bar. Enter a decimal value. The default value is 0.1 mm.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

FLEXLM_TIMEOUT
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
This is a Windows environment variable used by Tekla Structures. This variable
reduces the delay in starting Tekla Structures. Enter the value in microseconds.
For Tekla Structures, the maximum value of this variable is 100 000.

Example
set FLEXLM_TIMEOUT=100000

XS_FRACTION_HEIGHT_FACTOR
Category
Imperial Units
Use this advanced option to control the total height of fractions. The default
value in the US Imperial environment is 1.3.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_FS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK
Category
Marking: Parts
Use to define the far side postfix in merged part marks. This postfix is visible
for identical parts on far side. FS is the default value.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

Alphabetical list of advanced options 203 F

3.7 G

XS_GA_CONNECTING_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
Use to change the symbol for a connecting side mark in general arrangement
drawings. By default the side mark symbol is number 34 in the symbol file. To
change the symbol, set this advanced option to a different symbol number.
Restart Tekla Structures after changing the value to activate the new setting.

See also
XS_CONNECTING_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL (page 86)

XS_GA_DRAWING_VIEW_TITLE
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to define a title for a general arrangement drawing view in a multidrawing.
By default the value is defined as follows:
Drawing %DRAWING_BASE_NAME%.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_GAGE_OF_OUTSTANDING_LEG_STRING
Category
Marking: Bolts
Use to display the gage of outstanding leg (GOL) information in bolt marks
(element Gage of outstanding leg) in the following ways:
• If there is no %VALUE% in the string then Tekla Structures adds the GOL
value to the end of the string.
• You can enter any combination of text together with option %VALUE%. For
example, %VALUE% GOL or GOL%VALUE%.
• If you do not set this advanced option, Tekla Structures only uses %VALUE%.
• If Tekla Structures cannot calculate the value, nothing is added to the mark.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 204 G

 • The default value is GOL%VALUE%.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
Here, the value for the gage of outstanding leg is 5½.

In the Advanced Options dialog In bolt mark

box
%VALUE% GOL 5½ GOL
GOSL %VALUE% GOSL 5½
GOL = GOL = 5½
5½

XS_GA_HIDDEN_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL
Category
Marking: Parts
By default, the symbol for hidden North marks in general arrangement
drawings is number 32 in the symbol file. To change the symbol, set this
advanced option to a different symbol number.

See also

XS_GA_NORTH_MARK_SCALE
Category
Marking: Parts
By default, Tekla Structures draws North marks in general arrangement
drawings using a scale of 1:1. Use this advanced option to specify a different
scale. You can also create a larger symbol for North marks in the Symbol
Editor.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 205 G

 XS_GA_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL
Category
Marking: parts
By default, the symbol for hidden North marks in general arrangement
drawings is number 32 in the symbol file. To change the symbol, set this
advanced option to a different symbol number.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
Show orientation marks (north marks)
Change the symbol file in use

XS_GA_OMITTED_DIAMETER_TYPE
Category
Marking: bolts
Use to omit marks for specific diameter types in general arrangement
drawings. The options are HOLE or BOLT.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_OMITTED_BOLT_TYPE (page 264)

XS_GET_ASSEMBLY_LEVELS_FROM_ASSEMBLY_MAIN_PART
Category
Marking: Parts
Set this advanced option to TRUE to get assembly levels from the assembly
main part. Set it to FALSE to get the levels from the whole assembly. The
default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 206 G

 XS_GET_CAST_UNIT_LEVELS_FROM_CAST_UNIT_MAIN_PART
Category
Marking: Parts
Set this advanced option to TRUE to get cast unit levels from the cast unit main
part. Set it to FALSE to get the levels from the whole cast unit. The default
value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_GOL_SYMMETRY_DISTANCE

Marking: Bolts
Gauge of outstanding leg (GOL) is the center to center distance of the holes
between two angles usually connected on the web of the beam/column. It is
equal to gauge of leg angles plus the web thickness. Outstanding leg is the leg
of the angle perpendicular to the paper viewing from the web. Use this
advanced option to set the tolerance in part symmetry checking when
calculating the gauge of outstanding leg. The default value is 0.01.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_GRID_DIMENSION_OVERALL_LENGTH
Category
Dimensioning: General
Set a length to add a dimension line spanning the entire grid next to existing
grid dimensions. The default value is 1.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_GRID_COLOR
Category
Model View

Alphabetical list of advanced options 207 G

 Use to change the grid color in the model. Define the color of the grid using
RGB values:
XS_GRID_COLOR=<value for red> <value for green> <value for
blue>.
Separate the values with spaces. Define the values on a scale of 0 to 1. The
default values are 0.0 0.0 0.0. Close and reopen the view for the change to
take effect.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Example

RGB value Color

1.0 1.0 1.0 White
1.0 0.0 0.0 Red
0.0 1.0 0.0 Green
0.0 0.0 1.0 Blue
1.0 1.0 0.0 Yellow

See also
Change the color settings

XS_GRID_COLOR_FOR_WORK_PLANE
Category
Model View
Use to change the color of the work plane grid in the model. Define the color
of the grid using RGB values:
XS_GRID_COLOR_FOR_WORK_PLANE=<value for red> <value for
green> <value for blue>.
Separate the values with spaces. Define the values on a scale of 0 to 1. The
default values are 0.7 0.0 0.3.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also
Change the color settings

Alphabetical list of advanced options 208 G

 XS_GRID_PLANES_VISIBLE_WITH_USERPLANES
Category
Model View
Use to show or hide the grid planes.
Set to TRUE to show the grid planes. Set to FALSE (default) to hide the grid
planes.
Reopen the view for the change to take effect.

NOTE The grid planes can be shown only if the construction planes are
visible. To display the construction planes, select the Construction
planes check box in the Display dialog box.

XS_GRID_TEXT_FONT
Category
Drawing Properties

Use to set the font for grid text. The default values is Arial. If you do not specify
a font, Tekla Structures uses the default font defined for XS_DEFAULT_FONT.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_DEFAULT_FONT (page 99)

3.8 H

XS_HANDLE_SCALE

Category: Model view

Use to modify the handle size in model views. Enter a decimal value.
• The default value is 1.3.
• A value larger than 1.3 makes the handles larger and easier to see.
• A value smaller than 1.3 decreases the handles.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 209 H

 Close the model view and re-open it to implement the change.
This advanced option is user specific, and the setting is saved in options.bin
under the user folder.

XS_HATCH_SCALE_LIMIT
Category
Hatching

Defines the smallest possible size of the drawn hatch pattern. If the scale of a
single hatch pattern is smaller than the defined value, the pattern is changed
to a solid face. The default value is 0.001.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_HATCH_SEGMENT_BUFFER_SIZE
Category
Hatching
Tekla Structures includes a hatch buffer to speed up opening drawings
containing hatch. This advanced option defines the size of the buffer.
The default value is 1000000. If you use extremely complicated hatches, you
may get better performance with a larger value. For small hatches, use a
smaller value.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_ACI
Category
Export
Use this advanced option to set the autocad color index for the Special color
in hatches in drawing export. The default values is 120.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 210 H

 See also

XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R
Category
Hatching
Use to define a hatch color that is not converted to black when printed. This
color will be printed as color or grayscale, depending on the selected printer
settings. The hatch color is defined using RGB (Red Green Blue) values on a
scale of 0 to 255. The default for all of the related advanced options is 230.
Define the color using the following advanced options:
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_G
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_B
The smaller the values, the darker the shade.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_G
Category
Hatching
See XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R (page 211)

XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_B
Category
Hatching
See XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R (page 211)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 211 H

 XS_HELP_PATH
Category
This advanced option is available only in the
lang_<CurrentLanguage>.ini files.
This advanced option specifies the location of the help files in chm (Microsoft
Compiled HTML Help) format. These help files are used for example for menu
tooltips, enhanced tooltips and some components.
This advanced option is system specific and is read from environment files.
Generally, there is no need to modify system-specific settings. Do not modify
them if you are not an administrator.
This advanced option tells Tekla Structures the location of the help files to use.

Example
set XS_HELP_PATH=%XSDATADIR%\help\enu

XS_HIDDEN_LINES_CHECK_TOLERANCE
Category
Drawing Properties
Defines the distance within which Tekla Structures treats part lines inside cast
units as overlapping lines. The default value is 0.01.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_HIDDEN_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL
Category
Marking: parts
By default hidden North mark symbol is number 32 in the symbol file. To
change the symbol, set this advanced option to a different symbol number.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

Alphabetical list of advanced options 212 H

 XS_HIDDEN_REMOVE_DOUBLE_LINES
Category
Drawing Properties

To have Tekla Structures draw double lines when displaying models with Exact
representation and creating drawings and 2D DXF files, set this advanced
option to FALSE.
The default value is TRUE, which means that Tekla Structures does not draw
double lines, to minimize file size.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_HIDDEN_USE_BOLT_PLANES
Category
Drawing Properties
Set this advanced option to TRUE to hide lines behind a bolt nut (with Exact
part representation). To show the lines, set it to FALSE (default).
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_HIDE_OTHER_PARTS_IN_ASSEMBLY_AND_CAST_UNIT_
VIEWS
Category
Model View
Defines whether parts that do not belong to assemblies and cast units are
shown or hidden in assembly and cast unit views. The default value TRUE
hides the parts that do not belong to the selected assembly or cast unit. If you
set this advanced option to FALSE, the parts are not hidden.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 213 H

 XS_HIDE_WORKAREA
Category: Model View
Set this advanced option to TRUE to hide the work area or to FALSE to display
the work area in model views. The default is FALSE. Redraw the views for the
change to take effect.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Example

Setting Appearance in model

FALSE

TRUE

TIP To temporarily hide the green work area box, hold down the Ctrl and
Shift keys simultaneously, right-click and select Redraw View. To make
the box visible again, right-click and select Redraw View again.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 214 H

 XS_HIGHLIGHT_ASSOCIATIVE_DIMENSION_CHANGES
Category
Dimensioning: General
Use to define whether changed dimension text and moved dimension points
are highlighted in associative drawings.
When set to TRUE (default), Tekla Structures highlights the changed dimension
text and the moved dimension points in updated associative drawings.
Tekla Structures highlights the changes in the following ways:
• A change symbol (by default a cloud) is drawn around the old point, the
new point and the dimension values. It is displayed only when you select
the dimension.
• An arrow is drawn from the old point to the new point.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also
XS_HIGHLIGHT_MARK_CONTENT_CHANGES (page 215)
XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SYMBOL (page 48)
XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SIZE (page 48)

XS_HIGHLIGHT_MARK_CONTENT_CHANGES
Category
Marking: General
Use to define whether changed mark contents are highlighted in associative
drawings.
When set to TRUE (default), Tekla Structures highlights the mark contents that
have been changed in updated associative drawings by drawing a change
symbol (by default a cloud) around the changed mark content.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also
XS_HIGHLIGHT_ASSOCIATIVE_DIMENSION_CHANGES (page 214)
XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SYMBOL (page 48)
XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SIZE (page 48)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 215 H

 XS_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
Category
Marking: Bolts
Use to define the contents of the Size element in hole marks. The default
value is %BOLT_NUMBER%*D%HOLE.DIAMETER%.
The advanced options XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE and
XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE override this setting.

You can use any combination of text and the following options as the value for
this advanced option. Enclose each option in % characters. To use special
characters enter a backslash (\) followed by an ASCII number. You can use the
options in any order, and make calculations.
• BOLT_NUMBER
• DIAMETER
• LENGTH
• HOLE.DIAMETER
• LONG_HOLE_X
• LONG_HOLE_Y
• LONGHOLE_MIN (the shorter of the slotted hole dimensions)
• LONGHOLE_MAX (the longer of the slotted hole dimensions)
• BOLT_STANDARD
• BOLT_MATERIAL
• BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE
• BOLT_COUNTERSUNK
• BOLT_SHORT_NAME
• BOLT_FULL_NAME

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE (page 346)
XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE (page 325)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 216 H

 XS_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
Category
Marking: Bolts
Use to define the contents of the size element in bolt marks in general
arrangement drawings. If you have not set the advanced options
XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA or
XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA, then this advanced option
is used.

You can use any combination of text and the following options as the value for
this advanced option. Enclose each option in % characters. To use special
characters enter a backslash (\) followed by an ASCII number. You can use the
options in any order, and make calculations.
• BOLT_NUMBER
• DIAMETER
• LENGTH
• HOLE.DIAMETER
• LONG_HOLE_X
• LONG_HOLE_Y
• LONGHOLE_MIN (the shorter of the slotted hole dimensions)
• LONGHOLE_MAX (the longer of the slotted hole dimensions)
• BOLT_STANDARD
• BOLT_MATERIAL
• BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE
• BOLT_COUNTERSUNK
• BOLT_SHORT_NAME
• BOLT_FULL_NAME

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (page 326)
XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (page 346)

3.9 I

Alphabetical list of advanced options 217 I

 XS_IGNORE_SUBASSEMBLY_HIERARCHY_IN_DIMENSIONING
Category
Dimensioning: Parts
Use to define whether sub-assembly parts are dimensioned as secondary
parts of the main assembly.
When set to TRUE, Tekla Structures ignores sub-assemblies, and parts inside
the sub-assemblies are dimensioned as if they were parts in the main
assembly. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_IMPERIAL
Category
Imperial Units
Set this advanced option to TRUE to have output in imperial units only. If you
not want to do this, set it to FALSE (default).
This affects only the following elements of bolt marks:
• Gage of outstanding leg (GOL)
• Center-to-center distance
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_IMPERIAL_DATE
Category
Imperial units
Set this advanced option to TRUE to use the date format mm/dd/yyyy. Set it to
FALSE (default) to use the date format dd.mm.yyyy.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 218 I

 XS_IMPERIAL_INPUT
Category
Imperial Units
Set this advanced option to TRUE to allow input in imperial units only. To
disable the advanced option, set it to FALSE (default).
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_IMPERIAL_TIME
Category
Imperial Units
Set this advanced option to TRUE to use the time format hh:mm:ss am/pm.
Set to FALSE to use the time format hh:mm:ss.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_IMPERIAL_TRIANGLES
Category
Imperial Units
Set this advanced option to TRUE to also show triangle ratios in inches.
The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_IMPORT_DWG_TEXT_AS_POLYGON
Category: Drawing Properties
This advanced option can be used when adding DWG files to drawings. If you
have problems with fonts in DWG files, set this advanced option to TRUE, and
Tekla Structures will import fonts as polygons, instead of fonts. By default, the
option is set to FALSE.
This advanced option is user specific, and the setting is saved in options.bin
under the user folder.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 219 I

 XS_IMPORT_MODEL_LOG
Category
Import
Set to TRUE to create a log every time you use an import model.
Set to APPEND to append a log entry to the previous log.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_INCH_SIGN_ALWAYS
Category
Imperial Units
By default, Tekla Structures does not put an inch symbol (") in dimensions
which contain only inches. Set this advanced option to TRUE to show inch
symbols in all dimensions. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_INCLUDE_DWG_ATTRIBUTES_IN_REPORTS_AND_INQUIRE
Category
Speed and Accuracy

DWG-specific attributes are now available in reports and inquiries only if this
advanced option is set to TRUE. This advanced option is by default set to
FALSE.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 220 I

 XS_INHERIT_CONCRETE_PART_NUMBERING_SETTINGS_FROM_
CAST_UNIT
Category: Numbering
Use this advanced option to define whether to set concrete part numbering
according to cast unit numbering settings. If you set this advanced option to
TRUE (default), the part number prefix for concrete parts includes the cast unit
prefix and the start number. If you set the advanced option to FALSE, the cast
unit prefix and the start number are not included.
For example, the cast unit prefix is C and the start number is 100. When the
advanced option is TRUE, the concrete part prefix is Concrete_C-100. When
the advanced option is FALSE, the prefix is only Concrete.
This setting affects concrete parts: Strip and pad footings, concrete beams and
columns, concrete walls and slabs, and concrete polybeams.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_CONCRETE_PART_NUMBERING_PREFIX (page 85)
XS_CONCRETE_PART_NUMBERING_START_NUMBER (page 86)

XS_INP
This advanced option is system specific and is read from
teklastructures.ini. It can also be set locally, see your environment ini file
(env_<environment_name>.ini). Generally, there is no need to modify
system-specific settings. Do not modify them if you are not an administrator.
Several system files are read from this folder, such as definitions for
parametric profiles (.clb), IFC property set configurations (.xml), line type
mappings (.lin), global UDA definitions (objects.inp), and access rights
(privileges.inp).
The default location is XSDATADIR%\environments\common\inp\. You can
use semicolon-separated lists of folder paths.

XS_INTELLIGENCE_DO_NOT_REMOVE_OBSOLETE_VIEWS
Category
Drawing Properties
Enter TRUE in the Value field to prevent drawing views from being deleted
when associated objects are removed from the model. FALSE is the default.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 221 I

 This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.
For general arrangement drawings use the advanced option
XS_INTELLIGENCE_DO_NOT_REMOVE_OBSOLETE_VIEWS_IN_GA.

See also
XS_INTELLIGENCE_DO_NOT_REMOVE_OBSOLETE_VIEWS_IN_GA (page 222)

XS_INTELLIGENCE_DO_NOT_REMOVE_OBSOLETE_VIEWS_IN_
GA
Category
Drawing Properties
Enter TRUE (default) to prevent drawing views from being deleted when
associated objects are removed from the model.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

See also
XS_INTELLIGENCE_DO_NOT_REMOVE_OBSOLETE_VIEWS (page 221)

XS_INTELLIGENCE_MAX_PART_COUNT
Category
Drawing Properties
Enter an integer to define how many parts are taken into account when
searching for associated objects. The advanced option is set to 20 by default.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_INTELLIGENCE_MAX_PLANE_COUNT
Category
Drawing Properties

Alphabetical list of advanced options 222 I

 Enter an integer to define how many planes are taken into account when
searching for associated objects. The advanced option is set to 1000 by
default.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_INTELLIGENCE_MAX_RULE_COUNT
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to decrease the number of associative rules that are used for one
measurement point. A smaller value, for example 10 (default), is usually
enough. A smaller value may also increase performance and decrease the
database size.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

WARNING Use this advanced option only in cases where there are
performance issues with associative drawings. Using this
advanced option may cause losing of associativity in some cases
when objects are deleted from the model.

XS_INTELLIGENT_CLONING_ADD_DIMENSIONS
Category
Drawing Properties
Set to TRUE to create dimensions for additional parts using automatic
dimensioning during cloning, and to FALSE to prevent this. The default is
TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED
Category
Drawing Properties

Alphabetical list of advanced options 223 I

 Clear the value or set it to FALSE to prevent Tekla Structures from
automatically moving dimensions, marks, etc. according to model changes.
TRUE is the default value.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.
To control how the drawing view placing works when the model changes, set
this advanced option to TRUE and use it together with the advanced option .
XS_DRAWING_UPDATE_VIEW_PLACING.

NOTE This setting affects all drawings. To prevent Tekla Structures from
automatically updating general arrangement drawings, use the
advanced option XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED_IN_GA.

See also
XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED_IN_GA (page 224)
XS_DRAWING_UPDATE_VIEW_PLACING (page 169)

XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED_IN_GA
Category
Drawing Properties
Clear the value or set the advanced option to FALSE to prevent Tekla
Structures from automatically moving dimensions, marks, etc. according to
model changes.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

NOTE This setting affects only general arrangement drawings. To prevent

Tekla Structures from automatically updating all types of drawings, use
the advanced option XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED.

See also
XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED (page 223)

XS_INTELLIGENT_MESSAGES_ALLOWED
Category
Drawing Properties

Alphabetical list of advanced options 224 I

 Set this advanced option to TRUE to display message when a drawing is
opened if a model object to which one or more drawing objects are linked is
deleted from the model.
If you do not want to display the message, set this advanced option to FALSE
(default).
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_INTELLIGENT_UPDATE_ADD_DIMENSIONS
Category
Drawing Properties
Set to TRUE to add dimensions for new parts, bolts and reinforcing bars when
updating drawings and to FALSE to prevent this. The default is TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_INVALID_POUR_BREAK_COLOR
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
Use this advanced option to change the color of invalid pour breaks in model
views. Enter number as the value using the class numbers in the part
properties dialog box to indicate the color. For example, if you set this
advanced option to 6, Tekla Structures will color all invalid pour breaks yellow.
The default value is 58 (red).

XS_I_PROFILE_CENTER
Category
Dimensioning: Parts
Set to NONE to prevent Tekla Structures from using the center line of I profiles
to dimension front views. By default, no value is set.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

Alphabetical list of advanced options 225 I

3.10 J

XS_JOINT_NUMBER_FORMAT
Category
Marking: General
The connection numbers are visible in drawings, when you set the Connection
mark field to Number in the Connection mark properties dialog box. Use
this advanced option to define the connection number format. For example,
you can use it to define prefix text.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
In XS_JOINT_NUMBER_FORMAT=J%3.3d:
• J is the prefix.
The rest of the string defines the number format.
• The first number defines the minimum field width.
• The second number defines the minimum quantity of numbers to display.
• % and d (integer value) indicate the format.

XS_JOINTS_USE_NOTCH1
Category
Components
Set to 1 to have connections use standard notch routines. This is the default
value.
Set to 0 to have connections use simple notch routines.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

3.11 K

Alphabetical list of advanced options 226 J

 XS_KEEP_AUTOSAVE_FILES_ON_EXIT_WHEN_NOT_SAVING
Category
Modeling Properties
Tekla Structures deletes autosave files when you close a model to save disk
space. If this advanced option is set to TRUE, Tekla Structures does not delete
these files, even if you exit Tekla Structures without saving the model. The
default value is TRUE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_KEYIN_ABSOLUTE_PREFIX
Category: Modeling Properties
Defines the character used in absolute snapping. Enter any allowed ASCII
character. The default value is $.
If you have set Tekla Structures to use absolute snapping by default using the
advanced option XS_KEYIN_DEFAULT_MODE, you do not need to use a snap
character for absolute snapping.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also
XS_KEYIN_DEFAULT_MODE (page 227)
XS_KEYIN_RELATIVE_PREFIX (page 228)
XS_KEYIN_GLOBAL_PREFIX (page 228)

XS_KEYIN_DEFAULT_MODE
Category: Modeling Properties
Defines the snapping mode Tekla Structures uses by default. Set to RELATIVE
(default), ABSOLUTE, or GLOBAL.
In the relative snapping mode, the coordinates you enter in the Enter a
Numeric Location dialog box as such without any prefix are relative to the
last position picked.
In the absolute snapping mode, the coordinates are based on the origin of the
work plane.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 227 K

 In the global snapping mode, the coordinates are based on the global origin
and the global x and y directions.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also
XS_KEYIN_RELATIVE_PREFIX (page 228)
XS_KEYIN_ABSOLUTE_PREFIX (page 227)
XS_KEYIN_GLOBAL_PREFIX (page 228)

XS_KEYIN_GLOBAL_PREFIX
Category: Modeling Properties
Defines the character used in global snapping. The default value is !.
If you have set Tekla Structures to use global snapping by default using the
advanced option XS_KEYIN_DEFAULT_MODE, you do not need to use a snap
character for global snapping.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also
XS_KEYIN_DEFAULT_MODE (page 227)
XS_KEYIN_RELATIVE_PREFIX (page 228)
XS_KEYIN_ABSOLUTE_PREFIX (page 227)

XS_KEYIN_RELATIVE_PREFIX
Category: Modeling Properties
Defines the character used in relative snapping. Enter any allowed ASCII
character. The default value is @.
If you have set Tekla Structures to use relative snapping by default using the
advanced option XS_KEYIN_DEFAULT_MODE, you do not need to use a snap
character for relative snapping.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also
XS_KEYIN_DEFAULT_MODE (page 227)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 228 K

 XS_KEYIN_ABSOLUTE_PREFIX (page 227)
XS_KEYIN_GLOBAL_PREFIX (page 228)

XS_KNOCK_OFF_DIMENSION_PRECISION
Category
Dimensioning: General
Set this advanced option to 16 or 32 to set the precision of the knock-off
dimensions to 1/16 or 1/32. Otherwise the precision is the one that is set in
the drawing level dimensioning dialog box. The default value is zero. Other
values are ignored, and knock off dimension precision is the same as for other
dimensions.

3.12 L

XS_LANGUAGE
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.

This advanced option is system specific and is read from environment files.
Generally, there is no need to modify system-specific settings. Do not modify
them if you are not an administrator.
This advanced option sets the Tekla Structures default language. The default
language is displayed first when you go to the File menu and click Settings -->
Change language .

XS_LEADER_LINE_TO_DRAGGED_DIMENSION_TEXT
Category: Dimensioning: General
When you set this advanced option to TRUE, a leader line is drawn when a
dimension text is dragged away from the dimension line. When you set it to
FALSE, the leader line is not drawn. The default value is TRUE.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 229 L

 This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_LINE_WIDTH
Category
Model View
Use to change the width of lines in model views. Enter the value in pixels.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_LICENSE_SERVER_HOST
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
With this advanced option the administrator can predefine the license server
for the user, so that the user does not need to type the license server port and
hostname in the Connect to License Server dialog box at the first start of the
Tekla Structures software.
You can add this advanced option in a customized .ini file and use it in
startup shortcuts for starting teklastructures.exe with the initialization
that you have customized, for example.
Enter the advanced option value in one of the following formats:
port@host
port@ip-address

Alphabetical list of advanced options 230 L

 XS_LOAD_MODELING_CODE
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file. For more
information about initialization files, see Typical initialization files (.ini files) and
their reading order.

Use this advanced option for defining the set of load group types. Load
combinations are generated according to rules that are specific to the load
modeling code. The default value is EuroCode.
Possible values are: EuroCode, AISC, UBC, IBC, ACI, BS, CM66 (F), and
BAEL91 (F).

Example
set XS_LOAD_MODELING_CODE=EuroCode

XS_LOG_FILE_NAME
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
This advanced option is system specific and is read from environment files.
Generally, there is no need to modify system-specific settings. Do not modify
them if you are not an administrator.
This advanced option defines the name of the Tekla Structures log file. The
default value is TeklaStructures.log.

See also

XS_LOGPATH
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
This advanced option points to the folder that contains the Tekla Structures log
file.
This advanced option is system specific and is read from environment files.
Generally, there is no need to modify system-specific settings. Do not modify
them if you are not an administrator.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 231 L

 XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
Category
Marking: bolts
Use to define the contents of the Size element in slotted hole marks. For
example, enter %BOLT_NUMBER%*D%HOLE.DIAMETER%(%HOLE.DIAMETER
+LONG_HOLE_X%x%HOLE.DIAMETER+LONG_HOLE_Y%).
The advanced options XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE and
XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE override this setting.

You can use any combination of text and the following options as the value for
this advanced option. Enclose each option in % characters. To use special
characters enter a backslash (\) followed by an ASCII number. You can use the
options in any order, and make calculations.
• BOLT_NUMBER
• DIAMETER
• LENGTH
• HOLE.DIAMETER
• LONG_HOLE_X
• LONG_HOLE_Y
• LONGHOLE_MIN (the shorter of the slotted hole dimensions)
• LONGHOLE_MAX (the longer of the slotted hole dimensions)
• BOLT_STANDARD
• BOLT_MATERIAL
• BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE
• BOLT_COUNTERSUNK
• BOLT_SHORT_NAME
• BOLT_FULL_NAME

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE (page 347)

XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE (page 327)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 232 L

 XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
Category
Marking: Bolts
Use to define the contents of the size element in longhole marks in general
arrangement drawings. If you have not set the advanced options
XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA or
XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA, then this advanced
option is used.

You can use any combination of text and the following options as the value for
this advanced option. Enclose each option in % characters. To use special
characters enter a backslash (\) followed by an ASCII number. You can use the
options in any order, and make calculations.
• BOLT_NUMBER
• DIAMETER
• LENGTH
• HOLE.DIAMETER
• LONG_HOLE_X
• LONG_HOLE_Y
• LONGHOLE_MIN (the shorter of the slotted hole dimensions)
• LONGHOLE_MAX (the longer of the slotted hole dimensions)
• BOLT_STANDARD
• BOLT_MATERIAL
• BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE
• BOLT_COUNTERSUNK
• BOLT_SHORT_NAME
• BOLT_FULL_NAME

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (page 328)

XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (page 348)

3.13 M

Alphabetical list of advanced options 233 M

 XS_MACRO_DIRECTORY
Category: File Locations
Specifies a global and a local folder for recorded macro files. Macro files are
usually language and environment dependent and will not run in any other
environment or language. This advanced option is system-specific.
Use a semicolon (;) as a separator. Do not define more than two macro folders.
First define the global folder, and then the local folder: ..\ProgramData
\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\common\macros;..
\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments
\<your_environment>\macros.
This advanced option is by default set to ..\ProgramData\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\common\macros.

NOTE Do not change the global folder. If necessary, you may change the
local folder.

When you click the Access advanced features button in Applications &
components , you can select whether to create a global or local macro by
selecting New macro --> Local or > Global. The option Local is not displayed,
if you have not specified the folder.

NOTE The macro folder must contain subfolders modeling and drawings.

XS_MACRO_ENABLE_TIMESTAMP
Category
Category: Modeling Properties
Set this advanced option to TRUE to examine the time spent on different tasks
while recording macros. This advanced option is system-specific.
The default value is FALSE. If you change the value, you need to reopen the
model to activate the new setting.
The timestamps are in the .cs file of the macro in question, which is located
in ../environments/common/macros folder. The macro is saved in the
drawings or modeling folders, depending on in which mode the macro was
recorded.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 234 M

 XS_MACRO_LOG
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
By default Tekla Structures macro output is displayed in the terminal window.
Set this advanced option to a file name to save this output to a file.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_MACRO_REFERENCES
Category
Modeling Properties
This advanced option defines a path to an additional library that is used when
a macro is compiled. The default path
is ;System.Windows.Forms;Tekla.Technology.Scripting;Tekla.Stru
ctures;Tekla.Structures.Model;Tekla.Structures.Drawing;MacroS
elector;System.Drawing;System.Data;System.Xml;Tekla.DataShari
ng.CacheServiceClient;Tekla.DataSharing.SharedPublic.
This advanced option is system-specific.

XS_MAGNETIC_PLANE_OFFSET
Category
Components
Use to adjust the magnetic distance of magnetic planes. By default the
distance is 0.2 mm.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 235 M

 Setting this advanced option does not affect magnetic construction lines.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_MARK_ALL_BOLT_GROUPS_SEPARATELY
Category
Marking: Bolts

Set this advanced option to TRUE to prevent Tekla Structures from combining
bolt group marks. By default Tekla Structures combines bolt group marks
(FALSE).
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
In this example, the left group of bolts was created as a bolt group, and the
right group of bolts was created as separate bolts.
In the image below, this advanced option is set to TRUE.

In the image below, FALSE is used.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 236 M

 XS_MARK_ELEMENT_SPACE_FACTOR
Category
Marking: General
By default Tekla Structures leaves a space 0.3*text height between mark
elements. Use this advanced option to change the default value.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
In the example below, the default value 0.3 was changed to 1.

XS_MARK_FONT
Category
Drawing Properties

You can set the mark text font (for part marks etc.) by giving the name of the
font to this advanced option. The default value is Arial. If no font is given, Tekla
Structures uses the default font defined for XS_DEFAULT_FONT.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 237 M

 See also
XS_DEFAULT_FONT (page 99)

XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_ARROW_HEIGHT
Category
Marking: General
Height of arrow head in mark leader line. 1 is the default value. For example,
the standard AutoCAD leader lide arrow height is 0.67.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_ARROW_LENGTH
Category
Marking: general
Length of arrow head in mark leader line. The default is 2.5.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_EXTENSION_LENGTH
Category
Marking: General
Use to define the length of the leader line extension. The extension is placed
before the start of a text string. Give the length in millimeters. The default
value is 0.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

See also

Alphabetical list of advanced options 238 M

 XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_FOR_NO_FRAME
Category
Marking: General
Use to define the leader line position of a leader line pointing to a mark:
• without a mark frame (mark frame deleted from the General page of the
mark properties dialog box)
• without a mark frame but with a mark element frame (mark frame deleted
from the General page, and element frame selected on the Content page
of the mark properties dialog box).
The default value is 0.

TIP You may want to keep the default value 0 for the advanced option
XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_EXTENSION_LENGTH, when using
XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_FOR_NO_FRAME.

This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

Example

Position Appearance Set the advanced

option to
Nearest corner. 0

In the middle of the text area. 1

Alphabetical list of advanced options 239 M

 Position Appearance Set the advanced
option to
1/3 from the top of the text 2
area.

In the middle of the first row 3

of text.

The leader line connects to 4

the frame around the mark
element (not to the frame
around the whole mark). The
mark frame has been deleted
in the mark properties.

See also
XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_FOR_RECTANGULAR_FRAME
(page 240)
Additional ways for modifying part mark leader lines
XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_EXTENSION_LENGTH (page 238)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 240 M

 XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_FOR_
RECTANGULAR_FRAME
Category
Marking: General
Use to define the leader line position for a leader line with a rectangular
frame. The default value is 0.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example

Position Appearance Set the advanced

option to
Nearest corner. 0

In the middle of the 1

text area.

1/3 from the top of 2

the text area.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 241 M

 Position Appearance Set the advanced
option to
In the middle of the 3
firs row of text.

See also
XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_FOR_NO_FRAME (page 239)

XS_MARK_LINE_SPACE_FACTOR
Category
Marking: General
By default Tekla Structures leaves a space of 0.3*text height between the lines
in multi-line marks, for example, part, bolt, and connection marks. Use this
advanced option to change the default value.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.
In the example below, the value was changed from 0.3 to 1.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 242 M

 XS_MARK_TEXT_FRAME_BOX_HEIGHT_FACTOR
Category
Marking: General
By default Tekla Structures leaves a space of 0.5*text height between the text
and the frame around the text. Use this advanced option to change the default
value.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.
In the example below, the value was changed from 0.5 to 2.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 243 M

 XS_MATERIAL_SYMBOL_REPRESENTATION_FILE
Category
Drawing properties
Enter the folder path and filename of the file containing the user-defined
material symbols, for example material_symbol_table.txt.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_MAX_ANGLE_BETWEEN_SKEWED_END_PLATE_AND_BEAM_
END
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to produce section views and dimensions of slightly skewed end plates. An
end plate can be sloping or skewed to such a small degree that it is
unnecessary to bevel cut the end of the main part. If the end plate is not
dimensioned in the section view, you need to set a limit for the end plate
angle.
Tekla Structures dimensions any end plate skewed less than this value in
section views. Larger angle dimensions do not appear in the section view. Set
the angle between the skewed end plate and beam in degrees. The default
angle is 0.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

XS_MAX_ANGLE_TOLERANCE_BETWEEN_COMPLEX_MAIN_
PARTS
Category
Dimensioning: Parts

Alphabetical list of advanced options 244 M

 Use to define the maximum angle range (0...1) within which Tekla Structures
will dimension non-parallel parts as one. The default value is 0.01.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

XS_MAX_AUTOMATIC_RADIUS_DIMENSION
Category
Dimensioning: Parts
Defines the maximum radius when you use automatic radius in single part
drawings. The default value is 5000. Tekla Structures will display radii smaller
than the value you enter in drawings.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_MAX_DECIMALS_IN_PROFILE_NAME
Category
Profiles
Use this advanced option to control the number of decimals in profile names
in NC file headers. The default value is 1.

NOTE This advanced option only affect plates created directly in the model.
The advanced option XS_PLATE_ROUNDING_DECIMALS (page 273)
affects plates created by components.

This advanced option works on plates only if you set the advanced option XS_
USE_NEW_PLATE_DESIGNATION (page 385) to TRUE on the Plate Work page in
the Advanced Options dialog box.

XS_MAX_DEVIATION_FOR_CURVED_PART_EDGES
Category
Concrete Detailing

When you camber a part, Tekla Structures calculates all the part vertices to be
on a circle arc, but all span edges between two vertices are approximations of

Alphabetical list of advanced options 245 M

 the arc. Use this advanced option to limit the maximum distance by which the
edge can deviate from the arc.
Define the value in millimeters. The default is 2.0. The minimum value is 0.1.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_WARP_MAX_ANGLE_BETWEEN_CS (page 410)

XS_MAX_FRACTIONS_IN_MODEL_DIMENSION
Category
Imperial Units

Defines the measuring accuracy in models in the US Imperial environment. For

example, this accuracy affects the imperial measurements shown with the
Measure tool. You can enter any number, but you should use numbers such
as 8, 16, 32, 64, 128 and 256. The default value is 16.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

Example
To use the accuracy of 1/32, set this advanced option to 32.

XS_MAXIMUM_NUMBER_OF_PLANES_TO_NAME
Category
Modeling Properties
Use to define how many planes Tekla Structures names when the planes are
used, for example, in defining distance variables. The default value is 400.
When the maximum number of planes is reached, Tekla Structures stops
naming the planes and uses the name Undefined plane for the rest of the
planes.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 246 M

 XS_MAX_MERGE_DISTANCE_IN_HORIZONTAL
Category
Marking: Parts
Defines the maximum horizontal distance within which identical
reinforcement get merged marks. This advanced option only affects merging
of reinforcing bar marks pointing to individual reinforcing bars, not marks
pointing to a group of reinforcing bars, or marks within a group of reinforcing
bars. The default value is 600 mm.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_MAX_MERGE_DISTANCE_IN_VERTICAL (page 247)

XS_MAX_MERGE_DISTANCE_IN_VERTICAL
Category
Marking: Parts
Defines the maximum vertical distance within which identical reinforcement
get merged marks. This advanced option only affects merging of reinforcing
bar marks pointing to individual reinforcing bars, not marks pointing to a
group of reinforcing bars, or marks within a group of reinforcing bars.The
default value is 600 mm.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_MAX_MERGE_DISTANCE_IN_HORIZONTAL (page 246)

XS_MAX_SPACE_BETWEEN_COMPLEX_ASSEMBLY_PARALLEL_
PARTS
Category
Dimensioning: Parts
Use to define the maximum distance allowed between parallel parts for Tekla
Structures to dimension them as one. The default value is 1000.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is

Alphabetical list of advanced options 247 M

 in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

XS_MDIBASICVIEWPARENT
Category
Model View
Set this advanced option to TRUE (default) to allow connection or default view
windows to be moved within the Tekla Structures window.
Set this advanced option to FALSE to allow connection or default view
windows to be moved anywhere on the Windows desktop.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also
XS_MDIVIEWPARENT (page 248)

XS_MDIVIEWPARENT
Category
Model View
Set this advanced option to TRUE to allow view windows to be moved only
within the Tekla Structures window.
Set this advanced option to FALSE to allow view windows to be moved
anywhere on the Windows desktop. This gives you more workspace on the
screen, because view windows move to the front when you click on them and
open dialog boxes remain behind the views. It also allows you to enlarge Tekla
Structures windows to fill the entire desktop.
The default value is TRUE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

NOTE This advanced option also affects drawing windows. Use the advanced
options XS_MDIZOOMPARENT and XS_MDIBASICVIEWPARENT to
control connection and default views and zoom views .

See also
XS_MDIZOOMPARENT (page 249)
XS_MDIBASICVIEWPARENT (page 248)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 248 M

 XS_MDIZOOMPARENT
Category
Model View
Set this advanced option to TRUE to allow zoom windows to be moved only
within the Tekla Structures window.
Set this advanced option to FALSE (default) to allow zoom windows of views to
be moved anywhere on the Windows desktop.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_MESSAGES
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
Use to define the location of the message files. All message files have the file
name extension ail.
This advanced option is system-specific and it can be defined in only in the file
lang_<language>.ini located in the folder ..\Tekla Structures
\<version>\nt\bin.

See also

XS_MIN_DISTANCE_FOR_CONNECTING_SIDE_MARK
Category
Marking: General
Use this advanced option to set the minimum distance of the connecting part
from the main part so that when the distance is larger than the value you
enter, Tekla Structures draws a connecting side mark to show that there is a
part farther away from the main part that is connected to the part. When the
distance is smaller than the value you enter, no mark is drawn. The default
value is 300 mm.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 249 M

 This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_MIN_MERGE_PART_COUNT
Category
Marking: Parts
Use to define the minimum number of identical parts whose marks to merge.
The default value is 2.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

Alphabetical list of advanced options 250 M

 XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_CHARACTERS
Category: Numbering
Use to set the minimum number of characters in assembly multinumbers.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
If you set this advanced option to 3, the multinumber format is 101AAA.

See also
XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR (page 384)
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBERS (page 402)
XS_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING (page 45)
XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_PART_MULTI_CHARACTERS (page 251)

XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_PART_MULTI_CHARACTERS
Category: Numbering
Use to define the minimum number of characters in part multinumbers.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
If you set this advanced option to 3, the multinumber format is 101aaa.

See also
XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR (page 384)
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_MULTI_NUMBERS (page 403)
XS_PART_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING (page 269)
XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_CHARACTERS (page 250)

XS_MIN_WELD_LINE_LENGTH
Category: Welds
Defines the minimum length of the weld mark reference line. If symbols and
other data exceed the minimum length of weld mark reference line, weld mark

Alphabetical list of advanced options 251 M

 reference line extends to contain all symbols and data. Enter the value in
millimeters.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_MIS_FILE_DIRECTORY
Category: CNC
Points to the folder where NC and MIS files are created. The default is the
current model folder.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

The following table shows where the NC files are created with different values
entered in the File location box in the NC File Settings dialog box, and
XS_MIS_FILE_DIRECTORY is set to C:\NC:

Path in File location NC files are created in

empty C:\NC\ModelName
.\ C:\NC\ModelName
.\MyFiles C:\NC\ModelName\MyFiles

XS_MIS_SEQUENCE
Category
Export
Use to enable sequences in EJE and KISS file type MIS exports.
Define which part property is used as the sequence information. The options
are:
• CLASS
• PHASE_NUMBER (default)
• PHASE_NAME
• UDA:USER_PHASE

NOTE The maximum lengths of the sequence information fields are 10 and 4
characters in KISS and EJE file types, respectively. Do not use long

Alphabetical list of advanced options 252 M

 names for phase names or user phases, if you are using this
information as MIS Sequence.

This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_MODEL_BACKUP_DIRECTORY
Category: File Locations
Enter the path to the folder that contains the backup copies of Tekla Structures
model files. The default value is ..\TeklaStructuresModels\backup\.
The backup directory cannot be located under the model folder, because it
would cause an infinite loop. If you define the backup directory to be in the
model folder, Tekla Structures will ignore the path and use the default
directory instead.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_MODEL_IMPORT_LOCK_OBJECTS
Category: Import
Set this advanced option to TRUE to lock all the imported objects. When you
do this, the user-defined attribute Locked is automatically set to Yes in the
user-defined attributes dialog box of the imported objects. TRUE is the default
value.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR
Category: Numbering
Use to define whether part and assembly number prefixes affect the
numbering of parts and assemblies in multidrawings. The options are NONE,
ASSEMBLIES, PARTS and ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS. The value field is empty by
default.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 253 M

 See also
XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR (page 384)
XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR (page 384)

XS_MODEL_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY
Category: File Locations
Enter the path to the folder where Tekla Structures saves model templates.
Enter only one folder path. Only the templates saved in this folder are listed in
the Model template list in the New dialog box.
For example, you can set this advanced option to point to the same location as
XS_FIRM (page 200).
By default, the model template folder is saved in your environment folder, for
example, ..\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\<version>
\environments\<environment>\model_templates .
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_MULTIDRAWING_KEEP_OBSOLETE_DRAWINGS
Category
Drawing Properties
Use this advanced option for controlling the views and multinumbers of
deleted assemblies in multidrawings. Set this advanced option to TRUE to
preserve the views of deleted parts and assemblies and to reserve the
multinumbers of the deleted parts and assemblies. Set it to FALSE to reuse
the multinumbers of the deleted assemblies and to delete the views. The
default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_MULTIDRAWING_REMOVE_VIEW_LABEL_GAP
Category
Drawing Properties

Alphabetical list of advanced options 254 M

 Set this advanced option to TRUE to remove unnecessary space between the
drawing view label and the drawing view in multidrawings. If you do not want
to do this, use FALSE (default).
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_MULTI_DRAWING_VIEW_PLACING_TRIAL_NUMBER
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
Use to define the number of attempts to place the drawing views into a
multidrawing. Enter an integer between 1 and 500. The advanced option is set
to 500 by default.

XS_MULTI_DRAWING_VIEW_TITLE
Category
Drawing properties
Use to define a title for a multidrawing view in a multidrawing. Arbitrary strings
and switches (BASE_NAME and NAME) can be used for defining the title.
By default the title is defined as follows:
Drawing %DRAWING_BASE_NAME%

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_MULTI_NUMBERING_INCLUDE_ASSEMBLY_PARTS
Category: Numbering
Set this advanced option to TRUE to include single parts in multinumbering. If
this advanced option is set to FALSE, single parts get multinumbers only if
they are included in an assembly drawing.
The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 255 M

 See also
XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR (page 384)

XS_MULTIPLIER_SEPARATOR_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK
Category
Marking: Parts
Use to define the separator in merged part marks. The default value is x.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

3.14 N

XS_NEIGHBOUR_PART_SKEW_LIMIT
Category
Drawing Properties
Tekla Structures considers neighboring parts as skewed if the product of the
vector multiplication (part axis) (any of the coordinate axis) is less than 1-
XS_NEIGHBOUR_PART_SKEW_LIMIT. Enter the limit as a floating value, for
example 0.1 (default).
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_NO_AUTO_DISPLAY_VIEWS
Category
Model View
Set this advance option to TRUE to prevent Tekla Structures from displaying
views automatically when you start the program. Set it to FALSE (default) to
display the views automatically.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 256 N

 XS_NO_BOLT_ANGLE_DIMENSIONS
Category
Dimensioning: Bolts
To create angle dimensions for bolts, set this advanced option to FALSE. To
not create angle dimensions for bolts, select TRUE (default).
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_NO_CHAMFERS_IN_EXACT_MODE
Category
Model view
Set this advanced option to TRUE to prevent Tekla Structures from creating
chamfers in exact mode. To create the chamfers in exact mode, set it to FALSE.
By default chamfers are created. This advanced option only affects wire frame
views.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also

XS_NO_END_VIEWS_TO_INCLUDED_SINGLE_DRAWINGS
Category
Single Part View in Assembly Drawing
Set this advanced option to TRUE (default) to prevent Tekla Structures from
creating end views when you create an assembly drawing and choose to
include single-part drawings. If you do not want to do this, set it to FALSE.
If you do not enter a value, Tekla Structures creates end views based on the
properties of the single-part drawings.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 257 N

 XS_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS
Category
Dimensioning: Parts
Set this advanced option to TRUE to force shape dimensions to be the same as
the dimension type you select.
By default, automatic shape dimensions are always relative regardless of the
selected dimension type.
This advanced option does not affect single-part drawings. To affect single part
drawings, use the advanced option
XS_SINGLE_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_SINGLE_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS (page 339)

XS_NO_UNFOLDING_LINES_TO_DRAWINGS
Category
Dimensioning: Unfolding
Use to define whether unfolding lines are shown in drawings. When you set
the advanced option to TRUE, the unfolding lines are not shown. The default is
FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_NO_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS_FOR
Category
Single Part View in Assembly Drawing
Set as follows to prevent Tekla Structures producing single part drawings for
assemblies containing one part:
XS_NO_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS_FOR=LOOSE_PARTS
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 258 N

 XS_NORTH_MARK_SCALE
Category
Marking: Parts
Use this advanced option to define the scale of the north mark symbol. By
default, North marks have a scale of 1:1. You can also create a larger symbol
for north marks in the Symbol editor.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL

Category: Marking: Parts

By default the north mark symbol is number 32 in the symbol file NORTH.sym.
Use this advanced option to change the symbol.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
Show orientation marks (north marks)
Change the symbol file in use

XS_NSFS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK
Category
Marking: Parts
Use to define the postfix in merged part marks. This postfix is visible for
identical parts on both side of a main part. The default value is BS.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 259 N

 See also

XS_NSFS_TEXT_POSITION_IN_PART_MARK
Category
Marking: parts
Defines which element the NS, FS or BS text follows in merged part marks.
The default is 23, which means that the text is located after part position. If the
type that is defined by the advanced option cannot be found in the mark at all,
the text is located at end of the mark. To force the text to always appear at the
end of the mark, use -1.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

The following list contains the corresponding integer values and elements in
the mark:
TEXT = 1
LINE FEED = 2
SYMBOL = 3
FRAME START = 4
FRAME END = 5
MATERIAL = 10
USER DEFINED ATTRIBUTE = 16
ASSEMBLY_POSITION = 22
PART_POSITION = 23
PROFILE = 24
NAME = 25
LENGTH = 26
CAMBER = 27
SIZE = 28
FITTINGS (NS/FS) = 29
CLASS = 38
BACK_SPACE = 46
GAGE OF OUTSTANDING LEG = 48
CENTER TO CENTER DISTANCE = 49

Alphabetical list of advanced options 260 N

 FACE_DIRECTION = 57
END OF Mark = -1

Example
XS_NSFS_TEXT_POSITION_IN_PART_MARK=22
The value 22 means after assembly position.

NOTE NS, FS and BS text itself comes from two separate places depending
on if the marks are merged or not. For ordinary marks, the text comes
from a file called by_number.ail (NS: by_number_msg_no_675, FS:
by_number_msg_no_676). For merged marks, the text comes from the
following advanced options:
• BS: XS_GET_NSFS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK
• NS: XS_GET_NS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK
• FS: XS_GET_FS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK

XS_NS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK
Category
Marking: Parts
Use to define the near side postfix in merged part marks. This postfix is visible
for identical parts on near side. The default value is NS.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_NUMBERING_RESULTS_DIALOG_DISPLAY_TIME
Category
Numbering
Use to set the time frame within which Tekla Structures makes the second
save when numbering when you have selected the Synchronize with master
model (save-numbering-save) option in the Numbering setup dialog box.
Enter the desired time in seconds. The advanced option is set to 1500 by
default.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 261 N

 See also

3.15 O

XS_OBJECT_SELECTION_CONFIRMATION
Category
Modeling Properties
Enter the time in milliseconds after which Tekla Structures prompts you to
cancel object selection. You can cancel the object selection process if the
selection takes longer than the defined time.
The default value is 5000.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also

XS_OBJECTLOCK_DEFAULT
Category
Modeling Properties
Set the default lock status for new assemblies or cast units when they are
created. Additionally, when you start to share the model in Tekla Model
Sharing, the default lock status is set for all assemblies and cast units that do
not yet have any lock status. The locked status is shown in the Locked value in
the Object locks dialog box. The value options are ORGANIZATION or NO.
This advanced option is system specific.

XS_OMIT_MARKS_OF_HIDDEN_PARTS_IN_GA_DRAWINGS
Category
Marking: Parts
Set this advanced option to TRUE to hide part marks of parts hidden by other
parts from views in general arrangement drawings. The default value is FALSE.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 262 O

 If you have stiffeners on either side of a beam, one will be hidden by the beam
in front of it. Set this advanced option to TRUE to prevent Tekla Structures from
displaying the part mark of the hidden part.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_OMIT_MARKS_OF_PARTS_OUT_OF_VIEW_PLANE_LIMIT_
ANGLE
Category
Marking: General

Use to hide the part marks for parts outside the current view plane by defining
the limit for inclusion as an angle. The default value is 20.0.
You also need to set Parts out of view plane option in the view level Part
mark properties dialog box to Not visible to hide parts from the views that
are outside the angle you specify here.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_OMITTED_BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE
Category
Marking: Bolts
Use this advanced option to filter out the given type of bolt marks when the
Bolt size limit field is used in drawing properties. The options are:
• SITE (default)
• SHOP
• SITE_AND_SHOP.
The default value SITE filters out only site bolt marks that are outside the bolt
size limit, whereas workshop bolt marks of all sizes are shown in drawings.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_OMITTED_BOLT_TYPE (page 264)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 263 O

 XS_OMITTED_BOLT_TYPE
Category: Marking: Bolts
Use this advanced option to define which bolt types to omit from drawings
when the Bolt size limit option is used in drawing properties. Enter the name
of the bolt standard, for example, 7990. You can also use wildcards, such as *
or ?. By default, no value is given, which means that no bolt types are omitted.
Example: To filter away all the marks of A325N, A325X and A325SC types of
bolts, set this advanced option to A325*.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_OMITTED_BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE (page 263)
XS_OMITTED_DIAMETER_TYPE (page 264)
XS_GA_OMITTED_DIAMETER_TYPE (page 206)

XS_OMITTED_DIAMETER_TYPE
Category
Marking: Bolts
Use to define which diameter marks to omit in drawings. The options are HOLE
or BOLT.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_OMITTED_BOLT_TYPE (page 264)

XS_OMITTED_PART_NAME_IN_AUTOCONNECTION
Category
Components
Use to filter out specific part types when you use
AutoConnection.AutoConnection cannot handle brace connections when large
quantities of parts are selected.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 264 O

 Example
If you want to use this advanced option to filter out brace parts, set it to
brace. Tekla Structures does not select any parts with names containing the
string “brace”.

TIP You can also do this by setting the Selection Filter to select all parts
except for those named “brace*”.

XS_OMITTED_WELD_TYPE
Category
Welds
Use to define which weld types to omit in drawings. Enter the number of the
weld type you want to omit. The default value is 10 (fillet weld). For a list of
weld types and the corresponding numbers, click the link in the See also list.
In addition to this advanced option there are two other settings that Tekla
Structures uses to determine the welds that are shown in the drawing:
XS_WELD_FILTER_TYPE tells if Tekla Structures should filter welds that are
exactly (EXACT) the size or of the same size or smaller (MIN) than the value
given in the Weld size limit box in the Weld Properties dialog box. Tekla
Structures always shows welds that have reference text.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
If you set XS_OMITTED_WELD_TYPE to 10, XS_WELD_FILTER_TYPE to EXACT,
and Weld size limit to 5, Tekla Structures shows all other welds except those
that are 5 mm, and those of type fillet weld (10). In this case, if you do not set
XS_WELD_FILTER_TYPE, Tekla Structures shows all welds that are bigger than
5 mm except fillet welds.

See also

XS_WELD_FILTER_TYPE (page 411)

XS_OPEN_DRAWINGS_MAXIMIZED
Category
Drawing View

Alphabetical list of advanced options 265 O

 Set to TRUE to maximize drawings when you open them. The default is FALSE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_DIRECTION
Category
Marking: parts
Use to define the direction of orientation marks. The options are NORTH-EAST,
NORTH-WEST, SOUTH-EAST and SOUTH-WEST. NORTH-EAST is the default
value.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL (page 259)

XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_BEAMS
Category
Marking: parts
Use to indicate the position of orientation marks for beams. Enter a value
indicating the distance from the end of the part to the orientation mark. The
default value is 300.0 mm. You can enter any value in the range 1.0 to 3000.0.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_BEAMS_IN_GA
Category
Marking: Parts

Alphabetical list of advanced options 266 O

 Indicates the position of beam orientation marks in GA drawings. Enter a value
indicating the distance from the end of the part to the orientation mark. The
default value is 300.0 mm.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_BEAMS (page 266)

XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_COLUMNS
Category
Marking: parts
Use to define the placing of orientation marks for columns. The value assigned
to this advanced option is the distance from the end of the part to the
orientation mark. The default value for columns is 300.0 mm. Possible values
range from 1.0 to 3000.0.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

See also

XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_COLUMNS_IN_GA
Category
Marking: Parts
Defines the position of column orientation marks in GA drawings. The value
assigned to this advanced option is the distance from the end of the part to
the orientation mark. The default value is 300.0 mm.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

See also
XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_COLUMNS (page 267)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 267 O

3.16 P

XS_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATOR
Category
Profiles
Use this advanced option to define an additional character to separate
dimensions in the name of parametric profiles. Tekla Structures always
recognizes the standard separator characters X, *, -, and /. The default value is
an asterisk (*).
For example, when you inquire a part with a sketched profile, the character
specified by this advanced option is used as the separator.

Example
XS_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATOR=E
Acceptable profile names with this setting are:
1. PL500*800
2. PL500X800
3. PL500E800
Any combination of these is also accepted:
ProfileName500*500-500*500E500 (the profile ProfileName should be
defined).

Limitations
• Only one character is accepted as a value for this advanced option.
• You cannot use slash (/) in the US imperial environment.

See also
XS_USER_DEFINED_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATORS (page 400)

XS_PART_DIMENSION_PLANES_TABLE
Category
Dimensioning: Parts
Use to indicate the path to the user-defined part dimension planes table. This
table defines the planes in which dimensions are created. For example, you

Alphabetical list of advanced options 268 P

 might want Tekla Structures to dimension round bars to the middle of the
profile rather than the reference line.
You can also use a file name as a value. If the value is a file name, Tekla
Structures searches for the file in the model, project, firm and profile folders
(in this order).
This is a system-specific advanced option.

Example
XS_PART_DIMENSION_PLANES_TABLE=%XS_PROFDB%
\dim_planes_table.txt

See also

XS_PART_MERGE_MAX_DISTANCE
Category
Marking: Parts
Use to define the maximum distance within which identical parts get merged
marks. Units are in millimeters. The default value is 1200.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

See also

XS_PART_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING
Category: Numbering
Use to define multinumbers for single parts. Use the following options to
define the contents of part marks. Use as many switches as you need, and
enclose each one in percent symbols (%).
The available options are:

Option Description
%PART_MULTI_DRAW Multidrawing name.
ING_NUMBER%
%PART_MULTI_DRAW Position of the single-part drawing
ING_POS% inside the multidrawing.
%PART_PREFIX% Part prefix in the model.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 269 P

 Option Description
%PART_POS% Part position number in the model.
Template fields Enter TPL: followed by the name of
any relevant template field. Enclose
each name in percent symbols (%). For
example, %TPL:PROJECT.NUMBER%
User-defined Enter UDA: followed by the name of
attributes that are any relevant user-defined attribute,
defined in the exactly as it appears in the
objects.inp file objects.inp file. For example,
%UDA:MY_INFO_1%

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
To put the part multinumbers in the format part prefix + position on
multidrawing + multidrawing name, set the advanced option as follows:
%PART_PREFIX%%PART_MULTI_DRAWING_POS%
%PART_MULTI_DRAWING_NUMBER%

See also
XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR (page 384)
XS_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING (page 45)
XS_CAST_UNIT_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING (page 66)

XS_PART_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING
Category: Numbering
Use to have Tekla Structures use only letters in part numbers.
Enter any combination of the following options:

Option Description
%PART_PREFIX% Part prefix, defined in the part
properties dialog box.
%PART_POS% Part position number, defined by the
start number (from part properties
dialog box) and the final position in
that numbering series.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 270 P

 Option Description
%PART_POS_WITH_LETTERS% Same as above, but with letters.
Uses letters A – Z by default, but you
can also define valid letters with the
advanced option
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_POSIT
ION_NUMBERS.

The position number/ letter switch can also include a suffix defining the
minimum number of digits (or letters), for example: %PART_POS.3%. This
example results in a first part number of 001, second 002 etc.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_POSITION_NUMBERS (page 404)

XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_NEIGHBOUR
Category
Dimensioning: Parts
Set this advanced option to TRUE to dimension the position of parts to the
edge that is nearest to the neighbor part. The default is FALSE.
In the image below, the neighbor parts in the model are blue, and the plate
creation points are shown.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 271 P

 For more information about using advanced options when adding dimensions
to plates, see Add dimensions to plates.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE
Category
Dimensioning: Parts
Set this advanced option to TRUE (default) to dimension the position of beams
to the leading edge. If you do not want to do this, set it to FALSE. For this
advanced option to take effect, disable the advanced option
XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING.
For column assemblies, you must also set the advanced option
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE_IN_COLUMNS_ALSO to TRUE.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 272 P

 For more information about using advanced options when adding dimensions
to plates, see Add dimensions to plates.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE_IN_COLUMNS_ALSO (page 273)
XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING (page 393)

XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE_IN_COLUMNS_ALSO
Category
Dimensioning: Parts
To dimension part position to the leading edge for column assemblies, set this
advanced option to TRUE. If you do not want to do this, set it to FALSE. The
default value is TRUE.
You must also set the advanced option XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE
(page 272) to TRUE.
For more information about using advanced options when adding dimensions
to plates, see Add dimensions to plates.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_PIXEL_TOLERANCE
Category
Model View
Use to define the snap zone of objects. Each object has a snap zone, which
defines how close you need to pick to hit a position. When you pick within the
snap zone of an object, Tekla Structures automatically snaps to the closest
pickable point on that object. Enter the value in pixels. The default value is 10.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 273 P

 XS_PLATE_ROUNDING_DECIMALS
Category
Plate Work
Use to define the maximum number of decimals in plate profile name created
by components. The default is 1.
Note that unnecessary zeroes are always left off, for example 10.501:
• with 2 decimals is 10.5
• with 3 decimals is 10.501
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

The advanced option XS_MAX_DECIMALS_IN_PROFILE_NAME controls

decimals of plates that are modeled directly in the model.

See also
XS_MAX_DECIMALS_IN_PROFILE_NAME (page 245)

XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_X
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
Offsets the print origin in the x direction. Use if a drawing does not fit to the
paper or is printed to a wrong location. Enter the value in millimeters as an
integer. This advanced option affects all printers. By default, this advanced
option is not set to any value.

NOTE If you set these advanced options in your initialization files, you will
override the Printer Catalog dialog box.

See also
XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_Y (page 274)

XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_Y
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
Offsets the print origin in the y direction. Use if a drawing does not fit to the
paper or is printed to a wrong location. Enter the value in millimeters as an

Alphabetical list of advanced options 274 P

 integer. This advanced option affects all printers. By default, this advanced
option is not set to any value.

NOTE If you set these advanced options in your initialization files, you will
override the Printer Catalog dialog box.

See also
XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_X (page 274)

XS_PLOT_VIEW_FRAMES
Category
Printing
To show drawing view frames in printed and exported drawings, set
XS_PLOT_VIEW_FRAMES to TRUE. FALSE is the default value.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

PML_ASSEMBLY_MARKS_IN_USE
Category
Export
Set this advanced option to TRUE to have Tekla Structures use assembly marks
in PML exports. By default this advanced option is set to FALSE, which means
that Tekla Structures uses part marks.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

PML_CARDINAL_POINT_NOT_IN_USE
Category
Export
Set this advanced option to TRUE to prevent Tekla Structures from using
cardinal points in PML exports. This means that all parts will be defined by
their center lines, and their position may differ from that in the Tekla
Structures model. By default this advanced option is set to FALSE, which
means that cardinal points are used in PML export. The default value is FALSE.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 275 P

 XS_PML_EXPORT_INCLUDE_GLOBAL_ID
Category
Export
Set this advanced option to TRUE to revert to the FrameWorksPlus ID number
in PML exports. If you do not want to export the ID number, set it to FALSE.
The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_SDNF_IMPORT_STORE_MEMBER_NUMBER (page 315)

XS_PML_EXPORT_USE_ADDITIONAL_CUT_DIST
Category
Export
Some earlier versions of Tekla Structures added 1 mm in length to fitted part
ends in PML exports. Set this advanced option to TRUE to force recent versions
to add the length. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_POLYBEAM_CHORD_TOLERANCE
Category
Speed and Accuracy

Use this advanced option to define the chord tolerance for curved polybeam
sections. Enter the value in millimeters. The default is 1.0.
The advanced option XS_POLYBEAM_MAX_ANGLE_BETWEEN_CS works as
limiting factor to XS_POLYBEAM_CHORD_TOLERANCE
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_POLYBEAM_MAX_ANGLE_BETWEEN_CS (page 277)
XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_FOR_TUBE_SEGMENTS (page 76)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 276 P

 XS_POLYBEAM_MAX_ANGLE_BETWEEN_CS
Category
Speed and Accuracy

Use this advanced option to define the maximum angle between adjacent
cross sections in curved polybeam sections. Enter the value in degrees. The
default is 30.0.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_POLYBEAM_CURVATURE_TOLERANCE
Category
Modeling Properties
Use to define the tolerance used in detecting the curvature between three
points in a polybeam. The default is 2.0e-6.
This advanced option defines the difference in dot products between two unit
vectors formed by two consecutive polybeam arc chamfer handles. If the dot
product differs less than this value, the curve is considered to be a straight
line, and the arc chamfer is omitted.
Generally, you need to change the default value only if you are working with
long, thin or very complex polybeams. Change the default value in the
following situations:
• If the polybeam is only very slightly curved and it looks like a straight
polybeam in the model, you need to give a smaller value, such as 2.0e-10.
A larger value makes polybeams with only a slight curvature straight.
• If the value is unnecessarily small (smaller than default value for simple
polybeams), there might be performance issues.
• If the tolerance is set to a value that is too small (< e-11), the polybeam
may break.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 277 P

 XS_POLYGON_CUT_EXTRA_THICKNESS
Category
Modeling properties
Use this advanced option to define the cut depth of a polygon cut, for
example, to cut thick surface treatment. The default value for the cut thickness
is 5.0 mm.

XS_POLYGON_PERPENDICULAR_EDGE_PREFERENCE_FACTOR
Category
Plate Work
This advanced option is used to artificially manipulate which side of a plate is
considered as the 'longest'.
The longest side of polygon plates always faces downwards in drawings, which
can affect plates with perpendicular edges.
This information can then be used, for example, in changing the rotation of a
plate in drawings, or when choosing which side of a plate is to be considered
the 'Length' and 'Width'.
This advanced option is used for plates with perpendicular sides in drawings.
This advanced option rotates plates if there is some edge which is
perpendicular to the current one and it is not adjacent edge.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 278 P

 The default value is 1.5.
In the example above, when you set
XS_POLYGON_PERPENDICULAR_EDGE_PREFERENCE_FACTOR to 1, all sides are
multiplied by 1, and view restriction box is drawn according to the longest side.
The result is that the Length = 2715.02, and Width = 1046.94.
If you set this advanced option to 10, perpendicular corner edges A’ and B’ are
multiplied by 10. If the result is larger than the longest side C’, the view
restriction box is drawn using the sides A’ and B’. The result would be Length =
2353.55, and Width = 1353.55.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_POLYGON_SQUARE_CORNER_PREFERENCE_FACTOR (page 280)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 279 P

 XS_POLYGON_SQUARE_CORNER_PREFERENCE_FACTOR
Category
Plate Work
This advanced option is used to artificially manipulate which side of a plate is
considered as the 'longest'.
In drawings, this advanced option is also used to control the rotation if right-
angled plates. The longest side of polygon plates always faces downwards in
drawings, which can affect right-angled plates.
This information can then be used, for example, in changing the rotation of a
plate in drawings, or when choosing which side of a plate is to be considered
the 'Length' and 'Width'.
This advanced option is used for plates that have two consecutive edges
perpendicular to each other. When this advanced option is set to a factor,
Tekla Structures multiplies the length of the side next to the right angle by that
factor, making it the longest side. In reports, this side will be then considered
the 'Length', and the corresponding perpendicular distance the 'Width'.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 280 P

 Tekla Structures still uses and displays the real dimensions of the plate.
In the example above, when you set
XS_POLYGON_SQUARE_CORNER_PREFERENCE_FACTOR to 1, all sides are
multiplied by 1, and the view restriction box is drawn according to the longest
side. The result is Length = 2715.02, and Width = 1173.35.
If you set this advanced option to 10, only square corner edges A and B are
multiplied by 10. If the result is larger than the largest side C, the view
restriction box is drawn using the sides A and B. The result would be Length =
2353.55, and Width = 1353.55.
The default value for this advanced option is 2.0.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_POLYGON_PERPENDICULAR_EDGE_PREFERENCE_FACTOR (page 278)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 281 P

 XS_POP_MARK_COLOR
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to define the color of a customized pop-mark symbol that is displayed in a
drawing. Enter an integer. The default value is 1 (white). Other possible values
are:

Value Pop mark color

0 Black
2 Red
3 Green
4 Blue
5 Cyan
6 Yellow
7 Magenta

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_POP_MARK_SYMBOL (page 283)
XS_POP_MARK_HEIGHT (page 282)

XS_POP_MARK_HEIGHT
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to define the height of a customized pop-mark symbol that is displayed in
a drawing. Enter a decimal value in millimeters. The default is 2.0.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_POP_MARK_SYMBOL (page 283)
XS_POP_MARK_COLOR (page 282)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 282 P

 XS_POP_MARK_SYMBOL
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to define the customized pop-mark symbol to be used for pop-marks in
drawings. The default is xsteel@0, which means that you are using symbol
number 0 in the symbol file xsteel.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_POP_MARK_HEIGHT (page 282)
XS_POP_MARK_COLOR (page 282)
Symbols in drawings

XS_POSITION_DIMENSIONS_FOR_HOLES
_IN_SINGLE_SECONDARY_PARTS_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWING
Category
Dimensioning: Bolts
To create position dimensions for holes in single secondary parts in assembly
drawing, set this advanced option to TRUE. To not create position dimensions
for holes, set it to FALSE. The default value is TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_POUR_BREAK_COLOR
Category: Concrete Detailing
Use this advanced option to change the color of pour breaks in model views.
Enter number as the value using the class numbers in the part properties
dialog box to indicate the color. For example, if you set this advanced option to
6, Tekla Structures will color all pour breaks yellow. The default value is 59.
In the exported IFC models, pour breaks are black.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 283 P

 See also
XS_POUR_OBJECT_COLOR (page 284)
XS_INVALID_POUR_BREAK_COLOR (page 225)

XS_POUR_BREAK_SYMBOL
Category
Drawing Properties
Pour breaks are represented by a symbol in the drawings, see the image
below. The symbol scale and the spacing between the symbols follows the
drawing view scale automatically.

If you want to change the pour break symbol, enter a new value for this
advanced option. The default value is PourBreaks@0. The symbol value starts
with the symbol library file name and ends with the number of the symbol.
The default library may contain many different pour break symbols. If you
wish to use a symbol file that is not located under your environment folders,
enter the complete path to the symbol file location and the symbol file name.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_POUR_OBJECT_COLOR
Category: Concrete Detailing
Use this advanced option to change the default color of pour objects in model
views. Enter number as the value using the class numbers in the part
properties dialog box to indicate the color. For example, if you set this
advanced option to 6, Tekla Structures will color all pour objects yellow. The
default value is 110.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 284 P

 In the exported models, pour objects have the default value (110) and color
(pink).
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also
XS_POUR_BREAK_COLOR (page 283)

XS_PRIMARY_PART_FIRST
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
Set this advanced option to TRUE to sort part and assembly part lists in
templates so that the main part of the assembly appears at the top of the list,
immediately after the assembly.
This advanced option is needed in row rules, where rule is read after sorting.
If you add this advanced option to the options.ini file under the current
model folder, you need to reopen the model to activate the new value. If it is
set in another .ini file, you need to restart Tekla Structures.

XS_PRINT_MULTISHEET_BORDER
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to define the borders that are left out from the smaller sheets when
printing a drawing on multiple small sheets.
For example, to leave a 3 mm horizontal and a 5 mm vertical border, set the
advanced option to 3,5.

XS_PRINT_REPORT_FONT
Category
Templates and Symbols
Define the font for printed reports. Tekla Structures uses this advanced option
if you do not specify another font for printed reports in the Print dialog box.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 285 P

 The default value is Arial Narrow. If you do not enter a font, Tekla Structures
uses the default font defined for XS_DEFAULT_FONT.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_PRINT_REPORT_LINE_WIDTH_LANDSCAPE
Category
Templates and symbols
Use to specify the number of characters per row in reports printed in
landscape orientation. The default value is 132.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_PRINT_REPORT_LINE_WIDTH_PORTRAIT (page 286)
XS_PRINT_REPORT_PAGE_HEIGHT_LANDSCAPE (page 286)
XS_PRINT_REPORT_PAGE_HEIGHT_PORTRAIT (page 287)

XS_PRINT_REPORT_LINE_WIDTH_PORTRAIT
Category
Templates and symbols
Use to specify the number of characters per row in reports printed in portrait
orientation. the default value is 80.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_PRINT_REPORT_LINE_WIDTH_LANDSCAPE (page 286)
XS_PRINT_REPORT_PAGE_HEIGHT_LANDSCAPE (page 286)
XS_PRINT_REPORT_PAGE_HEIGHT_PORTRAIT (page 287)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 286 P

 XS_PRINT_REPORT_PAGE_HEIGHT_LANDSCAPE
Category
Templates and symbols
Use to specify the number of rows in printed reports with landscape
orientation. The default value is 42.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_PRINT_REPORT_LINE_WIDTH_LANDSCAPE (page 286)
XS_PRINT_REPORT_LINE_WIDTH_PORTRAIT (page 286)
XS_PRINT_REPORT_PAGE_HEIGHT_PORTRAIT (page 287)

XS_PRINT_REPORT_PAGE_HEIGHT_PORTRAIT
Category
Templates and symbols
Use to specify the number of rows in printed reports with portrait orientation.
The default value is 62.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_PRINT_REPORT_LINE_WIDTH_LANDSCAPE (page 286)
XS_PRINT_REPORT_LINE_WIDTH_PORTRAIT (page 286)
XS_PRINT_REPORT_PAGE_HEIGHT_LANDSCAPE (page 286)

XS_PRODUCT_IDENTIFIER
Category: Drawing View

To make it clear with which software a project has been modeled (old XSteel,
other detailing systems or Tekla Structures) and reinforce the Tekla Structures
brand, you can add a Tekla Structures product identifier to the side of every
drawing. The product identifier will help promote the image of your company

Alphabetical list of advanced options 287 P

 as a forward thinking company that uses the latest and most advanced
technologies and techniques.
You can use the following values to change the position of the product
identifier or turn it off: DX and DY offset, FALSE, and TRUE (default).
• If you do not want to use the product identifier, set this advanced option to
FALSE.
• If you want to move it, enter values separated by a comma (,) for both the X
and Y directions.
For example, -5,10 will move the text 5 pixels to the left and 10 pixels up.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_PROFDB
Category
File Locations
Use to point to the profile folder which Tekla Structures searches for profile,
material, device, and bolt catalogs.
You can store several catalogs in different locations, so it is important to know
which catalog you are using.
This is a system-specific advanced option.

See also

Alphabetical list of advanced options 288 P

 XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_CHECK_ALL
Category: Analysis & Design
In the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box, you can enter analysis values for
each profile. When you run the structural analysis, the analysis applications
that use the COM link calculate the analysis values and compare them to the
values in the Tekla Structures profile catalog. If the analysis application finds
the values in the profile catalog, it uses the catalog values.
To check the profile catalog for analysis values for all profiles, enter TRUE for
the following advanced options before you run the analysis:
• XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_CHECK_ALL
• XS_AD_OPTIMISATION_DISABLED
The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.
If the profile catalog value differs significantly from the value the analysis
application calculates, Tekla Structures writes a warning in the analysis log file.
Use the advanced option XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_VALUE_DIFF_LIMIT to
define the warning limit.

See also
XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_VALUE_DIFF_LIMIT (page 289)
XS_AD_OPTIMISATION_DISABLED (page 28)

XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_VALUE_DIFF_LIMIT
Category
Analysis & Design
Sets the warning limit as a percentage when checking profile catalog analysis
values. The default value is 5.5 (%).
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also
XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_CHECK_ALL (page 288)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 289 P

 XS_PROFILE_DISPLAY_INCH_MARK_AFTER_FRACTIONS_IN_
REPORTS
Category
Imperial Units
Use to define the location of the inch mark in profile lengths in reports.
To display the inch mark after the fractions (for example, PL1"X18 1/2"), enter
TRUE. To display the inch mark before the fractions (for example, PL1"X18"1/2),
enter FALSE.
The inch mark is displayed after the fractions by default (TRUE).
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also
XSR_SHOW_INCH_MARK_IN_PROFILE_NAMES (page 331)

XS_PROJECT
Category
File Locations

NOTE This advanced option is only meant for administrators.

Set the advanced options XS_PROJECT and XS_FIRM, along with XS_SYSTEM,
to point to the folders Tekla Structures searches for properties files. Tekla
Structures always saves properties in the current model\attributes folder. You
can then copy or move them to XS_FIRM or XS_PROJECT folders if same
settings are needed in other models.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

WARNING Changing an advanced option value in .ini files located outside

the model folder does not affect the existing models. You can
only update advanced options in the Advanced Options dialog
box or in the options.ini file located in model folder; not from
an options.ini file located in folders defined for the advanced
options XS_FIRM or XS_PROJECT. The .ini files are read also
when you open an existing model, but only new advanced
options that do not exist in options_model.db or
options_drawings.db are inserted, for example, such options
that are not yet in the Advanced Options dialog box but have
been added in the software.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 290 P

 See also
Folder search order
Project and firm folders

XS_PROTECT_SYMBOLS
Category
Drawing Properties
Set this advanced option to TRUE to prevent Tekla Structures from drawing
objects on top of symbols. If you set it to FALSE, symbols are not protected.
The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

3.17 R

XS_RADIUS_TEXT_IN_UNFOLDING_BENDING_LINE_
DIMENSIONING
Category
Dimensioning: unfolding
Use to set prefix text for radii. The default value is R=.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XSR_BOLT_LENGTH_USE_ONLY_INCHES
Category
Templates and symbols
Set this advanced option to TRUE to prevent the advanced option
XSR_USE_ZERO_FEET_VALUE from affecting bolt length in bolt marks. If you

Alphabetical list of advanced options 291 R

 want XSR_USE_ZERO_FEET_VALUE to affect bolt length in bolt marks, set it to
FALSE. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XSR_USE_ZERO_FEET_VALUE (page 312)

XS_REBAR_BEND_MARK_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE
Category
Concrete Detailing
Use to increase the size of the reinforcing bar bend symbols in drawings (in
drawing units) in order to see them more clearly. The default value is 1.
The value set for this advanced option is multiplied by the view scale. If the
resulting value is bigger than the default size (diameter of the reinforcing bar),
then it will be used as the symbol size. Otherwise the default value is used.
This means that to make the symbol as small as possible, leave the value out
or use zero (0).

This advanced option can be used together with the advanced option
XS_REBAR_END_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE, which is used for increasing the size of
the reinforcing bar end symbols.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 292 R

 See also

XS_REBAR_END_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE (page 294)

XS_REBAR_DIMENSION_LINE_SYMBOL
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file. Add this
advanced option in the options.ini file under model folder.
Use this advanced option to change the reinforcing bar group dimension
(distribution) line symbol. You can create the dimension line by right-clicking
the reinforcing bar group and selecting Create dimension line. The default
value is xsteel@16, wherexsteel is the name of the symbol file and 16 is the
running number of the symbol.

See also
Add dimensions to reinforcement

XS_REBAR_DIMENSION_MARK_MANUAL_CLOSE_TO_
GEOMETRY
Category
Concrete Detailing

Alphabetical list of advanced options 293 R

 Use to add closing dimensions to the edge of the part in reinforcing bar group
dimensions. If you set this advanced option to TRUE, the closing dimensions
are added.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_REBAR_END_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE
Category
Concrete Detailing
Use to increase the size of the reinforcing bar end symbols in drawings (in
drawing units) in order to see them more clearly. Works for 45 or 135 degree
symbols. The default value is 2.
The value set for this advanced option is multiplied by the view scale. If the
resulting value is bigger than the default size (diameter of the reinforcing bar),
then it will be used as the symbol size. Otherwise the default value is used.
This means that to make the symbol as small as possible, leave the value out
or use zero (0).

Alphabetical list of advanced options 294 R

 This advanced option can be used together with the advanced option
XS_REBAR_BEND_MARK_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE, which is used for increasing the
size of the reinforcing bar bend symbols.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_REBAR_REVERSE_END_SYMBOLS (page 298)

XS_REBAR_BEND_MARK_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE (page 292)

XS_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POINT_SEARCH_STEP_
LENGTH
Category
Concrete Detailing
Use to define the step length while searching for an optimal place for the
rebar mark leader line base point along the reinforcing bar. Enter the value in
millimeters using decimals. The default value is 20.0.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POINT_SEARCH_
TOLERANCE
Category
Concrete Detailing
Use to define how far the other reinforcing bars must be from the base point
so that Tekla Structures can place the base point. Enter the value in millimeters
using decimals. The default value is 10.0.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_REBAR_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING
Category: Numbering
Use to define the contents of the reinforcing bar position numbers. You can
also change or remove the separator and affect how many numbers are used

Alphabetical list of advanced options 295 R

 to represent the reinforcing bar position number. If you change the value, you
need to renumber the model.
Use the following options or a combination of them:

Option Description
%PART_PREFIX% The prefix of the position number of the part
that contains the reinforcing bar.
%PART_START_NUMBER% The start number of the position number of the
part that contains the reinforcing bar.
%REBAR_PREFIX% The prefix of the position number of the
reinforcing bar.
%REBAR_SERIAL_NUMBER% The position number without the prefix of the
reinforcing bar.
%REBAR_POS% This is no longer used. Use
%REBAR_SERIAL_NUMBER% instead.
%REBAR_SIZE% The size of the reinforcing bar with the possible
size prefix.
For example, in the US environments the size
prefix is #.
%REBAR_SIZE_NUMBER% The size of the reinforcing bar without the size
prefix.
%CAST_UNIT_PREFIX% The prefix of the position number of the cast
unit that contains the reinforcing bar.
%CAST_UNIT_START_NUMB The start number of the position number of the
ER% cast unit that contains the reinforcing bar.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
The Prefix in the Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog box is set to R, the Start
No is set to 1, and the Size is set to #6.
• If you set the advanced option to %REBAR_SIZE%%REBAR_PREFIX%
%REBAR_SERIAL_NUMBER.3%, the result for the first reinforcing bar will be
#6R001.
• If you set the advanced option to %REBAR_SIZE_NUMBER%%REBAR_PREFIX
%%REBAR_SERIAL_NUMBER.3% and number the model, the result for the
first reinforcing bar is 6R001.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 296 R

 XS_REBAR_PULLOUT_ANGLE_TEXT_FRAME
Category
Concrete Detailing
Use to turn off the text frame around the angle text in pull-out pictures. By
default, this advanced option is set to FALSE, and no frame is drawn. If you set
this advanced option to TRUE, the frame is drawn.
If you have set XS_REBAR_PULLOUT_ANGLE_TEXT_UNDERLINE to TRUE, then
the advanced option XS_REBAR_PULLOUT_ANGLE_TEXT_FRAME is ignored.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_REBAR_PULLOUT_ANGLE_TEXT_UNDERLINE (page 297)

XS_REBAR_PULLOUT_ANGLE_TEXT_UNDERLINE
Category
Concrete Detailing
Set this advanced option to TRUE to draw an line under the angle text in pull-
outs. If you set it to TRUE, then the advanced option
XS_REBAR_PULLOUT_ANGLE_TEXT_FRAME is ignored. By default, this
advanced option is set to FALSE, and no underline is drawn.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_REBAR_PULLOUT_ANGLE_TEXT_FRAME (page 296)

XS_REBAR_RECOGNITION_HOOKS_CONSIDERATION
Category
Concrete Detailing
Set to FALSE to have Tekla Structures ignore hooks when it checks the shape
of reinforcing bars, and to have Tekla Structures assign the same bending type
to bars with and without hooks.
Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures take the hooks into account and to treat
bars with or without hooks, or with different hooks, as different.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 297 R

 The default value is TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_REBAR_REVERSE_END_SYMBOLS
Category: Concrete Detailing
Use to reverse the reinforcing bar end symbols to a different direction. When
this advanced option is set to TRUE, the end symbol is drawn at 135 degree
angle (used commonly in Norway). If you use single line visualization and no
symbol at straight end, use the value TRUEANDEXTEND. If you use TRUE for
these kinds of reinforcing bars, they will be drawn too short. The default value
is FALSE.

This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

See also
XS_REBAR_END_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE (page 294)
Reinforcement/Neighbor reinforcement and mesh properties in drawings

Alphabetical list of advanced options 298 R

 XS_REBARSET_COLOR_BARGROUPS
Category: Concrete Detailing
Set this advanced option to TRUE to show automatic bar groups within a rebar
set using different colors in model views. For example:

The default value is FALSE.

When you set this advanced option to TRUE, the reinforcing bars in rebar sets
will not be colored by class. Different bar groups get different colors starting
from the color number that is one higher than the class number of the rebar
set:

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.
After changing the setting of this advanced option, update the existing rebar
sets in the model by clicking Concrete --> Rebar set --> Regenerate rebar
sets to activate the new setting.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 299 R

 XS_REBAR_USE_ALWAYS_METHOD_A_FOR_90_DEGREE_HOOK_
DIMENSIONS
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
When set to TRUE, the SHLB/EHLB hook properties will have the same values
as the SHLA/EHLA properties in case the hook angle is approximately 95
degrees or less.

XS_RECREATE_MARKS_IN_INTELLIGENT_CLONING
Category
Marking: General
Set this advanced option to ALL to recreate all marks during intelligent cloning.
If you leave the value out, marks are not recreated. By default, no value is set.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_RECREATE_UNMODIFIED_DRAWINGS
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to define whether drawings are recreated when you update an assembly,
single or cast unit drawing that has not been modified. Drawings are
automatically recreated unless they have been edited and then saved, or they
have been issued using the Issue functionality in the drawing list.
• To prevent the recreation of the unmodified drawings, set the advanced
option FALSE.
• To allow the recreation of the unmodified drawings, set the advanced
option to TRUE. This is the default value.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 300 R

 XS_REFERENCE_CACHE
Category
File Locations
Use to define the default location of the cache file that is created from the
source file when you load a reference model for the first time. The advanced
option is set to C:\TeklaStructuresModels\\RefCacheFolders by
default. You can also replace the path with XS_RUNPATH as follows:
%XS_RUNPATH%\RefCacheFolders.

TIP • You may sometimes want to change the default location of the cache
file when you are working with multi-user models to reduce network
traffic and disk usage in the server or to speed up the cache
operation (if the local drive is faster than the server drive).
• When you are using different versions of Tekla Structures for
different projects and you experience problems with reference
models, empty the folder where the reference cache is created. The
cache file is recreated the next time you open the reference model.

This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_KEEP_VERSIONS_COUNT
Category: Modeling Properties
Use the XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_KEEP_VERSIONS_COUNT advanced option to
clean up old reference model revisions automatically. The cleanup is done
when the reference file is updated. Use
XS_DELETE_UNNECESSARY_REFMODEL_FILES_SAFETY_PERIOD (page 103)
to set the time frame for deletion.
Tekla Structures deletes the reference models that have been imported at
some point but are no longer used, and are not displayed in the Reference
Models list. The data related to these reference models is deleted from the
current data storage in folder <current model>\datastorage\ref. The
original imported reference model is not deleted from its actual folder, for
example, from .\Reference models.
You can use the following values:
• 0: The cleanup is disabled. This is the default value.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 301 R

 • Any positive number.
For example, value 3 keeps two old revisions of the reference model, in
addition to the current version.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_REFERENCE_USE_RENDERED_CLIPPING
Category
Import
Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures show only the center line of reference
objects outside the work area in model views. This can be useful, for example,
when viewing cylindrical DGN structures, such as piping. If you do not want to
show only center line, set it to FALSE. The default value is TRUE. I
Tekla Structures then shows the objects as follows:
• Objects entirely inside work area are rendered.
• Objects entirely outside work area are hidden.
• Objects partly inside the work area are rendered inside work area, and
wireframe outside work area.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_REFRESH_ALSO_LOCKED_REFERENCE_MODELS
Category: Import
Set the advanced option XS_REFRESH_ALSO_LOCKED_REFERENCE_MODELS to

TRUE to refresh locked reference models with the Refresh button . This
advanced option is by default set to FALSE.
This advanced option is system specific.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 302 R

 XS_REMEMBER_LAST_PLOT_DIALOG_VALUES
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
If you set this advanced option to TRUE, Tekla Structures remembers the latest
settings that were used in the Print Drawings dialog box when you open the
dialog box the next time. If you do not want to do this, enter false. The
default value is TRUE.

XS_REMOVE_VOID_FROM_BOLT_MATERIAL_THICKNESS
Category: Modeling Properties
Set this advanced option to TRUE to remove the gap between two bolted
material thicknesses, resulting in a shorter bolt length. This is required by, for
example, mast builders. The default value is FALSE.
In the example below, the advanced option is set to TRUE. The value "X" will be
removed from the bolt length.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_RENDERED_CURSOR_LINE_WIDTH
Category
Model View

Alphabetical list of advanced options 303 R

 Use to set cursor line width in model views.
• Possible values are 1, 2, or 4. Any other value is handled as 1.
• The default value is 2.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Cursor line width of 1 Cursor line width of 4

XS_RENDERED_FIELD_OF_VIEW
Category
Model View
Use to adjust the field of view setting in perspective views. This can be useful,
for example, when using the Fly command in a tight space. The bigger the
value, the more distance there is between the parts.
The default value is 60.0.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Example

Field of view Example

60.0

Alphabetical list of advanced options 304 R

 Field of view Example
90.0

120.0

XS_RENDERED_GL_FOG_END_VALUE
Category
Model View
Note that this advanced option works only if you use the default OpenGL
rendering instead of the DirectX rendering.
In model views, the distant objects appear progressively darker than the close
ones. Use the advanced options XS_RENDERED_GL_FOG_START_VALUE and
XS_RENDERED_FOG_END_VALUE to control the shade of objects.
Use values from 0.0 to 1.0 to control the shade of objects. The higher the
value, the darker the distant objects. Value 0 disables the fog effect. The
default value for XS_RENDERED_GL_FOG_END_VALUE is 0.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also
XS_RENDERED_GL_FOG_START_VALUE (page 305)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 305 R

 XS_RENDERED_GL_FOG_START_VALUE
Category
Model View
Note that this advanced option works only if you use the default OpenGL
rendering instead of the DirectX rendering.

In model views, the distant objects appear progressively darker than the close
ones. Use the advanced options XS_RENDERED_GL_FOG_START_VALUE and
XS_RENDERED_GL_FOG_END_VALUE to control the shade of objects.
Use values from 0.0 to 1.0 to control the shade of objects. The higher the
value, the darker the distant objects. Value 0 disables the fog effect. The
default value for XS_RENDERED_GL_FOG_START_VALUE is 0.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also
XS_RENDERED_GL_FOG_END_VALUE (page 305)

XS_RENDERED_PIXEL_TOLERANCE_SCALE
Category
Model View

Tekla Structures uses pixel tolerance to differentiate between clicking and

dragging the mouse when zooming. Use this advanced option to define the
pixel tolerance.
The default value is 0.7. If the mouse moves less than the specified value
while the left mouse button is pressed down, it is treated as a click.
This is a system-specific advanced option.

XS_REPORT_BOLTS_WITH_SUPPORTING_MEMBER
Category: Templates and symbols
You can set the site bolts to the supporting member in reports and KSS by
setting the advanced option XS_REPORT_BOLTS_WITH_SUPPORTING_MEMBER
to TRUE. Using this advanced option you can show the field bolts in the BOM
of the supporting member. The default value is FALSE.
In the following BOM example, the advanced option is set to TRUE:

Alphabetical list of advanced options 306 R

 In the following BOM example, the advanced option is set to FALSE:

In the following KSS file example, the advanced option is set to TRUE:

In the following KSS file example, the advanced option is set to FALSE:

Alphabetical list of advanced options 307 R

 This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_REPORT_OUTPUT_DIRECTORY
Category
File locations
Points to the folder where Tekla Structures saves reports. If the full path
appears in the report file name field, Tekla Structures ignores this setting. The
default value is .\Reports.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 308 R

 XS_RESTORE_ENABLES
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.

Set this advanced option to TRUE to be able to save and load check box values
in dialog boxes. FALSE is the default value.

XS_ROTATE_CUT_VIEWS
Category
Drawing View
Use to specify the rotation of section views.
BY_SYMBOL_MAIN_VIEW (default) uses the orientation of the view that
contains the section symbol. This only applies to section views that Tekla
Structures creates automatically. Manually-created views have the same
rotation as the view they are created from.

BY_MAIN_VIEW uses the same orientation as the main view.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 309 R

 This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_RUN_AT_STARTUP
Category: File Locations

Tekla Structures will automatically launch any executable (.exe) files that are
located in the folders defined for this advanced option. You can enter several
folders separated by a semicolon (;). By default, this advanced option is set
to ..\Tekla Structures\<version>\nt\bin\applications\Tekla
\ApplicationStartup.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_RUNPATH
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
This advanced option is system specific and is read from
teklastructures.ini. Generally, there is no need to modify system-specific
settings. Do not modify them if you are not an administrator.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 310 R

 This advanced option points to the folder where Tekla Structures searches for
models by default. When you open the New dialog box, the default model
folder is displayed in the Save in list.

NOTE This advanced option does not affect the Open dialog box.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
set XS_RUNPATH=C:\TeklaStructuresModels\

XSR_USE_NO_FEET_SEPARATOR
Category
Templates and Symbols
Set this advanced option to TRUE to use a space instead of the feet separator
in drawing tables and reports, for example, 2 4''1/4. To use the feet separator,
use the value FALSE. The default value is FALSE.
You also need to set XSR_USE_NO_FEET_SYMBOL.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XSR_USE_NO_FEET_SYMBOL (page 311)

XSR_USE_NO_FEET_SYMBOL
Category
Templates and Symbols
Set this advanced option to TRUE to omit the feet symbol in drawing tables
and reports, for example, 2-4''1/4. If you do not want to omit the feet symbol,
use the value FALSE. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 311 R

 XSR_USE_NO_INCH_SYMBOL
Category
Templates and Symbols
Set this advanced option to TRUE to omit the inch symbol in drawing tables
and reports, for example, 2-4 ¼. If you do not want to omit the inch symbol,
use the value FALSE. The default value is FALSE.
You also need to set XSR_USE_NO_FEET_SYMBOL and
XSR_USE_NO_FEET_SEPARATOR.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XSR_USE_NO_FEET_SEPARATOR (page 311)
XSR_USE_NO_FEET_SYMBOL (page 311)

XSR_USE_ZERO_FEET_VALUE
Category
Templates and Symbols
Set this advanced option to TRUE to force Tekla Structures to show zero feet
for values less one foot, for example, 0'-6''3/4. If you do not want to show zero
feet values, use the value FALSE. The default value is FALSE.

NOTE Setting this advanced option affects also the following:

• Length values in part and bolt marks
• Length values in templates (template attribute LENGTH)

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XSR_BOLT_LENGTH_USE_ONLY_INCHES (page 291)

XSR_USE_ZERO_INCH_FOR_FRACTIONS
Category
Templates and Symbols

Alphabetical list of advanced options 312 R

 Set this advanced option to TRUE to show zero inches for values only
containing fractions, for example, 2'-3/4 or 0''1/4. If you do not want to do this,
use the value FALSE. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XSR_USE_ZERO_INCH_VALUE
Category
Templates and Symbols
Set this advanced option to TRUE to show zero inches for values only
containing feet and fractions, for example, 2'-0''3/4 or 1/4. If you do not want
to do this, use the value FALSE. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

3.18 S

XS_SAVE_WITH_COMMENT
Category
Multi-user
Set this advanced option to TRUE (default) to enable the saving of model
revision comments in multi-user models.

XS_SCALE_COPIED_OR_MOVED_OBJECTS_IN_DRAWINGS
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to define the scaling of objects that are copied or moved between drawing
views that have different scales.
• To scale the objects according to the view scales, set the advanced option
to TRUE.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 313 S

 • To keep the object sizes constant, set the advanced option to FALSE
(default).
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_SCALE_MARKS_TO_FIT_LIMIT
Category
Marking: Parts
Tekla Structures fits part marks near the part they belong to by scaling the text
height. Set the minimum scale with this advanced option.
The default value is 1.0. This means that if you do not set the advanced option,
Tekla Structures does not scale marks. Tekla Structures scales the text height
in steps so that first it tries the scale of 0.9. If the mark does not fit, Tekla
Structures scales the mark by 0.8, and so on.
Note that part mark's leader line type has to be either Try along part or
Always along part.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
XS_SCALE_MARKS_TO_FIT_LIMIT=0.5

XS_SCREW_DIAMOND_WITHOUT_PHI
Category
Marking: Bolts
Set this advanced option to TRUE to prevent Tekla Structures from placing a
phi symbol outside the frame of bolt marks (diamond type only). The default
value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_SDNF_CONVERT_PL_PROFILE_TO_PLATE
Category
Export

Alphabetical list of advanced options 314 S

 Set this advanced option to TRUE to have SDNF exports convert plate profiles
(PL) to contour plates. Works with SDNF versions 2.0 and 3.0. If you do not
want to use this setting, Set it to FALSE.The default value is TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_SDNF_EXPORT_INCLUDE_GLOBAL_ID
Category
Export
Set this advanced option to TRUE to revert to the FrameWorksPlus ID number
in SDNF exports. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option only affects version 2.0 SDNF export, but not version 3.0
export.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_SDNF_IMPORT_STORE_MEMBER_NUMBER (page 315)

XS_SDNF_IMPORT_MIRROR_SWAP_OFFSETS
Category
Import

Set this advanced option to TRUE to swap the end point offsets and start point
offsets when an imported part is mirrored already in the SDNF software. If you
set this advanced option to FALSE, the end point and start point offsets are
not swapped. The default value is TRUE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_SDNF_IMPORT_STORE_MEMBER_NUMBER
Category
Import
Set this advanced option to TRUE to have Tekla Structures store the
FrameWorksPlus ID number in SDNF imports. Tekla Structures stores the ID

Alphabetical list of advanced options 315 S

 number in the user-defined attribute SDNF_MEMBER_NUMBER. If you do not
want to do this, set the option to FALSE. The default value is TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.
For information on exporting the ID number, click the links below.

See also
XS_SDNF_EXPORT_INCLUDE_GLOBAL_ID (page 315)
XS_PML_EXPORT_INCLUDE_GLOBAL_ID (page 276)

XS_SECONDARY_PART_HARDSTAMP
Category
CNC
Set to TRUE to include hard stamps for main parts and any kind of secondary
parts in DSTV files. Set to FALSE to create hard stamps only for main parts.
The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_SECTION_LINE_COLOR
Category
Hatching
Use to add extra lines in different colors around automatic hatching in section
views. Enter the numeric value for the color. See below for the colors and their
numeric values.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 316 S

 This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

NOTE To show lines around hatching, and to be able to add extra lines in
different colors, you may need to set advanced option
XS_DRAW_ALL_SECTION_EDGES_IN_DRAWINGS to TRUE in the
initialization files.

See also
XS_DRAW_ALL_SECTION_EDGES_IN_DRAWINGS (page 132)

XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_LEFT_ARROW_SYMBOL
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to define the custom arrow symbol Tekla Structures uses in section
symbols at the left end of sections. To use the custom arrow symbol, select
Custom from the Left symbol list in the Section symbol properties dialog
box.

By default, Tekla Structures uses the symbol no 1 in the sections.sym file

(located usually in the folder \environments\common\symbols\). If you
want to change the symbol, enter the symbol file name first, then the @ sign
and then the number of the symbol, for example sections@1.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_RIGHT_ARROW_SYMBOL (page 318)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 317 S

 Setting automatic section view properties
Modifying section properties

XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_REFERENCE
Category
Drawing Properties
Sets the reference text for symbols that show a section in another drawing.
The text can include:
• free text
• user-defined attributes
• template attributes
In the Advanced options dialog box, use single % characters around the user-
defined and template attributes. %DRAWING_TITLE% is the default value.
%TITLE% gives the same result. This advanced option gets the drawing name
entered in the drawing properties dialog box. If you enter TITLE1 - TITLE3,
Tekla Structures gets the drawing title from the drawing properties dialog box.
You can also use the format DR_TITLE1 - DR_TITLE3.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_RIGHT_ARROW_SYMBOL
Category
Drawing properties

Alphabetical list of advanced options 318 S

 Use to define the custom arrow symbol Tekla Structures uses in section
symbols at the right end of sections. To use the custom arrow symbol, select
Custom from the Right symbol list in the Section symbol properties dialog
box

By default Tekla Structures uses the symbol no 0 in the sections.sym file

(located usually in the folder \environments\common\symbols\). Enter the
symbol file name first, then the @ sign and then the number of the symbol, for
example sections@0.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_LEFT_ARROW_SYMBOL (page 317)
Setting automatic section view properties
Modifying section properties

XS_SECTION_VIEW_REFERENCE
Category
Drawing Properties
Sets the reference text for section view labels. The text can include:
• free text
• user-defined attributes
• template attributes
In the Advanced options dialog box, use single % characters around the user-
defined and template attributes. %DRAWING_TITLE% is the default value.
%TITLE% gives the same result. This advanced option gets the drawing name
entered in the drawing properties dialog box. If you enter TITLE1 - TITLE3,
Tekla Structures gets the drawing title from the drawing properties dialog box.
You can also use the format DR_TITLE1 - DR_TITLE3.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 319 S

 This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_REFERENCE (page 318)

XS_SET_FIXEDMAINVIEW_UDA_TO_AFFECT_NUMBERING
Category: Numbering
To activate the Show top-in-form face for non-concrete material, use the
advanced option XS_SET_FIXEDMAINVIEW_UDA_TO_AFFECT_NUMBERING.
The allowed options are STEEL, TIMBER and MISC. You can also combine the
options, use a comma (,) as a separator.
This advanced option affects numbering. If parts have different options
selected for Fixed drawing main view, they get different assembly position
numbers.
To show the top-in-form face in drawings and set which view is used in
drawings as the main (front) view, go to the user-defined properties of a non-
concrete part and select the Fixed drawing main view option that you want.
The options are Top, Back, Bottom, Start, End and Front.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 320 S

 XS_SET_HATCH_ORIGIN_INTO_VIEW_ORIGIN
Category: Hatching
Hatches are drawn consistently between parts and set to origin, if you set the
advanced option XS_SET_HATCH_ORIGIN_INTO_VIEW_ORIGIN to TRUE and
the scaling and rotation of hatches to zero (0). The default value is FALSE.
For automatic hatches, the scale and rotation are set in the .htc file, for
example, CONCRETE,0,hardware_LINES,,120, where the value 0 (or empty)
sets auto scale and rotation to false.
For manual hatches, the scale and rotation are set on the Fill tab of parts
properties or shape properties dialog boxes, where you need to set the Scale
option to Custom and select the Keep ratio of x and y check box.
In the example below, the parts that belong to the same cast unit are hatched
consistently.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 321 S

 XS_SHARING_INFO_URL
Category: Multi-user
Use this advanced option to set the Tekla Model Sharing management server
address.
This advanced option is system-specific. Generally, there is no need to modify
system-specific settings. Do not modify them if you are not an administrator.

XS_SHARING_JOIN_SHOW_AVAILABLE_UPDATES

NOTE We recommend you to set this advanced option in File menu -->
Sharing --> Sharing settings. Select the Show available updates
when joining the model option.

Use this advanced option to show a list of all the available baselines and
updates which to join in Tekla Model Sharing. The list is shown when a user
joins a model.
If needed, the advanced option can be set in initialization files. Set
XS_SHARING_JOIN_SHOW_AVAILABLE_UPDATES to TRUE in initialization files
to enable the list.
This advanced option is user-specific.

XS_SHARING_READIN_SHOW_AVAILABLE_VERSIONS

NOTE We recommend you to set this advanced option in File menu -->
Sharing --> Sharing settings. Select the Show available updates
when reading in the changes option.

Use this advanced option to show a list of available updates when a user reads
in the model changes in Tekla Model Sharing.
If needed, the advanced option can be set in initialization files. Set
XS_SHARING_READIN_SHOW_AVAILABLE_VERSIONS to TRUE in initialization
files to enable the list.
This advanced option is user-specific.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 322 S

 XS_SHARING_READIN_SHOW_CHANGEMANAGER

NOTE We recommend you to set this advanced option in File menu -->
Sharing --> Sharing settings. Select the Show changes after read in
option.

Use this advanced option to show a list model changes at the bottom pane
after you have read in the model changes in Tekla Model Sharing.
If needed, the advanced option can be set in initialization files. Set
XS_SHARING_READIN_SHOW_CHANGEMANAGER to TRUE in initialization files.
This advanced option is user-specific.

XS_SHARING_READIN_SHOW_CHANGEMANAGER_
CONFLICTSONLY

NOTE We recommend you to set this advanced option in File menu -->
Sharing --> Sharing settings. Select the Show changes after read in
and Only when conflicts exist options.

Use this advanced option to show a list model changes at the bottom pane
after you have read in the model changes in Tekla Model Sharing and when
there are conflicts.
If needed, the advanced option can be set in initialization files. Set
XS_SHARING_READIN_SHOW_CHANGEMANAGER and
XS_SHARING_READIN_SHOW_CHANGEMANAGER_CONFLICTSONLY to TRUE in
initialization files.
This advanced option is user-specific.

XS_SHARING_TEMP
Category: Multi-user
Use this advanced option to define the temporary folder for Tekla Model
Sharing packet management. The default is the Windows temporary folder.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 323 S

 XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
Category
Marking: Bolts
Use to define the contents of the Size element in bolt marks (workshop). The
default value is %BOLT_NUMBER%*D%HOLE.DIAMETER% - M%DIAMETER%x
%LENGTH%.

You can use any combination of text and the following options as the value for
this advanced option. Enclose each option in % characters. To use special
characters enter a backslash (\) followed by an ASCII number. You can use the
options in any order, and make calculations.
• BOLT_NUMBER
• DIAMETER
• LENGTH
• HOLE.DIAMETER
• LONG_HOLE_X
• LONG_HOLE_Y
• LONGHOLE_MIN (the shorter of the slotted hole dimensions)
• LONGHOLE_MAX (the longer of the slotted hole dimensions)
• BOLT_STANDARD
• BOLT_MATERIAL
• BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE
• BOLT_COUNTERSUNK
• BOLT_SHORT_NAME
• BOLT_FULL_NAME

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
Defining contents of bolt mark Size element using advanced options...

Alphabetical list of advanced options 324 S

 XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
Category
Marking: Bolts
Use to define the contents of the size element in bolt marks for workshop
bolts in general arrangement drawings.

You can use any combination of text and the following options as the value for
this advanced option. Enclose each option in % characters. To use special
characters enter a backslash (\) followed by an ASCII number. You can use the
options in any order, and make calculations.
• BOLT_NUMBER
• DIAMETER
• LENGTH
• HOLE.DIAMETER
• LONG_HOLE_X
• LONG_HOLE_Y
• LONGHOLE_MIN (the shorter of the slotted hole dimensions)
• LONGHOLE_MAX (the longer of the slotted hole dimensions)
• BOLT_STANDARD
• BOLT_MATERIAL
• BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE
• BOLT_COUNTERSUNK
• BOLT_SHORT_NAME
• BOLT_FULL_NAME

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (page 326)

XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (page 328)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 325 S

 XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
Category
Marking: Bolts
Use to define the contents of the Size element in hole marks (workshop). For
example, to show bolt number and hole diameter, enter %BOLT_NUMBER%*D
%HOLE.DIAMETER%.

You can use any combination of text and the following options as the value for
this advanced option. Enclose each option in % characters. To use special
characters enter a backslash (\) followed by an ASCII number. You can use the
options in any order, and make calculations.
• BOLT_NUMBER
• DIAMETER
• LENGTH
• HOLE.DIAMETER
• LONG_HOLE_X
• LONG_HOLE_Y
• LONGHOLE_MIN (the shorter of the slotted hole dimensions)
• LONGHOLE_MAX (the longer of the slotted hole dimensions)
• BOLT_STANDARD
• BOLT_MATERIAL
• BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE
• BOLT_COUNTERSUNK
• BOLT_SHORT_NAME
• BOLT_FULL_NAME

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
Category
Marking: Bolts
Use to define the contents of the size element in hole marks for workshop
bolts in general arrangement drawings.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 326 S

 You can use any combination of text and the following options as the value for
this advanced option. Enclose each option in % characters. To use special
characters enter a backslash (\) followed by an ASCII number. You can use the
options in any order, and make calculations.
• BOLT_NUMBER
• DIAMETER
• LENGTH
• HOLE.DIAMETER
• LONG_HOLE_X
• LONG_HOLE_Y
• LONGHOLE_MIN (the shorter of the slotted hole dimensions)
• LONGHOLE_MAX (the longer of the slotted hole dimensions)
• BOLT_STANDARD
• BOLT_MATERIAL
• BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE
• BOLT_COUNTERSUNK
• BOLT_SHORT_NAME
• BOLT_FULL_NAME

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (page 324)

XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (page 328)

XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
Category
Marking: Bolts
Use to define the contents of the Size element in slotted hole marks
(workshop). The default value is %BOLT_NUMBER%*D%HOLE.DIAMETER%
(%HOLE.DIAMETER+LONG_HOLE_X%x%HOLE.DIAMETER+LONG_HOLE_Y%) - M
%DIAMETER%x%LENGTH%.

You can use any combination of text and the following options as the value for
this advanced option. Enclose each option in % characters. To use special

Alphabetical list of advanced options 327 S

 characters enter a backslash (\) followed by an ASCII number. You can use the
options in any order, and make calculations.
• BOLT_NUMBER
• DIAMETER
• LENGTH
• HOLE.DIAMETER
• LONG_HOLE_X
• LONG_HOLE_Y
• LONGHOLE_MIN (the shorter of the slotted hole dimensions)
• LONGHOLE_MAX (the longer of the slotted hole dimensions)
• BOLT_STANDARD
• BOLT_MATERIAL
• BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE
• BOLT_COUNTERSUNK
• BOLT_SHORT_NAME
• BOLT_FULL_NAME

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
Category
Marking: Bolts
Use to define the contents of the size element in longhole marks for workshop
bolts in general arrangement drawings.

You can use any combination of text and the following options as the value for
this advanced option. Enclose each option in % characters. To use special
characters enter a backslash (\) followed by an ASCII number. You can use the
options in any order, and make calculations.
• BOLT_NUMBER
• DIAMETER
• LENGTH
• HOLE.DIAMETER

Alphabetical list of advanced options 328 S

 • LONG_HOLE_X
• LONG_HOLE_Y
• LONGHOLE_MIN (the shorter of the slotted hole dimensions)
• LONGHOLE_MAX (the longer of the slotted hole dimensions)
• BOLT_STANDARD
• BOLT_MATERIAL
• BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE
• BOLT_COUNTERSUNK
• BOLT_SHORT_NAME
• BOLT_FULL_NAME

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_COLOR
Category
Drawing Properties
Use this advanced option to set the color of the view shortening symbol. Enter
an integer value. Default is the same as the part color. See below for integers
for different colors.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

Alphabetical list of advanced options 329 S

 XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_LINE_TYPE
Category
Drawing Properties
Use this advanced option to set the line type of the view shortening symbol.
Enter an integer value. Default is a solid line. See below for integer values for
different line types.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_WITH_ZIGZAG
Category
Drawing Properties
Use this advanced option to set the shortening symbol line shape. If you do
not want to use zigzag, set this advanced option to FALSE. TRUE is the default.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

TIP You can control the appearance of the view shortening symbol with the
advanced options XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_COLOR (page 329) and XS_
SHORTENING_SYMBOL_LINE_TYPE (page 330).
To use a view shortening symbol instead of the empty area, set the
advanced options XS_DRAW_VERTICAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_
TO_PARTS (page 148) and XS_DRAW_HORIZONTAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_
SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS (page 145) to TRUE.

See also
Shorten parts view by view

Alphabetical list of advanced options 330 S

 XS_SHOW_HARDWARE_DASHED_LINE_IN_PIXEL_SCALE
Category: Drawing Properties
Set XS_SHOW_HARDWARE_DASHED_LINE_IN_PIXEL_SCALE to FALSE to
activate the functionality, where dashed hardware line scale is the same as in
printed and exported drawings, and the dashed hardware lines work in the
same way as the custom lines.
Dashed hardware line types are scaled by pixels by default (TRUE), which
means that they look the same in all zoom levels.
Dashed hardware lines are the first couple of lines in the line list:

This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XSR_SHOW_INCH_MARK_IN_PROFILE_NAMES
Category
Templates and Symbols

Use to show or hide the inch symbol in the profile name in reports and
templates. When you set the advanced option to TRUE, the profile appears like
this: PL2 1/2"X20". When you set the advanced option to FALSE, the profile
appears like this: PL2 1/2X20. The default value is TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 331 S

 See also
XS_PROFILE_DISPLAY_INCH_MARK_AFTER_FRACTIONS_IN_REPORTS (page 289)

XS_SHOW_NOTIFICATION_REPORT
Category: Modeling Properties

Set to TRUE to run and display a notification report from the whole model
when you open a model.
You can use the notification report to, for example:
• List assignments on all objects (drawings, parts and assemblies).
• Report how many assemblies there are in the model, how many assembly
drawings have been created, and how many of them have been approved
and how many have been issued for production.
The report template used is named notification_report, and you can edit
it in Template Editor. Notification report reports anything you want, not just
assignments. You need to edit the report template to report the things you
need. For example, some environments do not have all attributes available,
like ASSIGNED_TO or ASSIGNED_BY, for parts and assemblies.
If you do not want to display the notification report upon opening a model, set
the advanced option to FALSE, which is the default value.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.
Example of a list of drawing assignments:

Alphabetical list of advanced options 332 S

 XS_SHOW_PERFORM_NUMBERING_MESSAGE
Category
Numbering

Use to show or hide the Perform numbering button in the warning message
Tekla Structures displays if you try to create a drawing without numbering or
when numbering is not up to date.
• By default, this advanced option is set to TRUE and the numbering button
is shown.
• To hide the button, set this advanced option to FALSE.
Consider hiding the numbering button in the multi-user mode, because
unnecessary or unplanned numbering may take a while in large models or
break project numbering. This can occur if Synchronize with master model
(save-numbering-save) check box is not selected in the Numbering setup
dialog box.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_SHOW_PROGRESS_BAR_FOR_PROJECT_STATUS_
VISUALIZATION
Category
Model View
Use for defining whether the progress bar for project status visualization is
displayed or not.
To display the progress bar, set this advanced option to TRUE (default). If you
do not want to display the progress bar, set this advanced option to FALSE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRAWING_LIST
Category
Drawing Properties

Alphabetical list of advanced options 333 S

 Set this advanced option to TRUE to have Tekla Structures include the Revision
mark in the Tekla Structures drawing list instead of the Revision number. The
default value is FALSE. This means that the revision number is shown.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_SHOW_SITE_STUDS_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS
Category
Drawing Properties
Set this advanced option to TRUE (default) to show site studs in assembly
drawings. If you set it to FALSE, the site studs are not shown.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_SHOW_STUDS_IN_WORKSHOP_DRAWINGS
Category
Drawing Properties

Set this advanced option to TRUE to show workshop studs in single-part

drawings. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_SHOW_TEMPLATE_LOG_MESSAGES
Category
Templates and Symbols
Set this advanced option to TRUE to show error messages related to template
attributes in the log file. Set it to FALSE to hide these messages. By default this
advanced option is set to FALSE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 334 S

 XS_SINGLE_CENTERED_SCREW
Category
Single Part View in Assembly Drawing
Use to control the dimensioning of centrally-located bolts in single-part views
included in assembly drawings. Possible values are:
• 0 = Dimensions the centered bolts spread.
• 5 = Dimensions the bolts to the main part center-lines.
• 6 = Overrides bolt overrides the Secondary part bolt internal dimensions
setting for centered bolts. This only applies to bolts located centrally on the
part.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_DIMENSIONS
Category
Single part view in assembly drawing
Use to close dimensions in single-part views included in an assembly drawing.
• 0 = Does not close dimensions
• 1 = Closes dimensions in the x direction and leaves others open. This is the
default value.
• 2 = Closes all dimensions
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_SHORT_DIMENSIONS
Category
Single Part View in Assembly Drawing

Alphabetical list of advanced options 335 S

 Use to close short dimensions in single-part views included in assembly
drawings. The default value is 1. If you do not want to close short dimensions,
enter 0.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_SINGLE_COMBINE_DISTANCE
Category
Single Part View in Assembly Drawing
Use to set a distance for combining dimensions in single-part views included in
assembly drawings. Enter a decimal value, for example 400.0.
By default, this advanced option is not set to any value.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_SINGLE_COMBINE_MIN_DISTANCE
Category
Single Part View in Assembly Drawing
Use to set a minimum distance for combining dimensions in single-part views
included in assembly drawings. Enter a decimal value, for example 200.0.
By default, this advanced option is not set to any value.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_SINGLE_COMBINE_WAY
Category
Single Part view in assembly drawing

Alphabetical list of advanced options 336 S

 Use to combine dimensions in single-part views included in assembly
drawings. The options correspond to the combining order on the General tab
of the Dimensioning Properties dialog box. By default, this advanced option
is not set to any value.
• Option 0 prevents dimensions from being combined.
• Option 1 combines part position dimensions with part internal dimensions,
and bolt group internal dimensions with bolt edge distances. Bolt position
dimensions are not combined with bolt internal dimensions.
• Option 2 combines the part position dimension with part internal
dimensions and bolt group internal dimensions. Bolt internal dimensions
are combined with bolt position dimensions. Edge distances are shown
separately.
• Option 3 combines bolt internal dimensions and position dimensions in
the same dimension line.
• Option 4 combines bolt group position dimensions with part position
dimensions. Part and bolt internal dimensions are not combined with this
option, but bolt internal dimensions are combined with bolt edge
distances.
• Option 5 combines internal dimensions and the position dimension of bolt
groups where there are several bolt groups.
• Option 4.5 uses a combination of option 5 for the main part and a
combination of option 4 for the secondary parts.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_SINGLE_DIMENSION_TYPE
Category
Single Part View in Assembly Drawing
Use to set a dimension type for single-part views included in assembly
drawings. The options are:
• 1 = Relative, point to point dimensions. This is the default value.
• 2 = Absolute, dimensions from a common start point.
• 3 = Relative and absolute, a combination of point to point and common
start point.
• 4 = US absolute, dimensions from a common start point, which include a
running dimension mark (RD).

Alphabetical list of advanced options 337 S

 • 16 = US absolute 2, similar to US absolute, but it changes short dimensions
to relative.
• 35 = Absolute plus short relatives, which is similar to Absolute, but it
changes short dimensions to relative. Also called internal absolute. This
option may show both dimensions, but it does not show relative
dimensions when dimensions are long. This option shows the absolute
dimensions inside the dimension lines.
• 99 = Absolute plus all relatives above the absolutes, which is similar to
Relative and absolute, but it places the relative dimensions above the
absolute.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_SINGLE_DRAW_PART_AS
Category
Single Part View in Assembly Drawing
Use to define how parts appear (their representation type) in single-part views
included in assembly drawings. The options are:
• 1 (default) solid
• 4 workshop solid (round tubes open)
• 2 symbol form
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_SINGLE_EXCLUDE
Category
Single Part View in Assembly Drawing
Use to exclude single-part views from assembly drawings. The options are:
• NONE includes all single part views.
• MAIN_SHAFT includes single part views of all parts, except assembly main
parts.
• ALL_SHAFTS includes single part views of all parts, except those with
another object welded to them (i.e. main parts).
• AUTO (default) includes single part views of all parts, except the longest
main part in the assembly.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 338 S

 • ALL_BUT_MAIN_PART includes single part views of assembly main parts
only.
• STANDARD includes single-part views of all parts, except standard parts. You
can add STANDARD after any of the existing values, for example
MAIN_SHAFT_AND_STANDARD creates single-part drawing from all but main
part or standard parts.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_SINGLE_FORWARD_OFFSET
Category
Single Part View in Assembly Drawing
Use to set the distance Tekla Structures uses to search for the base point of a
dimension in single-part views included in an assembly drawing. If Tekla
Structures does not find a base point (corner) within the defined forward
offset search distance, it uses an edge point. Enter the value as a decimal, for
example 250.0.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_SINGLE_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS
Category
Dimensioning: Parts
Set this advanced option to TRUE (default) to force shape dimensions to be the
same as the dimension type you select. If you do not want to do this, set it to
FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS (page 257)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 339 S

 XS_SINGLE_NO_SHORTEN
Category
Single part view in assembly drawing
Set this advanced option to TRUE to display single-part views in drawings
without shortening parts. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_SINGLE_ORIENTATION_MARK
Category: Single Part View in Assembly Drawing
You can display orientation symbols in single-part views included in assembly
drawings. To show the orientation symbols in single-part views:
1. Click File menu --> Settings --> Advanced options and go to the Single
Part View in Assembly Drawing category.
2. Enter TRUE as the value.
3. In assembly drawing properties, click Layout and go to the Other tab.
4. Set the option Single-part attributes to Current attributes. Tekla
Structures takes the orientation mark settings from the current single-part
drawing properties. If you select other attributes, the visibility of the
orientation symbols is set according to the selected attribute file.
The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_SINGLE_PART_DRAWING_VIEW_TITLE
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to define a title for single-part drawing views in multidrawings. You can
use any of the following to define the title:
• PART_NAME
• PART_MATERIAL
• PART_POS
• ASSEMBLY_POS

Alphabetical list of advanced options 340 S

 • MODEL_NUMBER
• LENGTH, PROFILE
• LENGTH
• BASE_NAME
• NAME
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_SINGLE_PART_EXTREMA
Category
Single Part View in Assembly Drawing
Use to display overall dimensions in single-part views included in assembly
drawings. Enter one of the following values:
• 0 = None
• 2 = Once
• 3 = All
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_SINGLE_PART_SHAPE
Category
Single Part View in Assembly Drawing
Use to show or hide shape dimensions in single part views.
Set to 1 (default) to show shape dimensions in single-part views.
Set to 0 to hide shape dimensions in single-part views.
Tekla Structures automatically creates radius dimensions for curved chamfers
in single-part drawings when you use shape dimensions.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 341 S

 XS_SINGLE_SCALE
Category
Single Part view in Assembly Drawing
Use to set the scale of single-part views included in assembly drawings. Enter a
decimal value. By default, this advanced option is not set to any value.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
To have Tekla Structures use the scale 1/10, enter 10.0.
This advanced option is related to the advanced option
XS_USE_EXISTING_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS_SCALE (page 381).

XS_SINGLE_SCREW_INTERNAL
Category
Single Part View in Assembly Drawing
Use to show or hide internal bolt dimensions in single part views included in
assembly drawings.
Set to 1 to show internal bolt dimensions.
Set to 0 to hide internal bolt dimensions.
By default, this advanced option is not set to any value.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_SINGLE_SCREW_POSITIONS
Category
Single Part View in Assembly Drawing
Use to include position dimensions for bolts in single-part views included in
assembly drawings. Enter one of the following values:
• 0 = Off

Alphabetical list of advanced options 342 S

 • 1 = On
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_SINGLE_USE_WORKING_POINTS
Category
Single Part View in Assembly Drawing
Use to include dimensions from work points in single-part views included in
assembly drawings. Enter one of the following values:
• 0 = None (default)
• 1 = Main part
• 2 = Working points
• 3 = Both
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_SINGLE_X_DIMENSION_TYPE
Category
Single Part View in Assembly Drawing
Use to set the dimension type for single-part views included in assembly
drawings. These are otherwise like straight dimensions set with the advanced
option XS_SINGLE_X_DIMENSION_TYPE but they override the straight setting
for horizontal dimensions.
• 0 = Tekla Structures uses straight dimension settings
• 1 = Relative, point to point dimensions. This is the default value.
• 2 = Absolute, dimensions from a common start point.
• 3 = Relative and absolute, a combination of point to point and common
start point.
• 4 = US absolute, dimensions from a common start point, which include a
running dimension mark (RD).
• 16 = US absolute 2, similar to US absolute, but it changes short dimensions
to relative.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 343 S

 • 35 = Absolute plus short relatives, which is similar to Absolute, but it
changes short dimensions to relative. Also called internal absolute. This
option may show both dimensions, but it does not show relative
dimensions when dimensions are long. This option shows the absolute
dimensions inside the dimension lines.
• 99 = Absolute plus all relatives above the absolutes, which is similar to
Relative and absolute, but it places the relative dimensions above the
absolute.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
Category
Marking: Bolts
Use to define the contents of the Size element in bolt marks (site). The default
value is %BOLT_NUMBER%*D%HOLE.DIAMETER%.

You can use any combination of text and the following options as the value for
this advanced option. Enclose each option in % characters. To use special
characters enter a backslash (\) followed by an ASCII number. You can use the
options in any order, and make calculations.
• BOLT_NUMBER
• DIAMETER
• LENGTH
• HOLE.DIAMETER
• LONG_HOLE_X
• LONG_HOLE_Y
• LONGHOLE_MIN (the shorter of the slotted hole dimensions)
• LONGHOLE_MAX (the longer of the slotted hole dimensions)
• BOLT_STANDARD
• BOLT_MATERIAL
• BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE
• BOLT_COUNTERSUNK
• BOLT_SHORT_NAME

Alphabetical list of advanced options 344 S

 • BOLT_FULL_NAME

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
Category
Marking: Bolts
Use to define the contents of the size element in bolt marks for site bolts in
general arrangement drawings.

You can use any combination of text and the following options as the value for
this advanced option. Enclose each option in % characters. To use special
characters enter a backslash (\) followed by an ASCII number. You can use the
options in any order, and make calculations.
• BOLT_NUMBER
• DIAMETER
• LENGTH
• HOLE.DIAMETER
• LONG_HOLE_X
• LONG_HOLE_Y
• LONGHOLE_MIN (the shorter of the slotted hole dimensions)
• LONGHOLE_MAX (the longer of the slotted hole dimensions)
• BOLT_STANDARD
• BOLT_MATERIAL
• BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE
• BOLT_COUNTERSUNK
• BOLT_SHORT_NAME
• BOLT_FULL_NAME

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

Alphabetical list of advanced options 345 S

 XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (page 346)
XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (page 348)

XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
Category
Marking: Bolts
Use to define the contents of the Size element in hole marks (site). For
example, to show bolt number and hole diameter in the mark, enter
%BOLT_NUMBER%*D%HOLE.DIAMETER%.

You can use any combination of text and the following options as the value for
this advanced option. Enclose each option in % characters. To use special
characters enter a backslash (\) followed by an ASCII number. You can use the
options in any order, and make calculations.
• BOLT_NUMBER
• DIAMETER
• LENGTH
• HOLE.DIAMETER
• LONG_HOLE_X
• LONG_HOLE_Y
• LONGHOLE_MIN (the shorter of the slotted hole dimensions)
• LONGHOLE_MAX (the longer of the slotted hole dimensions)
• BOLT_STANDARD
• BOLT_MATERIAL
• BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE
• BOLT_COUNTERSUNK
• BOLT_SHORT_NAME
• BOLT_FULL_NAME

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

Alphabetical list of advanced options 346 S

 XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
Category
Marking: Bolts
Use to define the contents of the size element in hole marks for site bolts in
general arrangement drawings.

You can use any combination of text and the following options as the value for
this advanced option. Enclose each option in % characters. To use special
characters enter a backslash (\) followed by an ASCII number. You can use the
options in any order, and make calculations.
• BOLT_NUMBER
• DIAMETER
• LENGTH
• HOLE.DIAMETER
• LONG_HOLE_X
• LONG_HOLE_Y
• LONGHOLE_MIN (the shorter of the slotted hole dimensions)
• LONGHOLE_MAX (the longer of the slotted hole dimensions)
• BOLT_STANDARD
• BOLT_MATERIAL
• BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE
• BOLT_COUNTERSUNK
• BOLT_SHORT_NAME
• BOLT_FULL_NAME

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (page 345)

XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (page 348)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 347 S

 XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
Category
Marking: Bolts

Use to define the contents of the Size element in slotted hole marks (site). The
default value is %BOLT_NUMBER%*D%HOLE.DIAMETER%(%HOLE.DIAMETER
+LONG_HOLE_X%x%HOLE.DIAMETER+LONG_HOLE_Y%).

You can use any combination of text and the following options as the value for
this advanced option. Enclose each option in % characters. To use special
characters enter a backslash (\) followed by an ASCII number. You can use the
options in any order, and make calculations.
• BOLT_NUMBER
• DIAMETER
• LENGTH
• HOLE.DIAMETER
• LONG_HOLE_X
• LONG_HOLE_Y
• LONGHOLE_MIN (the shorter of the slotted hole dimensions)
• LONGHOLE_MAX (the longer of the slotted hole dimensions)
• BOLT_STANDARD
• BOLT_MATERIAL
• BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE
• BOLT_COUNTERSUNK
• BOLT_SHORT_NAME
• BOLT_FULL_NAME

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
Category
Marking: Bolts
Use to define the contents of the size element in longhole marks for site bolts
in general arrangement drawings.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 348 S

 You can use any combination of text and the following options as the value for
this advanced option. Enclose each option in % characters. To use special
characters enter a backslash (\) followed by an ASCII number. You can use the
options in any order, and make calculations.
• BOLT_NUMBER
• DIAMETER
• LENGTH
• HOLE.DIAMETER
• LONG_HOLE_X
• LONG_HOLE_Y
• LONGHOLE_MIN (the shorter of the slotted hole dimensions)
• LONGHOLE_MAX (the longer of the slotted hole dimensions)
• BOLT_STANDARD
• BOLT_MATERIAL
• BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE
• BOLT_COUNTERSUNK
• BOLT_SHORT_NAME
• BOLT_FULL_NAME

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (page 346)

XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (page 345)

XS_SNAPSHOT_DIRECTORY

Category: File Locations

Use this advanced option to define the folder where Tekla Structures stores
screenshots when you go to the View tab (Views in drawings) and click
Screenshot --> Screenshot . If you do not define a path, Tekla Structures
stores screenshots in the current model folder. The default value is .
\screenshots\.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 349 S

 If the defined folder does not exist, Tekla Structures automatically creates it
when you take a screenshot.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Example
c:\temp\

XS_SOLID_BUFFER_SIZE

Category: Speed and accuracy

Use this advanced option to define the size of the solid object buffer. The
default value is 50000. The buffer size setting depends on your environment.
Tekla Structures creates a buffer in system RAM to store the solid
representation of parts it creates during certain processes. For example, Tekla
Structures creates solid objects when numbering a model. When this buffer
fills up, Tekla Structures erases the contents in order to continue using the
buffer.
When you increase the buffer size, Tekla Structures keeps more solid objects in
the memory, and does not have to recreate them so often. Increasing this
value also increases the memory used by the processes. Decreasing this value
decreases the memory requirements, but also the performance as Tekla
Structures has to recreate solid objects more often.
Testing various settings is the best way to optimize the solid object buffer size.
Remember that opening Tekla Structures windows uses some RAM, and that
other programs also use RAM for various processes.
For optimum performance for large models under restricted memory
conditions, consider having the solid cache size in between 0.2 - 5 * the
number of parts in your model. To find out the number of parts in the model,
go to the Edit tab and click Inquire --> Model size .
In 64-bit machines you do not usually have to change the default value. If the
amount of memory is large, keep the buffer size at least as large as the
number of parts in the model.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 350 S

 XS_SOLID_USE_HIGHER_ACCURACY
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.

NOTE This advanced option increases the number of faces in solid objects, which
slows down Tekla Structures. We recommend using this advanced option only
when needed.

When you set this advanced option to TRUE in the options.ini file in the
model folder:
• When you have set part representation to Exact in the Display dialog box,
parts are shown with roundings. Also weld polygons include profile
roundings.
• When the advanced option XS_DISPLAY_FILLET_EDGES (page 123) is set to
TRUE, lines are shown between the roundings and straight segments of
parts.
• Part volume, area and net weight is and are closer to real manufactured
values.
Set this advanced option to TRUE in the options.ini file in model folder. The
default value is FALSE.

Limitations
• Do not activate this advanced option when you create NC/DSTV files,
because it can lead to inaccuracies in the exported data.
• Do not activate this advanced option when you create single part or
assembly drawings, because it can lead to unnecessary dimension line
creation.
• In components, some stiffeners might bite into flanges of columns or
beams.
• Some bolt edge distances are not correctly calculated.

See also
Show parts with high accuracy
XS_CS_CHAMFER_DIVIDE_ANGLE (page 94)

XS_STACKED_FRACTION_TYPE
Category
Imperial units
Use to define the appearance of fractions. You can use stacked fractions in
drawings, text, marks etc., but not in templates. The options are (from left to
right in the illustration):

Alphabetical list of advanced options 351 S

 • NOT_STACKED
• DASH
• SLASH
• WITHOUT_SLASH
If you do not want to use stacked fractions, set this advanced option to
NOT_STACKED, (default) or use a backslash character ( \ ) before the slash
character ( / ) in the text (e.g. 1\ /16).
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_STANDARD_GUSSET_WIDTH_TOLERANCE
Category
Components
Use to define the tolerance between the actual and standard widths of gusset
plates created using modeling tools or connections. Tekla Structures uses a
standard plate file to define the default plate width including the tolerance
value. Enter the value in millimeters, for example 1.0.
Components that use this advanced option are:
• Welded gusset (10)
• Bolted gusset (11)
• Tube gusset (20)
• Corner tube gusset (56)
• Corner bolted gusset (57)
• Wraparound gusset (58)
• Hollow brace wraparound gusset (59)
• Wraparound gusset cross (60)
• Gusseted cross (62)
• Corner wrapped gusset (63)
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 352 S

 XS_STANDARD_STIFFENER_WIDTH_TOLERANCE
Category
Components
Use to define the tolerance between the actual and standard widths of
stiffener plates created by Haunch (40), Stiffeners (1003) and Multiple
stiffeners (1064). Enter the value in millimeters. The advanced option is set to
10 by default.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_STD_LOCALE
Category
This advanced option is system specific and should be set in the
lang_<CurrentLanguage>.ini files.

Use this advanced option to be able to open drawings in a situation where you
have English Tekla Structures and multi-byte locale Windows operating system.
Set it to one of the following values in the teklastructures.ini file,
depending on the locale of your operating system:
• set XS_STD_LOCALE=japanese
• set XS_STD_LOCALE=chinese-traditional
• set XS_STD_LOCALE=chinese-simplified
• set XS_STD_LOCALE=russian_us.1251
• set XS_STD_LOCALE=korean_korea.949
If you set XS_STD_LOCALE to any other value, or leave the value out, English
locale is used by default.

NOTE For more information on locales, see https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-

us/library/ms903928.aspx.

XS_STD_PART_MODEL
Category
Numbering
To use standard parts in numbering, enter the standard part model folder
path. A standard-part model contains only standard parts with specific part

Alphabetical list of advanced options 353 S

 prefixes. As Tekla Structures carries out the numbering, it compares all of the
parts in the current model to the standard-part model. The numbering applies
any part position numbers (only the part prefix) found in the standard-part
model to all identical parts found in the current model.To not use standard
parts, leave the value out.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
XS_STD_PART_MODEL=C:\TeklaStructuresModels\StandardParts\

See also

XS_STEEL1_TS_PAGE_9_EXTENSION
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
Used for localizing the contents of Component page 9. By default standard
component settings are used. For example, in the US Imperial environment,
you can use the value _usimp.

XS_STEEL1_TS_PAGE_10_EXTENSION
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
Used for localizing the contents of Component page 10 (catalog steps in stair
components). By default standard component settings are used.
Step profiles are coming from steps.dat file, which is environment specific
and located in ..\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\<version>
\environments\<environment>\system folder. To get a profile visible in
the catalogue step/step profile list in the Stairs component dialog box, the
names of the profiles have to be listed also in the environment-specific .inp
file in the \TeklaStructures\<version>\applications\steel1-folder.
There are different files for each environment:
ts_page_10_australasia.inp, ts_page_10_austria.inp,
ts_page_10_china.inp, etc. For example, in the US Imperial environment,
you can use the value _usimp for this advanced option.
Affected stair components and options:
• Stairs (S71): Stair setup tab: Catalogue step

Alphabetical list of advanced options 354 S

 • Stairs (S82): Parameters tab: Step profile

For Stairs S71, the Step type must be set to Catalogue step, to be able to
select the step profile from the Catalogue step list.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 355 S

 XS_STORE_MULTIPLE_BAK_FILES
Category
File Locations
Set this advanced option to TRUE to store multiple versions of the backup copy
of the model database. The default value is FALSE.
A new copy of the .bak backup file is created each time the model is saved.
The name of each backup file includes the date and time the file was created.
Old or unnecessary files need to be deleted manually.

XS_SUPERSCRIPT_HEIGHT_FACTOR
Category
Dimensioning: General
Use this advanced option to set the scale factor for the text height in
superscripts used in dimensions. The default is 0.7.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 356 S

 Examples

Example number The advanced option is set to

0.7

1.5

0.5

XS_SUPERSCRIPT_USED_IN_DRAWING_TEXTS
Category
Dimensioning: General
Set to TRUE to enable the showing of superscript in texts in drawings, and to
FALSE to disable it. The default is TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_SUPPORT_EMAIL_ADDRESS
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
This advanced option is system specific and is read from environment files.
Generally, there is no need to modify system-specific settings. Do not modify
them if you are not an administrator.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 357 S

 This advanced option defines the e-mail address of your local support. Use (at)
instead of @ in the e-mail address.
The address is automatically added as the e-mail recipient when you contact
the local Tekla support through File menu --> Help --> Contact Tekla
support.

Example
set
XS_SUPPORT_EMAIL_ADDRESS=TeklaStructures.Support.FI(at)tekla.
com

XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR
Category: Numbering
Use to define the order in which multidrawing numbers, and part or assembly
numbers appear in multi-numbers. The options are: NONE, ASSEMBLIES,
PARTS and ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS. The default value is
ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
If this advanced option is set to PARTS, the presentation of multinumbers for
parts is 101a, not a101.

See also
XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR (page 384)

XS_SWITCH_POS_NUMBERS_FOR
Category
Numbering
Changes the prefix you define for Tekla Structures assembly and/or part marks
to a suffix (for example, A1 becomes 1A). The options are NONE, PARTS,
ASSEMBLIES, and ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS. The default value is
ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 358 S

 SYMEDHOME
Category
Templates and symbols
Points to the location of the symbol editor message file. The default value is
%XSBIN%.
This advanced option is system specific and is read from environment files.
Generally, there is no need to modify system-specific settings. Do not modify
them if you are not an administrator.

XS_SYSTEM
Category: File locations

NOTE This advanced option is only meant for administrators.

It points to the location of the Tekla Structures system folder. The system
folder is used for storing files that define default settings. These include the
standard, data (.dat), property, drawing, template, and report files, for
example.
Specifying more than one system folder
You can specify more than one system folder. For example, you can subdivide
the system folder on the basis of roles, to define specific settings for each role.
To do this, enter the file paths of the folders, separated by semicolons.
Example:
set XS_SYSTEM=%XSDATADIR%\environments\default\system
\Concrete\precast\;%XSDATADIR%\environments\default\system
\Concrete\;%XSDATADIR%\environments\default\system\;
%XSDATADIR%\environments\common\system\ConstructionManagement
\;%XSDATADIR%\environments\common\system\precast\;%XSDATADIR%
\environments\common\system\)
Tekla Structures searches the folders from right to left. If files with identical
names exist in several folders, the one that is read last will be used. In the
example above, the files found from default\system\Concrete\precast\
will be used instead of the files with identical names in common\system\ or in
any other folder mentioned before the last folder.
This is a system-specific advanced option and cannot be changed.

See also
Folder search order

Alphabetical list of advanced options 359 S

3.19 T

TEMPLATE_FONT_CONVERSION_FILE
Category
Templates and Symbols
Points to the location of the template font conversion file
template_fonts.cnv. By default the path is %DXK_FONTPATH%
\template_fonts.cnv meaning, for example, C:\ProgramData\Tekla
Structures\<version>\\environments\common\fonts\
\template_fonts.cnv.
This advanced option is system specific and is read from environment files.
Generally, there is no need to modify system-specific settings. Do not modify
them if you are not an administrator.

XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY
Category: File locations
Points to the folder containing template (*.tpl) and report (*.rpt) files.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.
You can use semicolon-separated lists of folder paths.

See also
Folder search order

XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY_SYSTEM
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
This advanced option is system specific and is read from environment files.
Generally, there is no need to modify system-specific settings. Do not modify
them if you are not an administrator.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 360 T

 This advanced option is used in environment initialization files to define the
location of environment-specific templates (.tpl) and reports (.rpt). You can
use semicolon-separated lists of folder paths.
Other users than administrators can define local folders using the advanced
options XS_FIRM, XS_PROJECT and XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY.

Example
set XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY_SYSTEM=%XSDATADIR%\environments
\australasia\template\

See also
Project and firm folders
XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY (page 360)
XS_FIRM (page 200)
XS_PROJECT (page 290)

XS_TEMPLATE_MARK_SUB_DIRECTORY
Category
File Locations
Use this advanced option to change the name of the subfolder where Tekla
Structures searches the templates that you use in marks. When you are adding
a template in a mark, the available templates are displayed in the Mark
content - template dialog box.
By default, mark is the value for this advanced option. You can create another
folder with another name and save your mark templates there, and enter the
name of that folder as the value for this advanced option.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
Example of using another folder:
XS_TEMPLATE_MARK_SUB_DIRECTORY=my_mark_tpl
The mark templates are in this example case searched from the following
folders in the following order:
%XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY%\my_mark_tpl
ModelDir\my_mark_tpl
%XS_PROJECT%\my_mark_tpl
%XS_FIRM%\my_mark_tpl

Alphabetical list of advanced options 361 T

 %XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY_SYSTEM%\my_mark_tpl
%XS_SYSTEM%\my_mark_tpl

See also

XS_TEXT_ORIENTATION_EPSILON
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to define the point where text or dimension mark text that is positioned
almost vertically is turned so that it is faced the other way around.
The default is 0.1, which is 5.72958 degrees. For example, if you want the text
to change (flip) at 100 degrees (or 10 off 90), you need to set this advanced
option to to .175.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example

See also

TEXT_X_SIZE
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
Use to change font size in the Template Editor. The default value is 3.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 362 T

 This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Example
set TEXT_X_SIZE=3

TEXT_Y_SIZE
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
Use to change font size in the Template Editor. The default value is 5.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Example
TEXT_Y_SIZE=5

XS_THICKNESS_PARAMETER_IS_CROSS_SECTION_THICKNESS
Category
Profiles
Use to define the method to measure the thickness of parts (flanges, plates,
walls and so on). When set to FALSE, the thickness parameter of the profile
defines the actual thickness. When set to TRUE, the thickness parameter
defines the cross section thickness (which is not same as the actual thickness if
the part is sloped).
The default value is FALSE. We recommend that you use this value.
The change applies to the following profile types:
• SPD
• EPD
• I
• RHS
• PD
• P

Alphabetical list of advanced options 363 T

 XS_TPLED_INI
Category
File Locations
Defines the location of the tpled.ini file.
This is a system-specific advanced option.

Example
..\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\<version>\\environments
\default\template\settings\

XS_TRY_TO_KEEP_LOCATION_IN_FREEPLACING
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to fine-tune the functionality of the Arrange Drawing Objects command
in drawings.
This advanced option is set to TRUE by default, meaning that the Arrange
Drawing Objects command tries to find a new location for the selected object
as close to the current location as possible. If the current location is free, the
object is not moved at all.
When this advanced option is set to FALSE, the Arrange Drawing Objects
command works the same way as Ignore Current Locations.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_LIMIT_THICKNESS
Category
Drawing Properties
Use this advanced option to define how Tekla Structures draws tubes.
Set to a decimal value. Tekla Structures individually draws the inner and outer
surfaces of tubes that are thicker than this value.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

NOTE If the advanced option XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_WITH_CUT_HOLES is set to

TRUE, this advanced option has no effect.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 364 T

 See also
XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_WITH_CUT_HOLES (page 366)

XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_PAPER_THICKNESS
Category
Drawing Properties
This advanced option lengthens unfolded tubes by the following multiplication
factor:
factor = 1.0+2*XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_PAPER_THICKNESS/diameter
The default value is 0.0.

NOTE If the advanced option XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_WITH_CUT_HOLES is set to

TRUE, this advanced option has no effect.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
Tube d=219
When you set the advanced option to 0, the unwrapped length of the tube
(1.0*PI*diameter) = 688.
When the advanced option is set to 10, the length of the unfolded tube =
factor * diameter* PI = (1.0 + 2*10/219) * 219 * 3.14 = 751

See also
XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_WITH_CUT_HOLES (page 366)

XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_USE_PLATE_PROFILE_TYPE_IN_NC
Category
CNC
To use the plate profile type B in the NC file header data for unwrapped round
tubes, set this advanced option to TRUE. To use RO for round tubes, set it to
FALSE. The default value is TRUE.
This advanced option only works for straight tubes, not for polybeam tubes.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 365 T

 WARNING Use this advanced option only when you have set the advanced
option XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_WITH_CUT_HOLES to TRUE.

See also
XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_WITH_CUT_HOLES (page 366)

XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_WITH_CUT_HOLES
Category
Drawing Properties
Set to TRUE to include cut holes in workshop drawings or NC files of
unwrapped CHS (circular hollow section) profiles.
This advanced option is set to TRUE by default. If you set it to FALSE, then the
previously existing unwrapping method is applied.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 366 T

 NOTE If you set this advanced option to TRUE, the advanced options
XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_LIMIT_THICKNESS and
XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_PAPER_THICKNESS have no effect.
Note also that using this advanced option does not affect conical tube
profiles.

See also
XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_LIMIT_THICKNESS (page 364)
XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_PAPER_THICKNESS (page 365)
XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_USE_PLATE_PROFILE_TYPE_IN_NC (page 365)

3.20 U

XS_UEL_IMPORT_FOLDER
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file. It is system-
specific.

You can collect all the .uel files exported from your custom components and
sketched profiles in folders, and then automatically import them to new
models. Use this advanced option to point to the folders which contain
the .uel files. Note that you must still manually export the desired custom
components and sketched profiles to these folders.
You can point to several folders if you separate the folders with a semicolon.
For example:
set XS_UEL_IMPORT_FOLDER=%XSDATADIR%\environments\common
\components_sketches\;%XSDATADIR%\environments\default\components_sketches
\;%XSDATADIR%\environments\usimp\components_sketches\precast\

When this advanced option is set (preferably in the user.ini file), and you
create a new model, Tekla Structures automatically imports the .uel files to
the model.

NOTE To take the custom components and related sketched profiles in use
in existing models, import the .uel files through the Applications &
components catalog. If the .uel files only contain sketched profiles,
import them through the profile catalog.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 367 U

 XS_UNDERLINE_AFTER_POSITION_NUMBER_IN_HARDSTAMP
Category
CNC
Set the advanced option to TRUE to have an underscore (_) after the part
position (without an assembly position) in a hardstamp.
The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_UNFOLDING_ANGLE_DIM_FORMAT
Category
Dimensioning: Unfolding
Use to define the format of angle text by entering an integer 0 - 7. The default
value is 1. Enter one of the following values:
• 0 = ###
• 1 = ###[.#]
• 2 = ###.#
• 3 = ###[.##]
• 4 = ###.##
• 5 = ###[.###]
• 6 = ###.###
• 7 = ### #/#
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_UNFOLDING_DONT_USE_NEUTRAL_AXIS_FOR_RADIUS
Category
Dimensioning: Unfolding
Set this advanced option to FALSE to use the neutral axis of the part to
calculate the bending radius in unfolded views. Set this advanced option to
TRUE to calculate the bending radius from the inner surface of the part. The
default value is TRUE.. This advanced option only affects curved polybeams.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 368 U

 This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.
Note that this advanced option does not work if XS_USE_OLD_POLYBEAM_
LENGTH_CALCULATION (page 389) is set to TRUE.

NOTE The settings in the unfold_corner_ratios.inp override this

advanced option.

XS_UNFOLDING_ANGLE_DIM_PRECISION
Category
Dimensioning: unfolding
Use to define the precision of angle text. Enter an integer 1 - 10. The default
value is 10. Enter one of the following values:
• 1 = 0.00
• 2 = 0.50
• 3 = 0.33
• 4 = 0.25
• 5 = 1/8
• 6 = 1/16
• 7 = 1/32
• 8 = 1/10
• 9 = 1/100
• 10 = 1/1000
Values 1 - 4 are intended for defining precision with rounding. For example,
with precision 0.33 the actual dimension 50.40 is shown as 50.33. Values 5 - 7
are used for imperial units only. Values 8 - 10 are used for defining precision
without rounding.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_UNFOLDING_PLANE_EPSILON
Category
Dimensioning: Unfolding

Alphabetical list of advanced options 369 U

 Use to specify the limit for checking if all section points are on the same plane.
If the points are on the same plane, the part can be unfolded. Enter the value
in millimeters.The default value is 0.01 mm.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_UNIQUE_NUMBERS
Category
Numbering
Set this advanced option to TRUE to have Tekla Structures create unique
position numbers for all parts when numbering, even if they are equal. The
default value is FALSE.

See also
XS_UNIQUE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBERS (page 370)

XS_UNIQUE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBERS
Category
Numbering
Set to TRUE if you want Tekla Structures to create unique position numbers for
all assemblies when numbering, even if they are identical.
The default value is FALSE.
Parts are still numbered the same way as before.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_UNIQUE_NUMBERS (page 370)

XS_UPDATE_MARK_PLACING_IN_DRAWING
Category
Marking: Parts
Updates the position of updated marks in specific drawing types. Use the
letters in the following table to specify the drawing types.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 370 U

 Letter Drawing type
W Single-part drawings
A Assembly drawings
M Multidrawings
G General arrangement
drawings
C Cast unit drawings

The default value is AMW, which means that the mark position is updated in
assembly drawings, multidrawings and single-part drawings.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
To update the position of updated part marks in single-part, assembly, multi-,
and general arrangement drawings:
XS_UPDATE_MARK_PLACING_IN_DRAWING=WAMG

XS_UPDATE_MARKS_IN_FROZEN_DRAWINGS
Category
Marking: General
Set this advanced option to TRUE to automatically update marks in frozen
drawings and create new marks if new parts have been added. If you set it to
FALSE, Tekla Structures only updates parts and bolts. The default value is
TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_UPSIDE_DOWN_TEXT_ALLOWED
Category: Concrete detailing
Set this advanced option to TRUE to have the text reading direction indicate
the part installation direction. If there are similar asymmetric parts with
different orientation, some part marks may be placed upside down. When you
set the advanced option to FALSE (default), none of the part marks are created
upside down, so the text reading direction does not indicate the installation
direction. If you set it to
• CONCRETE, only concrete marks and texts are upside down

Alphabetical list of advanced options 371 U

 • STEEL, only steel marks and texts are upside down
• TIMBER, only timber marks and texts are upside down
You can also use combinations of values separated by a comma, for example,
CONCRETE,STEEL.
Example of the mark orientation when the advanced option is set to TRUE.

This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.
For more information about indicating part orientation with marks, for
example, see Indicate part orientation.

XS_USABSOLUTE_TO_RELATIVE_LIMIT
Category
Dimensioning: General
Use to affect the distance within which the first and last US Absolute
dimension lines appear as relative. By default, this advanced option is not set
to any value.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 372 U

 Example
XS_USABSOLUTE_TO_RELATIVE_LIMIT=1000
In this example, Tekla Structures will change first and last dimension lines
shorter than 1000 mm to Relative dimensions. Dimension lines greater or
equal to 1000 mm will remain US Absolute dimensions.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_USABSOLUTE2_TO_RELATIVE_LENGTH_FACTOR
Category
Dimensioning: General
Tekla Structures multiplies the space required by US Absolute2 dimension text
by this value. If the result is larger than the actual dimension, Tekla Structures
changes the dimension type to relative. The default value is 1.5.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_EXTREMA_IN_MARK_PLACING
Category - Marking: General
Use this advanced option to place part marks on top of the assembly instead
of on top of the main part. First create a drawing view filter and enter the
name of the filter as the value. This advanced option can only be used for
main parts of assemblies or cast units, not for secondary parts.
The example below uses part names as the filtering criteria.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 373 U

 When you (re)create the drawing, the mark place changes from this:

To this:

Alphabetical list of advanced options 374 U

 The supported mark placing types are shown below.

XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR
Category: Numbering
Use this advanced option if you want the assembly/cast unit number to be
also the main part number for the corresponding assembly/cast unit. Use one
of the following options:
• Leave this option blank for each part in the assembly to get a part number,
regardless of whether the assembly contains only one main part or several
parts. Click the link to see an example of one part only or of multiple parts.
• Set to MAIN_PART to always assign the assembly or cast unit number to the
main part of an assembly or cast unit. All other parts, if any, will use part

Alphabetical list of advanced options 375 U

 number. Click the link to see an example of one part only or of multiple
parts.
• Set to LOOSE_PART to assign the assembly or cast unit number to the main
part of an assembly or cast unit that has no other parts. If the assembly or
cast unit has several parts, the main part will receive a part number. Click
the link to see an example of one part only or of multiple parts.
The assembly prefix replaces the part prefix.

NOTE Do not use the same prefix for parts and assemblies.

This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

XS_USE_BOLT_DISTANCE_IN_NOTCH_CALCULATIONS
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
Set this advanced option to TRUE to use automatic notch height calculation
according to bolt distance. This affects connections 129 and 184.

XS_USE_COLOR_DRAWINGS
Category
Drawing View
Changes the default color mode in drawings when the Tekla Structures is
started. If you set this advanced option to FALSE or leave the value out,
drawings are black and white (default). Set it to GRAY to have gray scale
drawings. Set it to any other value, for example, COLOR, TRUE or 1, to use
colors in drawings.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also

XS_USE_CONVEX_PROTECT_AREA
Category
Drawing Properties

Alphabetical list of advanced options 376 U

 Set this advanced option to TRUE to automatically calculate the protection area
more accurately along the faces of parts, so that part marks can be placed
inside the profile also for curved hollow sections. To protect the area the
object covers, enter FALSE. The default value is TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_USE_CROSS_FOR_OPENING_SYMBOL
Category
Drawing Properties
Use XS_USE_CROSS_FOR_OPENING_SYMBOL to select how the openings/
recesses are shown and the symbols to be used.
The default value is TRUE, which means that a cross is used as the opening/
recess symbol.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Value Description
TRUE Crosses are used as symbols for openings as follows:
This is the
default.

If the recess is on the front face of the part, recess

symbol and bounding lines are shown as unbroken
lines as follows:

If the recess is on the back face of the part, recess

symbol and bounding lines are shown as dashed
lines as follows:

Alphabetical list of advanced options 377 U

 Value Description
FALSE Shadows are used as symbols for openings as
follows:

If the recess is on the front face of the part, there is

no recess symbol, and bounding lines are shown as
unbroken lines as follows:

If the recess is on the back face of the part, there is

no recess symbol, and bounding lines are shown as
dashed lines as follows:

XS_USE_DRAWING_NAME_AS_PLOT_FILE_NAME
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
Set this advanced option to TRUE to prevent Tekla Structures from converting
the dot in the drawing name to an underscore in the plot file name when
printing, for example B.1 to B_1. The default value is FALSE.

XS_USE_DYNAMIC_ROW_WIDTH_IN_TEMPLATES
Category
This advanced option is available only in initialization files.
Set this advanced option to TRUE to fit the template row width dynamically
according to the content, for example, drawing frames according to the
different drawing sizes. The content must always be located on the right. If you
set this advanced option to FALSE, automating fitting of the templates rows is
not in use.
The default value is FALSE.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 378 U

 NOTE This functionality is not available in drawing part mark templates.

XS_USE_DRAWING_NAME_AS_PLOT_TITLE
Category
Printing

Alphabetical list of advanced options 379 U

 Set this advanced option to TRUE when you want to use the drawing name as
the print title, for example, when printing to a .pdf file or to a Windows
printer. To use the general Tekla Structures print title, such as "Tekla Structures
drawing - A [T.100]", set it to FALSE. The default value is TRUE.
As a result, the Windows printer dialog box, and the pdf file name will contain
the drawing print file name you define with the advanced options listed below.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_A (page 159)
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_C (page 161)
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_W (page 159)
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_G (page 160)
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_M (page 161)

XS_USE_EIGHT_COLORS_IN_MODELING_VIEWS
Category
Model View

Set to TRUE to disable additional colors in modeling views. The default value is
FALSE.

XS_USE_EXACT_SOLID_FOR_CLASH_CHECK
Category
Speed and Accuracy

If you set this advanced option to FALSE (default), normal solid accuracy is
used in clash checking. If you need to use high solid accuracy in clash checking,
set this advanced option to TRUE. This advanced option is model specific.

WARNING Using high accuracy, that is, setting this advanced option to TRUE,
slows down the clash checking process, and there is a higher risk
of solid errors.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 380 U

 XS_USE_EXISTING_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS_IN_ASSEMBLY_
DRAWINGS
Category
Single Part View in Assembly Drawing
You can specify whether to create new views or to use views from existing
single part drawings in assembly drawings. When this advanced option is set
to TRUE, existing single part drawing views will be used in assembly drawings.
When set to FALSE, or if there is no existing single part drawing for a given
part, a new view will be created according to the Single-part attributes
setting ( Assembly drawing properties --> Layout --> Other ). The default
value is FALSE.

NOTE This setting only works with assembly drawings, not with
multidrawings

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_USE_EXISTING_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS_SCALE
Category: Single Part View in Assembly Drawing
If you do not want to maintain the scale of the existing single part drawing
included in an assembly drawing, set the advanced option
XS_USE_EXISTING_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS_SCALE to FALSE. When you do
this, the scale of the included single part drawing will follow the scale of the
assembly drawing, or advanced option XS_SINGLE_SCALE (page 341) if it is
set.
Tekla Structures maintains the original scale in a single part drawing in an
assembly drawing when you set the layout to include single part drawings, and
set the option
XS_USE_EXISTING_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS
(page 380) is set to TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_USE_FLAT_DESIGNATION
Category
Plate Work

Alphabetical list of advanced options 381 U

 Set this advanced option to TRUE to use flat bar designation. To turn the
advanced option off, set it to FALSE. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_USE_LINECLIP

Category: Printing
Set this advanced option to TRUE to clip continuous lines at objects in drawing
printouts (paper or .pdf). Set to FALSE to display continuous lines, for
example, to run the line through text or drawing marks. The default value is
TRUE.
XS_USE_LINECLIP is set to TRUE:

XS_USE_LINECLIP is set to FALSE:

Note that this setting only affects drawings printed using the old printing
functionality (XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG=TRUE), and it does not completely
match what you see in drawings in Tekla Structures. If
XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG is set to FALSE (default), then XS_USE_LINECLIP
has currently no effect, and the lines are clipped in the same way in drawings
and in printouts.
This is how the line clipping is displayed in drawings currently:

This is how it is printed:

Alphabetical list of advanced options 382 U

 This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

XS_USE_LONG_POINTS_IN_DIMENSIONING
Category
Dimensioning: Parts
Sometimes there may be a need to dimension the parts in assembly or single-
part drawings so that copes or notches are not taken into account, for
example, to estimate the space needed for transportation.
If you set this advanced option to TRUE, the overall dimensions are calculated
to long points. If you set it to FALSE, the overall dimensions are calculated to
cope points. FALSE is the default.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

Example
In the example below, the upper dimension (the red one) shows the result
when this advanced option is set to TRUE, and the lower one when it is set to
FALSE (the green one).

WARNING Using this advanced option will not affect the length of the part in
the BOM, reports, or CNC.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 383 U

 XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR
Category: Numbering
Use to allow the prefixes used in part and assembly numbering to be used in
multidrawing numbers. Enter any of the following options: NONE, ASSEMBLIES,
PARTS, and ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS. The default value is
ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
If you set this advanced option to PARTS, the multinumbers for parts appear
as 101Pa.

See also
XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR (page 384)
XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR (page 253)

XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR
Category: Numbering
Use to define if multinumbering affects assemblies, parts, or both. Part and
assembly numbering must be based on drawing numbers to use
multinumbering.
The options are:
• NONE: No assemblies or parts will get multi-numbered, even if linked to
multidrawings.
• ASSEMBLIES: Assemblies will get multinumbered, but parts will not. This is
the default US Imperial Steel setting.
• PARTS: Only parts will get multinumbered. Common if you are creating
drawings for assemblies one per sheet, and handling parts on large
collection sheets grouped by plates, or angles, for example.
• ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS: Both assemblies and parts will get
multinumbering, but how is determined by workflow and other settings.
The default value is ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS.

WARNING Do not change the value during a project.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 384 U

 See also
XS_MULTI_NUMBERING_INCLUDE_ASSEMBLY_PARTS (page 255)
XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_WHEN_COPYING_DRAWING_VIEWS (page 385)
XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR (page 387)
XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR (page 253)
XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR (page 384)
XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR (page 358)
XS_PART_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING (page 269)
XS_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING (page 45)
XS_CAST_UNIT_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING (page 66)
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_MULTI_NUMBERS (page 403)
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBERS (page 402)
XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_PART_MULTI_CHARACTERS (page 251)
XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_CHARACTERS (page 250)

XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_WHEN_COPYING_DRAWING_
VIEWS
Category: Numbering
Set this advanced option to TRUE to use multinumbering when copying
drawing views. If you do not want to use multinumbering, set it to FALSE. The
default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also
XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR (page 384)

XS_USE_NEW_PLATE_DESIGNATION
Category
Plate Work
Use this advanced option to control if the width and length are switched in
parts if the width is greater than the length. The options are:
• Option is not used: set value to blank or FALSE.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 385 U

 • Option is used only for steel parts: set value to FOR_STEEL_PARTS_ONLY.
• Option is used for all parts: set value to TRUE. This option is also used if
value is set to anything else that does not match the other options above.
This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

Example
A beam has the profile BL15*240 and the distance between beam endpoints is
changed to 215 mm:
• If XS_USE_NEW_PLATE_DESIGNATION is used, the length of the beam is
fixed at 240, and the beam profile changes to BL15*215.
• If XS_USE_NEW_PLATE_DESIGNATION is not used, the length of the beam
is 215 and the profile remains BL15*240.

XS_USE_NEW_WELD_PLACING
Category
Welds
If you have set welds visible in the drawing, this advanced option affects in
which drawing view (front, back, top, or bottom) Tekla Structures draws the
welds.
• When the advanced option is set to TRUE, Tekla Structures draws welds in
the view that has the best visibility to the secondary part (default).
• When the advanced option is set to FALSE, Tekla Structures selects the
view according to the main part.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_USE_NEW_USNOTCH
Category
Components
Use to indicate whether to locate the horizontal cut of a notch above or below
the flange of the main beam. The default value is TRUE. If you do not want to
use the US style notch, set this advanced options to FALSE.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 386 U

 Used with the following notching options:

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_USE_NUMBER_SELECTED_FOR_DRAWING_CREATION_AND_
UPDATE
Category: Numbering

If the numbering is not up to date when you create a drawing, Tekla Structures
asks you to number the model.
Set this advanced option to TRUE to number only the assemblies and parts
that have the same numbering series as the selected part (or the main part of
the selected drawing).
When set to TRUE, this advanced option does the same as if you clicked
Drawings & reports --> Number series of selected objects . TRUE is the
default value.
If you set this advanced option to FALSE, Tekla Structures numbers the whole
model, which is the same as clicking Drawings & reports --> Numbering -->
Number modified objects .
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR
Category: Numbering
Use to define which objects have numeric multi-numbers. The options are:
• ASSEMBLIES
• PARTS
• ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS
• NONE
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 387 U

 Example
If you set this advanced option to PARTS, Tekla Structures displays the part
multinumber as e.g. 101/1, instead of 101/a.

See also
XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR (page 384)

XS_USE_OLD_DRAWING_CREATION_SETTINGS
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
Set the advanced option XS_USE_OLD_DRAWING_CREATION_SETTINGS to
TRUE to use old drawing functionality and old drawing view property dialog
boxes and subdialog boxes. In this old approach, drawing object properties
can be defined on both drawing and view level, not individually for each view,
like in the new view-level approach. View-level dimensioning rules are not
supported.
By default, this advanced option is not in use.
Where to change the value depends on your company or project size, and on
which level you need to unify certain enterprise-level settings. You can set this
advanced option to TRUE in the options.ini file under the current model
folder, in company's own company.ini file, your company's own role.ini
file, or the options.ini file in firm or project folders , for example.
Note that Trimble Solutions no longer maintains the old functionality and
dialog boxes. In practice, this means that new features, like custom
presentations or automatic view-level properties will not be available in the old
dialog boxes.

XS_USE_OLD_DRAWING_EXPORT
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
If you want to use the old DWG/DXF export, set the advanced option
XS_USE_OLD_DRAWING_EXPORT to TRUE in an .ini ile. This advanced option
is by default set to FALSE .
For instructions on using the old export, see Export a drawing to 2D DWG or
DXF (old export).

Alphabetical list of advanced options 388 U

 XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG
Category
Printing
Set this advanced option to TRUE to use Printer Catalog and Tekla Structures
own printer instances in printing.
The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_USE_OLD_POLYBEAM_LENGTH_CALCULATION
Category
Dimensioning: Unfolding
Set this advanced option to TRUE to calculate polybeam length using the
legacy method where lengths of straight parts are added together, without
taking the unfolding into account. If you set it to FALSE (default) and use the
new method, the polybeam length is defined by unfolding the polybeam first
and then calculating the length. This way of calculating gives a more accurate
value for the polybeam length.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

NOTE Using this advanced option is not recommended, because the length
may not be reported correctly in all cases, especially for polybeams
with curved chamfers.

NOTE When you switch on this advanced option, other ways to calculate
polybeam length are not used by Tekla Structures, for example,
XS_CALCULATE_POLYBEAM_LENGTH_ALONG_REFERENCE_LINE,
XS_DONT_USE_NEUTRAL_AXIS_FOR_RADIUS or the unfold parameter
settings in file unfold_corner_ratios.inp.

See also
XS_CALCULATE_POLYBEAM_LENGTH_ALONG_REFERENCE_LINE (page 63)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 389 U

 XS_USE_ONLY_INCHES_IN_SHEET_SIZES
Category
Imperial Units
Set this advanced option to TRUE to have sheet sizes in layouts and drawing
lists in inches. To have the sheet sizes in feet and inches, set it to FALSE
(default).
In order for this advanced option to work, set the advanced options
XS_IMPERIAL and XS_IMPERIAL_INPUT to TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_USE_ONLY_INCHES_IN_WELD_LENGTH
Category
Imperial units
Set this advanced option to TRUE to only display inches in weld length
symbols. If you do not want to do this, set this advanced option to FALSE. This
advanced option only works when the imperial units are in use. The default
value is TRUE.
When you only display inches means that instead of showing 1ft 2inch it shows
14inch, for example.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_USE_ONLY_NOMINAL_REBAR_DIAMETER
Category
Concrete Detailing
Nominal diameter is the diameter used for calculating the cross section area
of the reinforcing bar. Actual diameter takes into account the ribs, and tells the
smallest hole diameter where the bar fits.
Values used for nominal and actual diameter are defined in
rebar_database.inp, which is located in the environment folders in
\<environment>\profil.
Set the advanced option to TRUE to use nominal diameter. To use the actual
diameter set this advanced option to FALSE. The default value is FALSE.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 390 U

 When the advanced option is set to FALSE, and you open a model created
earlier than Tekla Structures version 18, the center line of the reinforcing bars
stays in place and the concrete cover is reduced. All bending dimensions of the
reinforcing bar increase. To solve this problem, either set the advanced option
to TRUE or modify the concrete covers of all reinforcing bars to the correct
value.
When reinforcing bars are exported to Unitechnik, you can select to export
either nominal or actual diameters. For other exports (for example, BVBS), the
nominal diameter is always used in the exported definitions regardless of this
advanced option.

WARNING Do not change this option during a project.

Changing the advanced option also changes the modeled
reinforcing bars. This means that if the actual diameter will be
used, the reinforcing bar looks thicker in the model. To
accommodate for the thicker reinforcing bar, Tekla Structures will
automatically change also concrete cover thickness. When you
change the option, Tekla Structures changes the concrete cover
values after next restart.

This advanced option is role specific. When the type SYSTEM(ROLE) is in use,
the default value is used. When the type MODEL(ROLE) or DRAWING(ROLE) is
in use, you can change the value, which is then the same for all users in the
current model.

XS_USE_OPENING_SYMBOL_IN_BORDER_HOLES
Category
Drawing Properties

Use XS_USE_OPENING_SYMBOL_IN_BORDER_HOLES to select whether to use

an opening symbol in openings located at part borders.

Value Description
TRUE Opening symbol is used in the
openings located at the border of
the part. The symbol used
depends on the setting of the
advanced option

Alphabetical list of advanced options 391 U

 Value Description
XS_USE_CROSS_FOR_OPENING_S
YMBOL

FALSE No opening symbol is used for

openings at the border of the
This is the default.
part.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_USE_CROSS_FOR_OPENING_SYMBOL (page 377)

XS_USE_OPENING_SYMBOL_IN_CORNER_HOLES
Category
Drawing Properties

Use XS_USE_OPENING_SYMBOL_IN_CORNER_HOLES to select whether to use

the opening symbol in openings located in part corners.

Value Description
TRUE Opening symbol is used in the
openings located in the corner of
the part. The symbol used

Alphabetical list of advanced options 392 U

 Value Description
depends on the setting of the
advanced option
XS_USE_CROSS_FOR_OPENING_S
YMBOL.

FALSE No opening symbol is used for

openings in the corner of the part.
This is the default.

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_USE_CROSS_FOR_OPENING_SYMBOL (page 377)

XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING
Category
Dimensioning: Parts
Set this advanced option to TRUE to make the position dimension of plates
dependent on the position of the plates in the model. When a plate is
positioned underneath the work plane, Tekla Structures will place the position
dimension on the top face of the plate. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 393 U

 XS_USE_POINT_AS_SEPARATOR_IN_PROFILE_NAME
Category
Profiles

Set this advanced option to TRUE to use the period character (.) as the
separator in parametric profile names, instead of using it as a decimal
separator. This increases the number of separators available in the US
imperial environment. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_USE_RECESS_SYMBOL_FOR_BORDER_AND_CORNER_
RECESSES
Category: Drawing properties
Use XS_USE_RECESS_SYMBOL_FOR_BORDER_AND_CORNER_RECESSES to
select whether to use the recess symbol in corner and border recesses. TRUE
is the default value.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Value Description
TRUE Recess symbol is used in the recesses
located at the border or in the corner
of the part. The symbol used depends
on the setting of the advanced option
XS_USE_CROSS_FOR_OPENING_SYMB
OL

FALSE No recess symbol is used for recesses

at the borders or in the corners of the
part.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 394 U

 See also
XS_USE_CROSS_FOR_OPENING_SYMBOL (page 377)
XS_USE_OPENING_SYMBOL_IN_BORDER_HOLES (page 391)
XS_USE_OPENING_SYMBOL_IN_CORNER_HOLES (page 392)

XS_USE_REPAIR_NUMBERING_INSTEAD_OF_NUMBERING
Category: Numbering
If this advanced option is set to TRUE, Tekla Structures automatically repairs
numbering instead of only running numbering.
When this advanced option is set to TRUE:
• Using the Number modified objects command does the same as using
the Diagnose and repair numbering: All command
• Using the Number series of selected objects command does the same as
using the Diagnose and repair numbering: Series of selected objects
command
The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_USE_ROUND_MAIN_PART_COORDINATES_FOR_
SECONDARY_PART_ANGLE
Category
Dimensioning: Parts
Set to TRUE to have the secondary part skewed dimensions and angle
dimension use one of the main part directions if the main part profile is round
or round tube. The default value is TRUE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_USE_SCREW_POINT_ELEVATION_DIM
Category
Dimensioning: Bolts

Alphabetical list of advanced options 395 U

 Set this advanced option to TRUE to display the elevation dimensions of a
column to the working points of a neighboring part. If you set it to FALSE, the
elevation dimensions are displayed at the ends of the column. The default
value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
An example, where the value is TRUE:

An example, where the value is FALSE:

XS_USE_SMALLER_GUSSET_PLATE
Category
Components
Set this advanced option to TRUE to minimize the size of rectangular gusset
plates created by gusset connections. You can create smaller gusset plates by
using a single bracing and secondary bolts dimensioned to the middle of the

Alphabetical list of advanced options 396 U

 secondary part. Tekla Structures generates a triangular gusset plate when the
main part is located between diagonals. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_USE_SMART_PAN
Category: Drawing View
Set this advanced option to TRUE to enable optimized zooming and panning in
drawings. This advanced option is by default set to FALSE, because using
optimization sometimes results in unwanted checkerboard effect.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.
Restart Tekla Structures after changing the value to activate the new setting.

XS_USE_SMOOTH_LINES
Category
Model View
Set this advanced option to TRUE to use anti-aliasing to minimize jagged edges
in model views. Before using this advanced option, check that your display
adapter supports anti-aliasing. This advanced option is supported only for
OpenGL rendering.
The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_USE_SOFTWARE_RENDERING
Category
Model view
Set this advanced option to TRUE to bypass your graphic adapter in model
views. Use this advanced option if you have problems with your display (for
example, lines are not drawn correctly). The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 397 U

 XS_USE_SPECIAL_FILLER_PLATE_THICKNESS
Category
Profiles

Set this advanced option to TRUE to have shim plate thicknesses comply with
Japanese standards. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_USE_TUBE_INNER_LENGTH_IN_DIMENSIONING
Category
Dimensioning: Parts
Set to TRUE to dimension the overall length of tube profiles along the inner
surface instead of outer surface. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_USE_USABSOLUTE_ARROW_TYPE_FOR_ABSOLUTE_
DIMENSIONS
Category
Dimensioning: General
Set this advanced option to TRUE to use the arrow shape US Absolute also for
normal absolute dimensions. FALSE is the default value.
You can select the arrow shape from the US Absolute dimensions list on the
Appearance tab in the dimension properties dialog box.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_USE_USER_DEFINED_REBAR_LENGTH_AND_WEIGHT
Category
Concrete Detailing

Alphabetical list of advanced options 398 U

 Set this advanced option to TRUE to calculate the length and weight of the
reinforcing bars in Rebar Shape Manager using formulas in the fields L and
WEIGHT.
If you set this advanced option to FALSE, the length and the weight are
automatically calculated according to the center line of the reinforcing bars.
The default value is FALSE.
To read the length and weight from Rebar Shape Manager, you also have to
set XS_USE_USER_DEFINED_REBARSHAPERULES to TRUE.

NOTE This setting only affects reports. If you set this advanced option to
TRUE and you have not defined the formulas for length and weight in
Rebar Shape Manager, the values in the reports show zero (0).

This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_USE_USER_DEFINED_REBARSHAPERULES (page 399)

XS_USE_USER_DEFINED_REBARSHAPERULES
Category
Concrete Detailing
Use this advanced option to define whether reinforcing bar bending shapes
are recognized according to the bending shape definitions created with Rebar
Shape Manager and saved in the RebarShapeRules.xml file.
This advanced option is set to TRUE by default, meaning that the bending
shape recognition uses the reinforcing bar shapes saved in the
RebarShapeRules.xml file.
If you set this advanced option to FALSE, the Rebar Shape Manager
definitions are not used, and the definitions in
rebar_schedule_config.inp are used instead. We recommend that you
set this advanced option to TRUE and use Rebar Shape Manager.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 399 U

 XS_USE_VERTICAL_PLACING_FOR_COLUMNS_IN
Category
Drawing Properties
Use to place columns vertically in drawings. Use the following options to
specify the types of columns to place vertically:
• ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS
• SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS
• ASSEMBLY_AND_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XSUSERDATADIR
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
This advanced option is system specific and is read from
teklastructures.ini. Generally, there is no need to modify system-specific
settings. Do not modify them if you are not an administrator.

Example
set XSUSERDATADIR=%LOCALAPPDATA%\Tekla Structures\<version
number>. This means, for example in Windows 7, C:\Users\<user>
\AppData\Local\Tekla Structures\<version>\UserSettings.

XS_USER_DEFINED_BOLT_SYMBOL_TABLE
Category
Marking: Bolts
Defines the location of the user-defined bolt symbol table file. For example,
enter bolt_symbol_table.txt.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

Alphabetical list of advanced options 400 U

 XS_USER_DEFINED_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATORS
Category
Profiles
Use this advanced option to define additional separators to separate
dimensions in the names of parametric profiles. The separators can consist of
multiple characters.
Separate the values with commas, for example GA,ABC.

WARNING Follow these rules in naming:

• Use uppercase letters in separator names.
• Do not enter digits, commas, or special characters in
separator names.
• Do not start separator names with a dash (-) or full stop (.).
• Do not start separator names with an inch separator (", ', /)
when using imperial units.

In addition to these characters, Tekla Structures always recognizes the

standard separator characters X, *, -, and /, and also the character defined by
the advanced option XS_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATOR (page 268).

XS_USER_SETTINGS_DIRECTORY
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file. It is system-
specific.
This advanced option is set as a Windows environment variable in the
Windows system properties.
The path to the folder that contains the user.ini file and the options.bin
file.
The default value is %XSUSERDATADIR%\UserSettings\

See also
XSUSERDATADIR (page 400)

3.21 V

Alphabetical list of advanced options 401 V

 XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_POSITION_
NUMBERS
Category
Numbering
Specifies valid letters for assembly family position numbers. You must specify
all the valid letters in this advanced option. By default, the letters A- Z are valid.
For example, you might not want to use D, because it is easy to mix up with O
and 0. In this case you would enter letters A - Z but leave out D.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING (page 43)

XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_QUALIFIER
Category
Numbering
Specifies valid letters for the assembly family number qualifier. You must
specify all the valid letters in this advanced option. By default, the letters A - Z
are valid.
For example, you might not want to use D, because it is easy to mix it up with
O and 0. In this case you would enter letters A - Z but leave out D.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_QUALIFIER=GHJKL

See also
XS_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING (page 43)

Alphabetical list of advanced options 402 V

 XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBERS
Category: Numbering
Use to specify the valid letters for assembly multinumbers. You must specify
all the valid letters in this advanced option. By default, letters A - Z are valid.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBERS=ABEG

See also
XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR (page 384)
XS_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING (page 45)
XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_CHARACTERS (page 250)
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_MULTI_NUMBERS (page 403)

XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_NUMBERS
Category
Numbering
Specifies valid characters for assembly position numbers. Enter all the valid
letters, for example, ABEG. By default, letters A - Z are valid.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING (page 47)

XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_MULTI_NUMBERS
Category: Numbering
Use to specify the valid letters for part multinumbers. You must specify all the
valid letters in this advanced option. By default, letters a - z are valid.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_MULTI_NUMBERS=abeg

Alphabetical list of advanced options 403 V

 See also
XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR (page 384)
XS_PART_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING (page 269)
XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_PART_MULTI_CHARACTERS (page 251)
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBERS (page 402)

XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_POSITION_NUMBERS
Category
Numbering
Use to specify the valid characters for part position numbers. Enter all the
valid letters. For example, ABEG. By default letters A - Z are valid.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also
XS_PART_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING (page 270)

XS_VIEW_DIM_LINE_COLOR
Category
Model View
Use to change the dimension line color in model views. Define the color using
RGB values:
<value for red> <value for green> <value for blue>.
Separate the values with spaces. Define the values on a scale of 0 to 1. The
default values are 1.0 0.0 1.0.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Example

RGB value Color

1.0 1.0 1.0 White
1.0 0.0 0.0 Red
0.0 1.0 0.0 Green
0.0 0.0 1.0 Blue

Alphabetical list of advanced options 404 V

 RGB value Color
1.0 1.0 0.0 Yellow

XS_VIEW_DIM_TEXT_COLOR
Category
Model View
Use to change the dimension text color in model views. Define the color using
RGB values:
<value for red> <value for green> <value for blue>.
Separate the values with spaces. Define the values on a scale of 0 to 1. The
default values are 0.0 0.0 0.0.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Example

RGB value Color

1.0 1.0 1.0 White
1.0 0.0 0.0 Red
0.0 1.0 0.0 Green
0.0 0.0 1.0 Blue
1.0 1.0 0.0 Yellow

XS_VIEW_FAST_BOLT_COLOR
Category
Model View
Use to define the color of bolts in model views when you are using the
representation option Fast. Define the color using RGB (Red Green Blue)
values. The scale is from 0 to 1. Separate the numbers with spaces. The default
color is white 1.0 1.0 1.0.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Example
To change the color to black, enter 0.0 0.0 0.0.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 405 V

 See also

XS_VIEW_FREE_MEASURE_PLANE
Category
Model View
Use to define the plane where the results of free measure are shown. You can
have the distances displayed in the local and/or global coordinate system.
The possible values are VIEW, WORK and BOTH. The default value is VIEW.

NOTE If you set the advanced option to BOTH, only one value is shown if the
values are identical.

Example
In the following example, the advanced option has been set to BOTH:

XS_VIEW_HEIGHT
Category
Model View
Use to define the default height of views. Enter the value in pixels.The default
value is 768.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 406 V

 XS_VIEW_PART_LABEL_COLOR
Category
Model View
Use to change the part label color in model views. Define the color using RGB
values:
<value for red> <value for green> <value for blue>.
Separate the values with spaces. Define the values on a scale of 0 to 1. The
default is black 0.0 0.0 0.0.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Example

RGB value Color

1.0 1.0 1.0 White
1.0 0.0 0.0 Red
0.0 1.0 0.0 Green
0.0 0.0 1.0 Blue
1.0 1.0 0.0 Yellow

XS_VIEW_POSITION_X
Category
Model View
Use to define the default horizontal position of view windows. Origin is in the
top left corner of the Tekla Structures or client window. Enter the position in
pixels.The default value is 10.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_VIEW_POSITION_Y
Category
Model view

Alphabetical list of advanced options 407 V

 Use to define the default vertical position of view windows. Origin is in the top
left corner of the Tekla Structures or client window. Enter the position in pixels.
The default value is 10.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_VIEW_TITLE_FONT
Category
Drawing View
Use to specify the font for view direction marks. The default value is Arial. If
this advanced option is not set, Tekla Structures uses the font specified for
XS_DEFAULT_FONT.

TIP If you want to change the view label font, go to View Properties -->
Mark Contents and change the font.

See also
XS_DEFAULT_FONT (page 99)

XS_VIEW_WIDTH
Category
Model View
Use to define the default width for views. Enter the width in pixels. The default
value is 1024.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_VISUALIZE_VIEW_IN_ANOTHER_VIEWS
Category
Drawing View
Set this advanced option to TRUE if you want to highlight the view boundary of
the selected view in another view. If you do not want to highlight the view

Alphabetical list of advanced options 408 V

 boundary in another view, set this advanced option to FALSE. The default
value is TRUE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_VISUALIZE_VIEW_IN_FATHER_VIEW_ONLY
Category
Drawing View
Set this advanced option to TRUE if you want to visualize the section view and
detail view boundary boxes only in the view where the section mark or the
detail mark is located. If you set this advanced option to FALSE, the view
boundary boxes are visualized in all of the views where this is possible and the
boundary box fits inside the view to some extent. The default value is TRUE.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also

XS_VISUALIZE_VIEW_IN_ANOTHER_VIEWS (page 408)

XS_VISUALIZE_VIEW_NEIGHBOUR_PART_EXTENSION
Category
Drawing View
Set this advanced option to TRUE to show neighbor part extensions in drawing
views. If you set this advanced option to FALSE, the neighbor part extensions
are not shown. The default value is TRUE.
When you select a view, the view extension for neighbor parts for that view is
also shown in other views.

NOTE If neighbor parts are hidden by setting Neighbor parts to None in the
Neighbor Part Properties dialox box, neighbor part extensions are
not displayed even if you set this advanced option to TRUE.

This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

See also

Alphabetical list of advanced options 409 V

3.22 W

XS_WARP_MAX_ANGLE_BETWEEN_CS
Category
Concrete Detailing

Use to define the maximum angle between adjacent polygonal parts of the
warped shape.
Enter the value in degrees. You get best results if you use values between 0.5 -
10.0. The default value eis 0.5.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_WARP_MAX_DEVIATION
Category
Concrete Detailing

Use to define the maximum difference between real warped shape and the
polygonal warped shape in the model.
Enter the value in millimeters. You get best results if you use values between
5.0 -100.0. The default value is 10.0.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_WEB_PUBLISHING_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY
Category
This advanced option must be set in an initialization (.ini) file.
Set in the user.ini file to define the location of the folder containing Web
Viewer templates.

NOTE When you set this advanced option, Tekla Structures searches for Web
Viewer templates only in the folder defined with this advanced option.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 410 W

 XS_WELD_FILTER_TYPE
Category
Welds
Use to define how Tekla Structures filters weld types.
• EXACT: Tekla Structures filters the welds equal to the default size in the
Welding properties dialog box
• MIN: Tekla Structures filters all welds equal to or smaller than the default
size in the Welding properties dialog box. This is the default value.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_WELD_FONT
Category
Drawing Properties

Use to specify the font for weld text. The default value is Arial. If this advanced
option is not set, Tekla Structures uses the default font defined for
XS_DEFAULT_FONT.

See also
XS_DEFAULT_FONT (page 99)

XS_WELDING_LENGTH_TOLERANCE
Category
Welds
Use to specify the minimum edge length Tekla Structures should take into
account when searching for a location for a weld. The default value is 30 mm.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 411 W

 XS_WELDING_TOUCH_TOLERANCE
Category
Welds
Use to define the maximum possible gap between two parts welded together.
The default value is 30 mm.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_WELD_LENGTH_CC_SEPARATOR_CHAR
Category
Welds
Use this advanced option to set the separator character used in the weld
symbol between the weld length and the pitch (center-to-center spacing) of
weld segments. Enter @ to define the separator character according to the
AISC standard (3@12). Enter - to define the separator character according to
the ISO standard (100-300). The default value is -.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

See also

XS_WELD_NUMBER_FORMAT
Category
Marking: General
Use to define the weld number format.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

Example
In XS_WELD_NUMBER_FORMAT=W%3.3d:
• W is the prefix. The rest of the string defines the number format.
• The first number defines the minimum field width.
• The second number defines the minimum quantity of numbers to display.
• % and d (integer value) indicate the format.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 412 W

 See also
XS_JOINT_NUMBER_FORMAT (page 226)

XS_WORKING_POINTS_VALID_ALSO_OUTSIDE_PART
Category
Dimensioning: Parts
Set this advanced option to TRUE to also draw reference dimensions for points
outside part end points. The default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

XS_ZERO_POINT_SYMBOL_OLD_WAY
Category
Dimensioning: General
Set this advanced option to TRUE to use RD marks containing a circle rather
than the text RD to indicate the zero point of dimensions when you use US
Absolute dimension types. By default, RD marks contain the text RD. The
default value is FALSE.
This advanced option is model specific and the setting is saved in the options
database.

3.23 Z

XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO
Category
Model View
Use to configure the Zoom in and Zoom out commands. The default value is
0.25. Increase this value to zoom more with a single mouse click.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 413 Z

 XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO_IN_MOUSEWHEEL_MODE
Category
Model View
Set the zoom ratio when you are scrolling using the middle mouse button.
Enter a decimal value. Increase the value to zoom more with a single mouse
click.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO_IN_SCROLL_MODE
Category
Model View
Set the zoom ratio when scrolling and holding down the wheel. Enter a
decimal value. Increase the value to zoom more with a single mouse click. The
default value is 0.01.
This advanced option is user specific and the setting is saved in options.bin
under user folder. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the new value.

Alphabetical list of advanced options 414 Z

4 Disclaimer

© 2017 Trimble Solutions Corporation and its licensors. All rights reserved.
This Software Manual has been developed for use with the referenced
Software. Use of the Software, and use of this Software Manual are governed
by a License Agreement. Among other provisions, the License Agreement sets
certain warranties for the Software and this Manual, disclaims other
warranties, limits recoverable damages, defines permitted uses of the
Software, and determines whether you are an authorized user of the Software.
All information set forth in this manual is provided with the warranty set forth
in the License Agreement. Please refer to the License Agreement for important
obligations and applicable limitations and restrictions on your rights. Trimble
does not guarantee that the text is free of technical inaccuracies or
typographical errors. Trimble reserves the right to make changes and
additions to this manual due to changes in the software or otherwise.
In addition, this Software Manual is protected by copyright law and by
international treaties. Unauthorized reproduction, display, modification, or
distribution of this Manual, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and
criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the full extent permitted by law.
Tekla, Tekla Structures, Tekla BIMsight, BIMsight, Tekla Civil, Tedds, Solve,
Fastrak and Orion are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Trimble
Solutions Corporation in the European Union, the United States, and/or other
countries. More about Trimble Solutions trademarks: http://www.tekla.com/
tekla-trademarks. Trimble is a registered trademark or trademark of Trimble
Inc. in the European Union, in the United States and/or other countries. More
about Trimble trademarks: http://www.trimble.com/trademarks.aspx. Other
product and company names mentioned in this Manual are or may be
trademarks of their respective owners. By referring to a third-party product or
brand, Trimble does not intend to suggest an affiliation with or endorsement
by such third party and disclaims any such affiliation or endorsement, except
where otherwise expressly stated.
Portions of this software:
D-Cubed 2D DCM © 2010 Siemens Industry Software Limited. All rights
reserved.

Disclaimer 415 Z
EPM toolkit © 1995-2006 Jotne EPM Technology a.s., Oslo, Norway. All rights
reserved.
Open Cascade Express Mesh © 2015 OPEN CASCADE S.A.S. All rights reserved.
PolyBoolean C++ Library © 2001-2012 Complex A5 Co. Ltd. All rights reserved.
FLY SDK - CAD SDK © 2012 VisualIntegrity™. All rights reserved.
Teigha © 2002-2016 Open Design Alliance. All rights reserved.
CADhatch.com © 2017. All rights reserved.
FlexNet Publisher © 2014 Flexera Software LLC. All rights reserved.
This product contains proprietary and confidential technology, information
and creative works owned by Flexera Software LLC and its licensors, if any. Any
use, copying, publication, distribution, display, modification, or transmission of
such technology in whole or in part in any form or by any means without the
prior express written permission of Flexera Software LLC is strictly prohibited.
Except where expressly provided by Flexera Software LLC in writing,
possession of this technology shall not be construed to confer any license or
rights under any Flexera Software LLC intellectual property rights, whether by
estoppel, implication, or otherwise.
To see the third party open source software licenses, go to Tekla Structures,
click File menu --> Help --> About Tekla Structures and then click the 3rd
party licenses option.
The elements of the software described in this Manual are protected by
several patents and possibly pending patent applications in the United States
and/or other countries. For more information go to page http://
www.tekla.com/tekla-patents.

Disclaimer 416 Z
Index

A BS...........................................................259,260

accuracy......................................................... 31
in modeling............................................ 350
of parts................................................... 350
C
of profiles............................................... 350 c/c format.......................................................70
adaptivity........................................................32 chamfer
advanced options..........................................19 accuracy.............................................. 70,94
AISC weld marks............................................32 length accuracy........................................72
anti-aliasing................................................. 397 change symbol............................................ 214
application error log..................................... 40 CIMsteel
applications database name........................................77
folders.......................................................41 database path..........................................78
arrows express file............................................... 78
reinforcing bar dimension lines.......... 293 password.................................................. 78
assemblies clash check
numbering loose parts......................... 375 reinforcing bars....................................... 79
asterisk........................................................... 73 CNC....
AutoConnection 81,82,174,175,177,178,180,181,182,183,252,
connecting built-in members.................87 316
tolerance.................................................. 49 color
UDL........................................................... 50 background.............................................. 52
autosave colors
folder........................................................ 51 in drawings.............................................376
pour breaks............................................283
pour objects...........................................284

B column marks
angle....................................................... 126
background color.......................................... 52 columns
basic view mark text angle......................................126
height........................................................54 column
horizontal position.................................. 55 vertically in drawings............................ 399
vertical position....................................... 55 company settings.......................................... 84
width......................................................... 55 company.ini................................................... 84
bolt mark contents components
size..............................................58,323,344 page 10................................................... 354
bolts in drawings page 9..................................................... 354
filtering away bolt types....................... 264 connecting side mark................................. 249
omitting bolt types................................264 connecting side symbol........................ 86,204
bolts
bolt axis representation......................... 61
marks........................................................ 58

417
D font size
grids........................................................ 100
design values................................................. 24 font
destination folder....................................... 252 default.......................................................99
detail views.................................................. 409 default font size.......................................99
diameter prefix..............................................57 for cut symbol..........................................96
dimension point change symbol...............214 for dimension........................................ 112
dimensions for DXF.................................................... 186
dimension line color............................. 404 for grid text............................................ 209
extension line origin offset.................. 111 for reports.............................................. 285
text color................................................ 405 in marks..................................................237
dragging size in Template Editor.................. 362,363
drawing views.......................................... 73 forces.............................................................. 24
drawing sheet position on screen.............163 FS........................................................... 259,260
drawing views
exporting frames...................................275
printing frames......................................275
drawing views
G
dragging....................................................73 gage format................................................... 69
neighbor part visibility..........................409 GOL format.................................................. 204
visualizing detail views......................... 409 graphic adapter
visualizing section views.......................409 overriding............................................... 397
drawings grids
opening maximized.............................. 265 font sized................................................100
DWG overall dimension..................................207
importing........................................ 184,219
DXF
file size....................................................212 H
text height.............................................. 186 hard stamps.................................................316
hathces
in drawings.............................................144
E haunch profiles
environments................................................ 97 showing in drawings............................. 170
extrema, see view boundaries.................. 408 Help
location...................................................211
hole marks

F size...................................................325,346
size of slotted holes............... 231,327,347
filtering away bolt types in drawings........264 holes
filtering slotted hole dimension.........................146
separator................................................200
firm folder....................................................200
fixed................................................................ 73
flat bars.......................................................... 74
I
designation............................................ 381 importing DWG........................................... 219
setting the prefix................................... 201 importing
thickness tolerance............................... 202 DWG files................................................184
tolerance................................................ 202 inches

418
 disabling................................................. 311 error.......................................................... 81
symbol in dimensions.............................34 inner shape options..............................175
symbol in welds....................................... 34 notch corner roundings....................... 175
int arrays...................................................... 103 neighbor parts
ISO weld marks..............................................32 view extensions..................................... 409
north mark symbol..................................... 259
hidden.................................................... 212
L in GA drawings.......................................205
scale........................................................ 258
licenses scale in GA drawings.............................205
setting default license for a user role. 100 NS.......................................................... 259,260
line width........................................................53
local Tekla support
contacting...............................................357
locale............................................................ 353 O
omitting bolt types in drawings.................264
opening
M drawings maximized.............................265
orientation mark......................................... 212
marks orientation marks....................................... 205
bolts.......................................................... 58
line space............................................... 242
space between elements..................... 237
MIS................................................................ 252 P
model views parts
overriding graphic adapter.................. 397 representation.......................................158
modeling shortening in views........................329,330
more accurately.....................................350 placing
moving fixed.......................................................... 73
views on screen..................................... 248 polybeam length calculation................ 63,389
multi-byte languages.................................. 353 pour breaks
multidrawings colors...................................................... 283
view title............................................ 42,204 symbol.................................................... 284
multinumbers............................... 255,384,385 pour objects
available characters.......................402,403 colors...................................................... 284
format.......................................... 45,66,269 pours............................................................ 190
model prefix................................... 253,384 printing
number of characters....................250,251 dialog...................................................... 302
numeric.................................................. 387 drawing title........................................... 379
order....................................................... 358 remembering dialog values................. 302
view title................................................. 255 to file....................................................... 158
profiles
accuracy..................................................350
N protecting areas.......................................... 376
pull-outs....................................................... 297
NC....
82,174,175,177,178,180,181,182,183,252,
316
NC files

419
R support address.......................................... 357
symbols
Rebar Shape Manager................................399 reinforcing bar dimension lines.......... 293
rebars
dimension line symbols....................... 293
RebarShapeRules.xml................................ 399
reference lines
T
in drawings.............................................157 Tekla BIMsight
reference models publishing.............................................. 190
reference cache..................................... 300 timeout.........................................................203
reference points tolerance........................................................ 31
size.......................................................... 162
reinforcement
checking shape......................................297 U
hooks...................................................... 297 units
reinforcing bars converting........................................... 89,90
clash check............................................... 79 user-specific settings.................................. 400
dimension line symbols....................... 293
length and weight................................. 398
relative path in file location....................... 252
representation V
parts........................................................158 variables
restriction box, see view boundaries........408 see advanced options.............................19
roles view boundaries
setting default role for a user.............. 100 seeing in other views............................ 408
rows view extension for neighbor parts............409
in templates........................................... 378 view extrema, see view boundaries..........408
template rows........................................378 view restriction box, see view boundaries ....
408

S
SDNF............................................................. 315 W
section views............................................... 409 weld symbols................................................. 32
rotation...................................................309 welds
sheet inches in weld marks............................ 390
position on screen................................ 163 minimum edge length.......................... 411
shortening reference line length.............................251
parts in views..................................329,330
slotted hole mark contents
size...................................................327,347
snapping mode........................................... 227
X
absolute..................................................227 XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG...................... 158
global...................................................... 228
relative....................................................228
snapping Z
to end points......................................... 149 zooming
solid buffer size........................................... 350 defining zoom ratio...............................414
stacked fractions......................................... 351

420
original....................................................189
tolerance for mouse movements........273

421
422